Professional Documents
Culture Documents
APPLICATIONS
Before initial operation read these instructionsthoroughly, and retain for future reference.
YASKAVW
This character
manual
is display for
with operators
CRT in and
programming,
to
and
optional features
refer
to
builders
586-175
YASNAC
LX3
OPERATORS
STATION
PREFACE
When reading this manual keep in mind that the information contained herein does not cover every possible contingency which might be met during the operation. Any operation not described in this manual control, should not be attempted with the TJnless otherwise specified, of apply to the description sfiown in this manual. Feed Function Selection: the following programming rules examples
G99
(mm/rev)
The functions and performance as NC machine are determined by a combination of machine and the NC control. For operation of your NC machine, the machine tool builders manual shall take prl ority over this manual. The illustration of machine control station be used for your reference in understanding function. For detailed array of operators and names, refer to machine tool builders manual. should the devices
Reference Zero Point (Return to reference matic return) : + Absolute Work Zero Point: Zero in MM
zero
by
manual
and
auto-
+ Point +?
Coordinate
Dimensions:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION
2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2,8 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 4. PROGRAMMING Tape Format 1 and 7 Rate Function (T-Function) Functions Functions PUNCHING 148 148 150 Handling 150 STATION 151 Lamps 155 156 NC Data into APPENDIX 4 151 WITH 6.10 6.11 10 (S-Function) 14 (M-Function) (G-Function) 148 6.7 Manual Operation Operation 216 Automatic Operation Interrupting Automatic 19 23 6.5 6.6 NC TAPE 13 sequence Number 6 1 1 5. 5.1 5,2 6. 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 MACHINE Switching Operation OPERATION Inspection Turning Manual CONTROL Units STATION on the Control 198 213 on Power 213 187 Station 187
Number Words
Traverse
for Stored Lead Screw Error and Stored Stroke Limit 214 for in Tape Automatic and Operation Mode 214 215
Memory
Tape
code
6.8 6.9
in MD I Mode
216
Interrupting
. Automatic
off Power 217
STANDARD NC CRT CHARACTER Pushbuttons, Power Display Loading Memory Tape Edit ON/OFF and Part (in)
Turning 217
Power
LIST LIST
OF SETTING OF PARAMETER
A1 A? COM-
Writing
Operation and
STORED LEADSCREW PENSATION A25 LIST OF STANDARD PUT SIGNALS A26 LIST LIST OF OF ALARM DATA
lNPUT/OUT-
Verifying 180
5 6
CODES A54
A35
4.8
and
Editing
INDEX
Subject A Chapter Par.
Page
ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL INPUT S............................ 2 ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL PROGRAMl,41NG (G90, G91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Acceleration and Deceleration of Rapid Traverse and Manual Feed .......................................$......2 ......................................... 4 ADDING PART PROGRAMS ADDRESS KEYS ................................................... 4 Address Search ....................................................4 ALARM CODE (ALM) DISPLAY ..................................... 4 Alarm Code Display ................................................ 4 Alarm Number of Microprograms ..................................2 Argument Designation.............................................. 2 AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET ..................................... 5 AU TO MOD E HANDLE OFFSET SWITCHt ...................44......5 AUTOMATIC ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION ........0..0.....2 AUTOMATIC COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING+ ..................... 5 AutomaticNose RFunction .........................................2 AU TOMATIC OPERATION INMDI h40DE ...........................6 AUTOMATIC RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT (G28) ................ 2 Automatic Threading Cycle (G76) ...................................2 AutomaticWritingintothe Tool CoordinateMemory ................. 5 Automatic Writingintothe Work CoordinateSystem ShiftLIemory..................................................5
........ 2.3.5 . . . .
. . . . . . . . 2.8.31 ..
8
146
........ 2.4.3. . . . 12 ... 4.6.4 .,. . 181 . 4.1.4 . . . . 153 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ 4.3.3.4 4.3.9 -.O.. 4.3.9.1 -.. 2.8.23.102.8.23.2 . 161 172 172 88 68
5.2.7 ---- 212 5.1<28 ---- 195 2.4.3 ..... 12 5.2.2 ..... 199 2.8.19.1 .. 56 6.8 ....... 216 2.8.11 .... 35 2.8.25.8 . 109 5.2.3.3 . 203
BUFFER REGISTER ................................................ 2 ........ 2.1.5 .. 6 BUFFERING FUN CTION(M93, M92)t ..............................-2 ........ 2.7.3 . 19 CANNED CYCLES (G90, G92, G94) ................................ 2 CHECKING REGISTERED PART PROGRAM NUMBER ................. 4 CircularArc Multiple Cornering (G112).............................2 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) ........................... 2 CIRCULAR PATH hfODE ON/OFF ON TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION (G97, L496)+ ................................................. 2 COMMAND DATA DISPLAY ..........................................4 Command Data Display .............................................4 Command Pulse AccumulationRegisterDisplay (COMMAND PULSE) ........................................... 4 Conditionsfor the Automatic Nose R Compensation Function to be Enabled ................................................ 2 Conditionsof the Specifications to Perform FS Editing.............. 5 Considerations and Remarks for Macro Programs ................... 2 CONSTANT DISPLAY .............................................. CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL (G96, G97)t ............... Control Comma~ ds ................................................. CoordinateSystem Setting (G50 X_. Z_. ) ........................ COORDINATE WORD S.............................................. COORDINATE WORDS .............................................. CORNERING (Gil, G12)+ ........................................... CRT CHARACTER DISPLAY ........................................ CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY ..................................... CURSOR KEYS .................................................... CUTTING DEPTH OVERRIDE CYCLE START PUSHBUTTON 4 2 2 5 2 2 2 4 4 4 ........ ........ ........ ........ 2.8.26 4.6.1 ..... 2,8.30.2 .. 2.8.4 ..... 116 180 143 28
........ 2.7.4 ..... 20 ........ 4.3.2 ..... 157 ........ 4.3.2.1 ... 158 ........ 4.3.4.9.. 165
........ 2,8.19.2.. 56 ........ 5.1.31.7.. 198 ........ 2.8.23.9 . 84 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ....... ........ ........ 4.3.1 ..... 2.8.27 ..-. 2.8.23,6-. 5.2.3,5... 2.3 ....... 2.3.1 ..... 2.8.7 ..... 4,1.2 ....4,3.4 ..... 4.1.8 ..... 156 123 81 205 7 7 31 152 162 154
SWITCHt FOR G71 AND G72 .......... 5 ........ 5.1.29 .... 195 AND LAMP .......................... 5 ........ 5.1.2 .... 188 ........ 4.1.5.... 153 ........ 2.1.3 ...,. 6 ........ 4.6.5 ..... 182 .,.,.... 4.3.9.3 ... 173 ........ 2,8.23.8 ,. 83 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ 4.3 ....... 4.3.2.2 ... 4.3.2.3 ... 4.3,3.3 ... 4.6.2 ..... 156 158 159 161 180
DATA KEYS .......................................................4 ................................... 2 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING DELETING PART PROGRAM BLOCKS ............................... 4 Display and Deletingof RegisteredProgram Number (PROGRAM NO. TABLEDR )t ................................. 4 Display and Write of Local and Common Variables .................. 2 ............................... 4 DISPLAY AND WRITING OPERATION Displayof Subprogram Run Status (SUB PROG . NESTING) ......... 4 Displayof Tool Life Control Use Status (TOOL LIFE CONTROL) .... 4 Display in EDIT Mode .............................................. 4 DISPLAYING AND CHECKING STORED PART PROGRAMS ........... 4
INDEX
Subject
(Conttd)
Chapter
Par.
DISPLAYING AND WRITING PARAMETERS .......................... Displayingand WritingParameters ................................. DISPLAYING AND WRITING SETTING DATA (SETTING) ............ DISPLAYING AND WRITING TOOL OFFSET DATAt ................. DISPLAYING STATUS INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS ................... Displayin Memory Run Mode (PROGRAM DISPLAY LOCK/MACHINE LOCK SWITCH DRY RUN SWITCH ...................... DWELL (G04).o.....................o.. .. MEM]) ................... .......................... .......................... ..........................
4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 2 4 4 5 3 5 2 5 2 2 2 2 5 2 2 2 5 2 5 4
........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
4.3.7 ..... 4,3.7.3 ... 4,3.6 ..... 4.3.5 ..... 4.3.8 .....
4.3.3.2 ... 160 5.1.19 .... 193 5.1.18 .... 193 2.8.5 ..... 29 4.6 ........ 4.1.10 .... 5.1,22 .... 3.1,2 ..... 5.1.4 ..... 180 154 194 148 189
EDIT ................................... .......................... EDIT KEYS ............................. .......................... EDIT LOCK SWITCH ............................................... EIA/ISO AUTO RECOGNITION ...................................... .................................. EMERGENCY STOP PUSHBUTTON ERROR DETECT OFF POSITIONING (G06) .............4............ Example of FS Editing ............................................. Example of High-speed M Function Processing ...................... Exercisesof Macro Programs ......................................
2.8.2.2 ... 27 5.1.31.6 .. 197 2.7.8.4 ... 23 2.8.23.11.. 89 2.8.26,3 .. 121 2.4.2 ..... 10 5.1.3 ..... 188 2,8.28 .... 124 2.4.2.2 ... 12 2.4.2.1 ... 5.1.12 ... 2.8.25 .5... 5.1.31 ..... 4.1.3 ..... 11 192 106 196 152
Facing Cycle B (G94) .............................................. .......................... FEED FUNCTION (F- AND E-FUNCTION) FEED HOLD PUSHBUTTON AND LAMP ............................. FEED/MINUTE AND FEED/REVOLUTION SWITCHOVER .............. Feed Per Minute (G98 Mode) ....................................... Feed Per Revolution(G99 Mode) ................................... ........................... FEEDRATE OVERRIDE CANCEL SWITCH FinishingCycle (G70) ............................................. FS AUTOMATIC EDITING FUNCTION ............................... FUNCTION KEYS ..................................................
Functions ......................................................... 2 ........ 2.6.5.2 ... 17 Functions ......................................................... 5 ........ 5.1.31 .3... 196 G General General General General GENERAL ........................................................... ........................................................... ........................................................... ........................................................... PROGRAM FORM ......................................... 2 5 5 5 3 5 5 2 2 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ 2,8.25 .1... 5.1.8.2 ... 5,1.31 .1... 5.2.3 .10... 3.2.2 ...... 94 190 196 206 148 195 208 147 108
G50 POINT RETURN SWITCHt ..................................... .............................................. G50 POINT RETURNt GROOVE WIDTH COMPENSATION (G150, G151)*..................... Grooving in X-Axis (G75) .......................................... H
........ 5.1.24 .... -------5.2.4 ..... ........ 2.8,32 .... ........ 2.8.25 .7...
HANDLE AXIS SELECT SWITCH+ ................................s.. 5 ....<... ............ 5 HANDLE DIAL+ (MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR) HANDLE DIALS FOR SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL OF .......................................... 5 UP TO TWO AXESt Handle Interpolation Function ...................................... 5 ........................................ 2 HIGH-SPEED M FUNCTION Improved Multiple Repetitive Cycle Function........................ INCH/METRIC DESIGNATION BY G CODE (G20, G21)t ............. Input/Output ...................................................... I/ OChannel ...................................................... .............. INPUTTING SETTING DATA AND PARAMETER DATA ............... INPUTTING TOOL OF OFFSET DATA INTO MEMORY Input Unit andl O Times Input Unit ............................... INSPECTION BEFORE TURNING ON POWER ........................ ................................. INTERLOCK INPUT (INTERLOCK) InternalToggle Switches f ......................................... INTRODUCTION 2 2 5 2 4 4 2 6 5 4
........ 5.1.6...... 189 -------5.1.5 ----- 189 ..-.-... 5.1.8 ..4-. 189 .....+.. 5,1,8 .1---- 190 ........ 2.7.8 ..... 22 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ 2.8.25.10.. 115 2.8.8 ...... 33 5.1.31 .2... 196 2.7.8.1 ... 22 4.4.5 ..... 178 4.4.4 ..... 2.3. 3.1.... 6,1 ....... 5.1.23 .... 4.3.6.2 ... 177 7 213 195 169 1
................................................... 1 .....................
J K
JOG FEEDRATE SWITCH AND FEEDRATE OVERRIDE SWITCH ....... 5 ........ 5,1.10 ..... 191 .................... 5 ........ 5.1.9 ..... 191 JOG PUSHBUTTONS AND RAPID PUSHBUTTON KEEPING OF NC TAPE ............................................ 3 ........ 3.4.2 ..... 150
INDEX
Subject
(Centcl)
Chapter
Page 6 7 2; 4
........................................... LABEL SKIP FUNCTION LEAST INPUT INCREMENT AND LEAST OUTPUT INCREMENT ...... Least Output Increment ........................................... LINEAR INTERPOLATION (GOl)t ................................... LIST OF ADDRESS CHARACTERS AND FUNCTION CHARACTERS .. LIST LIST LIST LIST LIST OF OF OF OF OF
2 2 2 2 2
2.1.4 ..... 2.3.3 ..... 2.3.3.2 ... 2.8.3 ..... 2.1.2 .....
ALARM CODE .......................................AppENDIX 5................A-35 DATA ...............................................APPENDIx 6 ................A-54 ................................................ 2 ........ 2.8.1 ..... 23 G CODES ..............................APPEND IX . ............... A-7 PARAMETER NUMBERS SETTING NUMBERS ..................................APPENDIX 1 ................ A-1 4 ................ A-?.&
LIST OF STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS .........-......APPENDIX LIST OF TAPE CODE ...................................... LOADING PART PROGRAM TAPE INTO MEMORY ............ LOADING PART PROGRAMS AND NC DATA INTO MEMORY ( LOADING PART PROGRAM SBYMDI ....................... M MACHINE CONTROL STATION ............................. Macro Program Call Commands ..................................... 2 MAC REPROGRAMS (G65ANDG67) ................................ 2 MaintenanceHistory Display (MAINTENANCE) .......................4 MAKING ADDITION TO A PART PROGRALf ......................... 4 MANUAL MANUAL MAN UAL MANUAL MANUAL ABSOLUTE SWITCH ...................................... INTERRUPTION POINT RETURN ShITCH ................. INTERRUPTION POINT RETURN* ......................... OPERATION *...... ....................................... OPERATION INTERRUPTING AU TOhfATIC OPERATION .... 5 5 5 6 6 5 5 5 2 2 2 2 6 5 4 4 5 2 5 4 2 4 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 4 5 4 2
........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
2.8.23.1 .. 66 2.8.23 .... 66 4.3.9.5 .... 174 4.4.2 ..... 176 5.1.21 ..... 5.1.25 ..... 5.2.5 ..... 6.3 ....... 6.7 ....... 5.1.7 ..... 5.1.14 .... 5.2.1 ..... 2.3.4 ...-. 2.8.21 .-.. 194 195 209 213 216 189 192 198 6!
MANUAL PULSE hlULTIPLY SELECT SWITCH+ ...................... hfANUAL REFERENCE POINT RETURN SWITCH . .................... MANUAL RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT .......................... L4AXIMUM PROGRAMhfABLE DIMENSIONS ........................... MAXIMUM SPINDLE-SPEED SETTING (G50)+ ...........4............ M CODES FOR INTERNAL PROCESSING (G99 TO M109) ............. MCODES FOR STOP (MOO, MO1, M02, M30) ........................ k4DIOPERATION INTERRUPTING AU TOhiATIC OPERATION ......... MEASURED WORKPIECE VALUE DIRECT INPUT + .................... MEMDATA (MEMORY DATA) KEYS ................................ Message Display (ALARM)t ........................................ M-FIJNCTION LOCK SWITCH (AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK) ....... MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS (M-FUNCTION) ...................... MODE SELECT SWITCH ............................................ MODIFYING PART PROGRAM BLOCKS ............................. M3-DIGIT BCD OUTPCTt Multi-block Writingand MULTIPLE CORNERING MULTIPLE REPETITI\E MULTI-START THREAD N NC NC NC NC NC TAPE TAPE TAPE TAPE TAPE .......................................... Operationin MDI Mode ..................... (Gill, G112)+ ............................. CYCLES (G70 TO G76)t ................... CUTTING (G32)t ..........................
2.7.2 ----- 19 2.7.1 ..... 19 6.9 ....... 216 5.2.3 ..... 199 4.1.11 ....- 154 172 194 19 187 180
........ 4.3.9.2 ... .......,5.1.20..... ........ 2.7 ....... ........ 5.1.1 ..... ........ 4.6.3 ..... ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
2.7.7 ..... 21 4,3.3.1 ... 159 2.8.30 ..... 134 2.8.25 ..... 94 2.8.16 ..... 41 150 150 150 150 148
........ 3.3........ ........ 3.3.3 ..... ........ 3.4 ....... ........ 3.3.2 ..... ..................... ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
NEW COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTION ................... NEXT KEY ........................................................ New Tool SetterFunction .......................................... No. of Servo Lag Pulses Display (ERROR PULSE) ................. Notes ............................................................. NOTES WHEN USING THE CONVENTIONAL G50T****FUNCTION
2.6.5 ..... 17 4.1.6 ..... 153 5.2.3.9 ... 206 4.3.4.8 ... 165 2.7.8.3 ... 23 19
OffsetCalculation of Automatic Nose R Compensation Approach and Relief.................................................... Offset Screen Display ............................................. Operation.......................................................... Operation Commands ............................................... Operation Expression for CoordinateSystem Setting................
2 5 5 2 2
2.8.19.3 .. 57 5.2.3 .8.... 205 5.1,8.3 ... 190 2.8.23.5 .. 79 2.6.5.3 ... 18
Iv
INDEX
Subject
(Centd)
Chapter
Par.
OPERATION IN TAPE AND MEMORY MODE ......................... OperationProcedure ............................................... .......................................... OPERATION PROCEDURE .......................................... OPERATION PROCEDURE Operation Time Display ............................................ OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP (/1-/9)+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP SWITCH .................................. ORG (ORIGIN) KEYS .............................................. OTHER M CODES .................................................. OUTPUTTING PART PROGRAM TO PAPER TAPE ................... OUTPUTTING SETTING IPARAMETER DATA TO PAPER TAPE ...... OUTPUTTING TOOL OFFSETS TO PAPER TAPE .................... Overview ......................................................... Overview of L4acroProgram Body ..................................
6 5 5 6 4 2 5 4 2 4 4 4 2 2
........ 6.6 ....... ........ 5.1.31.4 .. ........ 5.2 ....... ..................... ........ 4.3.9.4 ... ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ............... ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
2.2.3 ..... 7 5.1.17 .... 193 4.1.9 ..... 154 2.7.6 ..... 21 4.7.1 ..... 183 4.7.3 ..... 184 4.7.2 ..... 184 2.6.5.1 ... 17 2.8.23.3 .. 69 4.1.7 ...... 3,3.1 ..... 4.3.7.1 ... 4.3.7.2 ... 2.7.8.2 ... 5.2. 3.2 o4.7 ....... 2.8.25.4 .. 2.8.25.6 .. 4.3.4,4 ..4.3.4.2 ... 4.3.4.1 ... 5,2.3.6 ... 4.3.4,3 ... 2.8.2 ..... 2.8.2.1 ... 5.1.30 ..... 4.2 ....... 4.1.1 ..... 2.8.25 .9... 153 150 171 171 22 203 183 104 107 163 163 162 205 163 24 24 196 155 152 112
PAGE KEYS ....................................................... 4 ..................................................~.. 3 PAPER TAPE Parameter of Bit Display Format ................................... 4 Parameter of Decimal DisplayFormat ............................... 4 Parameters ........................................................ 2 Parameters ........................................................ ........... PART PROGRAM AND NC DATA OUTPUT OPERATIONS Pattern Repeating (G73) .......................................... Peck Drilling in Z-axis (G74) ...................................... Position........................................................... Position [ABSOLUTE] .............................................. Position[EXTERNAL I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position(EXTERNAL) O Setting.................................. Position [INCREMENT] ............................................. POSITION (GOO, G06) ............................................. Positioning (GOO) .................................................. ................................ POSITION STORED PUSHBUTTON+ ....................................... POWER ON/OFF OPERATION POWER ON IOFF PUSHBUTTONS ................................... Precautionsin Programming G70 through G76 ...................... 5 4 2 2 4 4 4 5 4 2 2 5 4 4 2
PREPARATION FOR STORED LEADSCREW ERROR COMPENSATION AND STORED STROKE LIMITt ............................... 6 PREPARATION FOR TURNING OFF POWER ....................... 6 PREPARATIONS FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION ..................... 6 PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS (G-FUNCTION) ........................ 2 PROCESS SHEET ............................. ..,.......-.--3 .................................................... PRoGRAMh41NG .................................................... PROGRAMMING PROGRAhIMING OF ABSOLUTE ZERO POINT (G50) ................. PROGRAM MIRROR IhiAGE (G68, G69)t ............................ ................................................ PROGRAM NUMBER ...................... PROGRAM NUMBER AND SEQUENCE NUMBER PROGRAM RESTART SWITCHt ..................................... PROGRAM RESTARTt .......-..........~.......................... Program Return ................................................... PUSHBUTTONS, KEYS, AND LAMPS ...............................
R
........ 6.4 ....... 214 ........ 6.10 ....- 217 ........ 6.5 ......-. 214 ....... 2.8 -------- 23 --- 3.2.1-- 148 ..................... 1 ........ 3.2 .....- 148 ........ 2.8.20 .--4 61 ........ 2.8.24 .... 92 ........ 2.2,1 ..... 6 ........ 2.2 ....... ........ 5.1.26 .... ....---- 5.2.6 -........ 4.3.4.5 ... ....... ...$.... 4,1 6 195 209 164 151
2 3 2 2 2 2 5 5 4 4
RADIUS PROGRAMMING FOR CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G22, G23)t .................................""-" """---"""-""2 RAPID TRAVERSE RATE ........................................... 2 RAPID TRAVERSE RATE.... ....................................... 2 RAPID TRAVERSE RATE OVERRIDE SWITCH ....................... 5 REFERENCE POINT CHECK (G27) .................................. 2 ........................................ 5 REFERENCE POINT LAMPS Registration of Macro Programs .................................... 2 RESET KEY ..........................................-.....O------4 RETURN FROM REFERENCE pOINT (G29) .......................... 2
2.8.9 --- 33 .....s.. 2.4 ....... 10 ...~....2.4.1 ..... 10 ........ 5.1.11 .... 192 ........ 2.8.10 -... 34 ........ 5,1.15 .... 193 ........ 2.8.23.7... 83 .-o-----4.1.12 ..-.. 155 ........ 2.8.12 ..... 36
INDEX
Subject
(Centd)
Chapter
Par.
Page
2ND REFERENCE POINT RETURN (G30)t .....0....4................ ............................................... SEQUENCE NUMBER SettingData of Bit Display Format ................................. SettingData of Decimal Display Format ............................ S4-DIGIT PROGRAMMING At ....................................... S4-DIGIT PROGRAMMING B+ ....................................... SIMULTANEOUS CONTROLLABLE AXES ............................ SINGLE BLOCK SWITCH ........................................... SKIP FUNCTION (G31)t ........................................... SUBROUTINE PROGRAM (M98, M99) ...............o..... ........... Spindle Counter ................................................... SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE SWITCHt .............................. SPINDLE-SPEED FUNCTION (S-FUNCTION) ........................ ................ SPLICING NC TAPES ............................... S2-DIGIT PROGRAMMING (SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS) .............
2 2 4 4 2 2 2 5 2 2 4 5 2 3 2
........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
2.8.13 ...... 37 2.2.2 ..... 7 4.3.6.1 ... 168 4.3.6.3 ... 169 2.5,2 ..... 13 2.5,3 ..... 14 2.3.2 ..... 7 5,1,16 .... 193 2.8.14 .... 37 2.7.5 ..... 20 4.3.4.7 .... 165 5.1,13 .... 192 2.5 ........ 13 3.4.1 ..... 150 2.5.1 ..... 13
STANDARD NC OPERATORS STATION WITH CRT CHARACTER DISPLAY .................................. 4 ..................... 151 Stock Removal in Facing (G72) .................................... 2 ........ 2.8.25 .3... 101 Stock Removal in Turning (G71) ................................... 2 ........ 2.8.25 .2... 95 .................APPENDIX 3 ................A-25 STORED LEAD SCREIi ERROR COMPENSATION STORED STROKE LIMIT (G36-G39) ................................ 2 ........ 2.8.18 ..... 44 SWITCHING
T
STATION
................... 5 ........ 5,1 ....... 187 2 ........ 2.1 ....... 2 ........ 2.1.1 ..... 2 ........ 2.8.19.4... 2 ........ 2.6 ........ 2 ........ 2.6.1 ...... 1 1 61 14 14 14 15 17 10
TAPE FORMAT .................................... . ......... ....... TAPE FORMAT ..................................................... The G40 GO1 X_ ZI K; Command Cancel Function is Also Available in the AutomaticNose R Function .............. TOOL FUNCTION (T-FUNCTION) .................................. ......................................... T 4-DIGIT PROGRAMMING TOOL TOOL
OFFSET MEMORY t........................................... 2 ........ 2.6.2 ..... POSITION OFFSETS ......................................... 2 ........ 2.6,3 ..... COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFTt .............................. 2 ........ 2,6.4 ..... ............................ 2 ........ 2.3.6 .....
W x
WORK
1. INTRODUCTION
YASNAC LX3, is a combination microprocessors ing our modern to provide the IIultraspeed dual processor CNC . Part program memory can be extended to a
of two high-performance 16-bit Incorporatrunning in parallel. system technique, it is designed highest lathe performance.
maximum of 320 meters . Its data input loutput interface is available with FACIT, RS232C and, in addition, RS422 serial interface capable of high-speed long distance transmission. . Programming tool radius is further compensation facilitated function, by improved G 50work
The dual processor CNC system drastically reduces the data processing time to meet highBlock-to-block stop time despeed cutting. creased by the use of high-speed buffer function and buffering function. . Enhanced cutting capability includes a maximum E
coordinate system setting, anglespecified line ar interpolation, and combined beveling/rounding function. . The servo function uses a drastically miniaturized and low-noise, newly transistorized PWM control unit and a high-performance DC servo motor. The position feedback is available standard pulse generator (PG) system the inductosyn-applied complete closed system. with the and, loop
of 24 meters /rein feed command, precise feed command, 500-milimeter lead thread cutting, continuous thread cutting, multiple thread cutting, and variable pitch thread cutting. To meet FMS trends, program interrupt function, tool life control, user macro, tool set error correction, stored stroke limit per tool, and other functions can be installed.
2. PROGRAMMING
2.1
TAPE FORMAT
2. 1.1 TAPE FORMAT A variable block format conforming to JIS# B 6313 is used for YASNAC LX3. Numerals Table 2.1 shows the tape format. following the address characters in Table 2.1 indicate the programmable number of digits. Note: The decimal point may be omitted in For making a program actual programming. including decimal points, refer to 2. 1.3 Decimal Point Programming. The leading zeros can be suppressed for all address codes. Plus signs need not be programmed, but all minus signs must be programmed. In the manual, EOB code in a program example is represented by a semicolon (;) . In actual programming, CR (EIA code) or LF /NL (1S0 code ) should (;). be used instead of the semicolon
L 1EXAMPLE
Down to thtro
dec]mal
places
,n mm or inches
Four d[glts of
Integer
Sign
.Oodnaeadd=s
(X, ZI, K )
# Japanese
Industrial
Standard
1 .2
Prcgram No
04
I -_ N4
04
N4
~
-7
B --B
I Sequence G-Function
No.
G3 .=-
G3 . . ~ a_53 a-44
Coordinate Wmd a: X, Z, 1, K, U, W, R
(a-
53)
(a-44)
Feed/rein
F 50
I +
~~
-;42 .+-
---.___B_
F32
F24
*-
Feed/rev .
and
Thread Lead
-~ E34 ! E26
\ -~- ~
F 42
F 24
B ~ B
E44
E!26
S2
I -.
S2 . +
S-Function
54
0 B 0
..
T(2+I) 8
T-Function
T(2 +2) 9
M-Function M3 --~r
M3
10
11
U (P)
.P4
53
_+_
(P)53
.
12 Sequence No. Designation Q (P) 4
L....
__
4--13 No. of Repetitions Angle Designation ~ Line Angle Designation ~ Thread for Straight L8 ...+ 14 A (B) 33 I .
Q ) 4 L8
---~ B .
A (B) 33
for Multiple B3
..
B3
0 , o
15
Notes: 1. Inch/Metric 2. Inch/Metric output is set by setting parameter *6007 input is set by setting (#?6001Do). or feed/rev can be switched by G 98, G 99 D3,
Table
2.2
List of Program
Commands
Output --
Inch Output
I
1-9999
1-9999
Inch Input
Metric Input
Inch Input
Program No. O
1-9999
Sequence
No. N
1 9999
0-199
0-199 I
* 99999.999
mm 1
? 3937.0078
in
Feedfmin
1 24000
mmlmi n
~ 0.01 944.88
in/rein ~:=
0.01-500.00
mmlrev
0.0001-19.6850
in/rev
0.01 1270.00
mm/rev
0.0001500,0CK)0 mmlrev
o,CKD30419,685030 in/rev
S2
S-f unction
o-99
o-99
I
T-function
S4
T3
0-9999
0-9999
o-999
o-9999
L
M-function Dwell U, P Program No. Designation
T4
I I
I sec
o-999
o-9999
o-999
0-999
0.001 99999.999
0.001 99999.999
sac
1-9999
19999
Sequence
No. Designation
19999
1 9999
No. of Repetitions
1-99999999
1 99999999
O ? 360.~0
0- t360.000
0-360
0360
Automatic Threading
Cycle (G 76).
2.1.2
LIST
OF ADDRESS
CHARACTERS
AND
Address
Meaning
o .
o .
-.
B Spindle shift angle Ol multiple thread, angle designation for multiple cornering
D Depth of cut and number of cutting cycles for G 71 to G 76 .. E Specifications for precise feed and precise lead for cutting for normal feed and normal lead for cutting +G Preparatmy function (G-function) I._ H User macro chaacter
o
0
~.
B B . o
Specifications
. I X-component of arc center, canned cycle parameter, beveling value (radius value) I canned cycle p~ameter, .beveling value + ~ B, O .
o
B, O
Z-component K Incremental
of arc center,
. B, O . B
Miscellaneous
function
(M-function)
N o
Sequence
number . t
I \ ~ I
B B
Program number
Dwell,
B, O
Q F?
B, O - . . B, O . B
s
T
Spindle function
(S-function),
Tool function
(T-function),
B, O . B, O .
X-axis
incremental
o .
canned cycle parameter B,
Z-axis
incremental
command value,
o
B
Z-axis
coordinate value
Table
2.4
Function
Characters
EIA Code I
ISO Code
Function
Remarks
Blank
NuL
in ISO
c!+ > SP SP
Disregarded
Space
1------._ +
-
--+>5::::----2Z2::F . . . . .
2-4-5bits
~ 2-4-7 bits
..~
----/
Special code
.1.
User macro operator
- ._:-=..
I -! ] EIA:
1
-;~~
oto9
*
O to 9
Disregarded,
Numerals
---------------. ---
------!---
---4
! [ Asterisk
(Multiplication
operatcx)
-H17
-Ld=:k-I
------4
I
data.
-1 A: iacde
?
Notes : 1. Characters
2. Information between Control Out and Control In is ignored as insignificant 3. Tape code (EIA or ISO) is automatically recognized.
2.1.3
the .
following
M codes
Numerals containing a decimal point may be used as the dimensional data of addresses related to coordinates (distance) , angle, time and speed. They can be input from punched tape or MDI. Decimal points dress words. Coodinate Angle Feedrate Time can be used in the following ad-
com-
Notes X, B F, U, P E 2. Z, U, W, I, K, R
: This function is effective for G22 and G 23 where the control is provided with Radius Programming for Circular Interpolation option. Block-to-block stop time due to required to compute tool radius tion is not eliminated or remains. this stopping time, use 2.7.3 Function (M93, M92) (optional). tion of consecutive blocks up to mode, inter-block stoppage time to zero. the time compensaTo reduce Buffering When opera5 in M93 is reduced
words; A,
1.
words: word:
words:
EXAMPLE [mm] X15. z20.5 (G99)F.2t X15.000 220.500 FO.20 (for F25 (for Dwell without mm mm or or or [inch ] in. in.
X15.0000
220.5000
(G98)F25.6
or
PROGRAM NUMBER
numbers may be prefixed to programs purpose of program identification.
regards
Up to 4 digits may be written after an address O as program numbers. Up to 99 character program numbers can be registered in the control, and up to 199 or 999 can be registered employing an option. One program begins ends with M02, M30 with a program number, and M02 and M30 are and M99 is
or M99.
2.1.4 In the
placed placed
at the at the
end end
of of
is displayed
the the
power RESET
supply
is turned
on.
PROGRAM PROGRAM
WITH NO. 10
PROGRAM PROGRAM
operation
is executed.
While the label skip function is effective, all data on the punched tape up to the first EOB code are neglected. When LSK is displayed on the CRT in the MEM (memory) or EDIT (editing) mode, it indicates the presence of a pointer at the leading end of the part program.
ER (or % at 1S0 code) parts of the tape. Notes : The blocks for
is punched
on both
end
1.
optional are
block not
skip
such
as as end
regarded
2. 1.5 BUFFER REGISTER possible with a parameter change During normal operation, one block of data is read in advance and compensation is computed for the follow-on operation. In the tool radius compensationmode, two blocks of data or up to 4 blocks of data are read in advance and compensation computing required for the next operation is executed. One block can contain up to 128 characters including EOB . (#6201Do) , to make the reading of M02, M30, and M99 ineffective as a program end, and to make the succeeding ER (EIA) or % (ISO) as a sign of program end.
2. 2.2
SEQUENCE NUMBER
2.3
COORDINATE
WORDS
Integers consisting of up to 4 digits may be written following an address character N as sequence numbers. Sequence numbers are reference numbers for blocks, and do not have any influence on the meaning and sequence of machining processes. Therefore, they may be sequential, non-sequential, and duplicated numbers, also any sequence number is possible. sequential numbers are convenient numbers. When searching for to search or specify hand. Notes : more digits number. must not be written as a sequence program not using Generally, as sequence
commands for movements in axis direcGenerally, tions and commands for setting coordinate systems are called coordinate words, and coordinate words consist of address characters for desired axes and numerals representing dimensions of directions.
2.3.1
COORDINATE WORDS
Address of Coor-
numbers, numbers
be sure before-
dinate Words
I 1 I
x,
Main Axis
1.
2.
Five or sequence
I
I
U, W
Incremental
When two or more blocks have the same sequence number, only one is retrieved and read, and no more searching is performed. Blocks without sequence numbers can also be searched for with respect to the address data contained in the blocks.
3.
Interpolation R I Note: When G 90 and G 91 are used, addresses X and Z are Radius value of circular arc
2.2.3.
(h - /91+]
designation. Incremental
refer to 2. 3.5
Absolute and
Those blocks in which /n (n = ( 1 - 9) is inIn and the end of cluded are neglected between optional block skip that block, when the external switch for that number n is on. EXAMPLE /2 N1234 GO1 x1OO /3 Z200;
2.3.2
The control provides two-axis control for X- and Zaxis. Number of simultaneously controllable axes, when commanded in the same block, is two axes , Xand Z. For the axis without commands, movement will not occur.
as if xlOO; be .
1234
1, :
1! l!! may
omitted.
The optional block skipping process is executed while the blocks are being read into the buffer resister. Once the blocks have been read, subsequent switching on is ineffective to skip the blocks . While reading this function The and block /1 is or punching is ineffective. /2 one. /9 is out programs,
The by
minimum punched
units MDI
that are
can shown
be
commanded
below.
Input Increment
2.
3.
skip a basic
an
option
function,
X-axis
2.3.3.1
(Centd)
Input
Unit
and
10
Times
Input
Unit
2.3.4
MAXIMUM PROGRAMMABLE
values
DIMENSIONS
of move command
Inch/MM input is selected by setting #6001D0. Inch/MM input selection by G20/G21 is optional. Selection of multiplication factor xl /x10 is made by parameter #6006D 5.
Values
mm. in mm.
Tool offset value must always be written in O. 001 mm (or O. 0001 inch) , and offset is possible in these units. In O. 01 mm increment eration must be made . Programming o Write operation for for system, the following opin the unit of O. 01 mm. in TAPE mode.
.999 in.
operation in MDI
operation operation
editing
mode .
1.
If NC tape programmed by O. 001 mm is fed into or stored in an equipment set by O. 01 mm increment, the machine will move ten times the intended dimensions. If the increment system is switched when the contents of NC tape are stored in memory, the machine will move by ten times or one tenth of the commanded dimensions. When the stored program is punched out on the tape+, the stored f?gures are punched out as stored regardless of switching of the increment system. Multiplication factor 10X (10 times the input
In incremental programming, specified values must not exceed the maximum programmable values. In absolute programming, move amount of each axis must not exceed the maximum programmable value. THE MACHINE MAY NOT FUNCTION PROPERLY IF MOVE COMMAND OVER THE MAXIMUM PROGRAMMABLE VALUES IS GIVEN. The above maximum programmable values also apply to distance command addresses 1, K, R in addition to move command addresses X , U , W .
2.
3.
4.
Z.. is
unit) is effective for distance command only. It does not function on the designation of When multiplication factor time, angle, etc. 10X is set as effective ( #6006D5 = 1) , the same address word is multiplied by 10 or not depending on type of G command. EXAMPLE G04 U... GOO U... ;Not ; multiplied Multiplied by by 10 (Time)
input
incremental mixedly.
used 10 (Distance)
in one
EXAMPLE:
W.. z.
; ;
2, 3. 3.2
Least output increment is the minimum unit of tool motion. Selection of metric system or inch system is made by parameter (#6007D3) .
Least Output Increment
-J
Metric output Inch output --1--
Z-axis
0.001 mm
When addresses X and U or addresses Note : and W are used in one block, the latter is effec tive.
Z -
The addresses 1 and K for designation of arccenter must be specified by the incremental dimension.
Table
2.5
Address
Increment
System
Designation
Meaning
x
Absolute Input
Diameter
Position in X-axis
direction *
Position in Z-axis
direction *
u
w
I incremental K Input
direction
Radius
direction
Incremental Input
in Z-axis
+x
G code
G9CI I
Meaning
I
Absolute command Incremental command G 91
G 91 commands X and Z.
are
Addresses
G 90 Command
~ G 91 Command
b+-Xand U and * Z: W: Absolute Incremental Input Input by the movement Since X and U are designated values in diameter, the actual the half of the values. is
EXAMPLE Incremental
G91 move
GOO
X40.
Z50. ;
o. . .
command
Fig. 2.1
Incremental
. Auxiliary data, 1, K, R, etc. , of circulai interpolation are always incremental commands. Note : G90 and G91 cannot be programmed together in the same block. If they are written in the same block, the one written later only is effective. EXAMPLE: GO1 G90 and x80. in this G91 block, the z60. ;
Cases
where
G 90
mental
commands)
and
incre-
II (option) be used.
is
commands Z axes.
in both
X and
2.3.6
X-AXIS DIAMETER/RADIUS
SWITCHING
2.4
Addresses X and U for Xaxis coordinate words This is called are specified by diameter value. The addresses X can be diameter designation. used for designation of both diameter and is made by the setting radius . The switching of parameter #6006D s.
2. 4.1 RAPID TRAVERSE RATE The rapid traverse motion is used for the motion for the Positioning (GOO) and for the motion for the Manual Rapid Traverse (RAPID) . The traverse rates differ among the axes since they are dependent on the machine specification and are determined by the machine tool builders. The rapid traverse rates determined by the machine are set by parameters in advance for individual axes. When the tool is moved in rapid traverse in each axial direction simultaneously, motions in these axial directions are independent of each other, and the end points are reached at differTherefore, ent times among these motions. motion paths are normally not straight. rates, traverse feedrate Fo, 25% rates, set by
o: 1:
Diameter Radius
designation designation
(a)
w-zPP+z
I
I
In the ameter case of DiDesignation (b) In the case of radius Designation
For override rapid traverse 50% and 100% of the basic rapid Fo is a constant are available. parameter (#6231) .
Fig. 2.2
be
Table
Diameter Programming
(2)
rate below.
can
be
set
to the
Address X command
Diameter value ~
Radius value
Metric Input
24,000
mmlmin
i
Inch Input
2,400 inlmin
Address U command
I
t
The
upper
limit
for
X-axis
speed
is half
the
X-axis
position display
Diameter value
listed values. The optimum value of upper limit is set according to the machine. Refer to the machine tool builders manual, for the definite value.
I
1
Diameter value
2.4.2
I
Designation Designation
t
Feedrate F, E in X-axis direction
G 98
G99
Parameters
cornering, and
Note : For the details, refer to 2.8.28, Feed Function Design ation.
multlple cornering, D, 1, K, P, Q, R
Since F, E codes are modal, these codes are effective until next F , E codes are given. However, when G98/G99 are switched, new F code must be designated. In G98 mode, E code cannot be commanded. If commanded, PROG ERROR 030 will be activated.
(G 99 Mode)
the spindle can feed) or E ( fine
EXAMPLE G99 S350 (r/rein) F200 ; ; . . . In the case of F32. is: r/rein
above = 2.0
case,
feedrate x 35o +x
(2)
The feed ranges that can be specified the F and E codes are as follows. G 99 Mode, F and E Feed Ranges
by
F x
mm/rev.
= 700 mm/m~n
Rangeof
Metric input Metric output
Inch
F 32 E34 F 24 E
E 500.0000
ql
4. Values of terpolation when two EXAMPLE G99 1 S1OOO (r/rein) U60, above
=
=
FEEDRATE
700 mm/mn
input
I I E 19.685000 I 26 1 E0.000004
F 0.0301 F19.6Ek50 in./rev F 32 E34 F 24 E 26 F 0,01 F1270.00 E 0.0003-E mmlrev 1270.0000
in./rev
F command at linear or circular in represent the tangential feedrate axes are simultaneously controlled.
; F50 the
x
mmlrev
GO1
FO.001 F 50.0000 F O.000010-E in./rev
W40. case,
; feedrate
Io(lf) r/rein
In F
x
the
S
is
50.00C0OO in/rev
0,
5 mm/reV
subject on the
to the spindle
following speed S.
Metric output
I
I
Inch output
Xaxis
Notes : 1. Program feed per revolution within such a range that the X-axis component remains below 12,000 mm/min or
TANGENTIAL
+x
FEEDFIATE
1,200 in./min. 2. This uppar limit may still be reduced by the performance limit of the machine. Refer to the machine tool builders manual.
I IO ~
EXAMPLE G99 2 s1OOO U.. the above
#+ @~ x
Lz-axis feedrate component feedrate
~.o
+ 4002
component
~ 300 mm/mln
400 mm/mln
.Z
(a)
Notes 1.
: G03 A command FO causes data errors. In feedrate 1000 (r/rein) for will FxS= 0.2 (mm/rev) = ; . . . . . Wrong of the . 200 mm/min 4fx2
CENTER
2.
Any minus value should not be specified If specified, the machine F commands. not operate properly. EXAMPLE F-250
fz2
3.
+x t L----
fx
.Z
(b)
11
2.4. 2.2
(1)
Tool feed can be specified in/rein with F codes . The with feed range F codes is that can be as follows.
u60. case,
W40.
F500
(2)
4002
~-a~i~
component
component
Notes : 1. Program feed-per-minute ccmponent feedrates. EXAMPLE G98 GOI U300. ! F1200 values so that the X-axis speed
wi II not exceed
. case,
Z..
1..
F200
this
(Metric output, metric input) 2. The upper limit value is further subject to the limitation impoeed by the machine performance. machine tool build&s to be set in parameter manual. #6228 Refer to the
F=200=ifxZ+fz (mm/min)
CENTER
Notes 1.
: F command in FO or negative
Do not write
values.
I
2,4.3
2.
in the radius.
X-axis
direction
indicate
X200.
F700
Acceleration and deceleration for rapid traverse and for cutting feed are automatically performed without programming ,
F 700
-!-+
FEEDRATE 700 mm,mlq
l +,
Values of F command at linear or circular interpolation represent the tangential feedrate when trolled. two axes are simultaneously con-
continuous HANDLE
feeding feeding
12
Once specified, S-code is modal and effective until the next S-code. When the spindle stops M05 (spindle stoD) , S-command is stored in memor~ of the u~it. EXAMPLE GOO
TIME
at
S11
Fig. 2.3
x.. Rapid traverse rate and the acceleration eration constant of rapid traverse rate set by parameter. ( #6280 to #6287) /decelcan be GO1 Z.. . .
Sll:
Effective
1 As shown in the following operation, linear acceleration and deceleration ified. (independent of each axis) o Cutting feed (GO1 to G03) the twostep can be spec(See Fig. 2.4. ) GOO X.. . Z.. . M05 . . c Spindle ; z.. F.. ; . . ; ; ; stop
1 Sll: Effective
..-M03 x.. . .
VELOCITY
P.
v
GO1
Z.. S22
G00
x . . .
z..
F..
S22:
Effective
t TIME
Note :
Fig.
2.4
2.5.2 Feedrate vals and time constants feedrate bias are set is set at #6093) at 2 msec inter2kpps intervals (1)
S4-DIGIT
PROGRAMMING AT
S (S K K K K ) are speed in r/rein. used
by parameters.
( #6092,
Note : The automatic acceleration /deceleration parameters are set to the optimum values for the Do not change the setting respective machines. unless it is required for special application.
(2)
2.5
SPINDLE-SPEED
FUNCTION
(S-FUNCTION)
When S command is given in a block together with M03 (spindle forward running) or the proceeds M04 (reverse running) , the control to the next block after the spindle speed reaches the speed given by the S code. For details, refer to the machine tool builders manual. EXAMPLE
S1OOO M03,
S code
spindle builders
1I
refer
tO the
I
I I u
ACTUAL SPEED
SPINDLE
When a move command and an S code are issued in a block, execution will depend on the machine tool design and construction (Whether the S command is executed together with the move com mand or after the completion of tool movement) . Refer to the machine tool builders manual.
13
2. 5.2
S 4-DIGIT
PROGRAMMING
A+(Contd)
(2)
specified, manual
(3)
S commands
are modal. Although the spindle stops at the M05 command, the S comTherefore, when M03 mand is retained. (or M04) is given, the spindle runs accordto the S command.
ing (4)
When S command is changed after the spindle start by M03 or M04, S command should be given selected within the by spindle range gear. of spindle speed
Notes 1.
: When the tool number is changed by the T command, a turret lathe begins to index the tool instantaneously. Therefore, the turret should be removed, before the command, from the area where an accidental collision might occur. Tool offset number 00 cancels the tool offset.
Notes
: The lower limit of the spindle speed depends on the spindle drive. Refer to the machir,e tool builders manual for the low-speed limit. Negative S commands must not be programmed.
1.
2.
2.
When the control is provided with the S 4digit command function, the Spindle speed override option can be built into it. With machine tools with which the main spindle gear ratio changes can be specified by M codes, first write the applicable M code to preselect the desired write the S command. the machine tool builder gear ratios, the speeds and other details. gear Refer ratio, to the and data then, of of ratios,
2.6.2
3.
The area in which tool position offset values, tool radius compensation values, and other compensation data are stored is called Offset Memory . (1) The entire including memory areas of Offset the options are as shown
OFFSET MEMORY NO
Memory below.
4.
When the control is provided with this func tion, the spindle maximum speed commanding function with the instruction G50 S . . . ; can be used.
TOOL OFFSET
2. 5.3
S 4-DIGIT
PROGRAMMING
B+
S4-digit comthe program-
f Ii ---
-----_-
---
~:~i;:; -MEMORY
(1)
This function is to modify the mand A output freely through mable machine interface.
;0 51 \ g
SUPPLEMENT
(2)
Basically, this function is used in the same as the S 4-digit command A function, way but it is normally used to set the manually controlled spindle speeds controlled by the rotary switch on the machine control station corresponding to S command speeds. For the details of S command speeds, refer to the machine tool builders manual.
MEMORY
-r-
Note : For the actually usable range within the above Offset Memory, refer to the machine tool builders manual.
(2)
2.6
TOOL FUNCTiON
(T-FUNCTION)
2.6.1 (1)
T 4-DIGIT PROGRAMMING
Four digits following the tool number. TDDDU Tool offset (O - 160r 1 Tool number 50) the address T specifies
The tool offset Nos. specified by the T function directly correspond to the offset memory Nos. , and their contents are used for various compensations. However, the tool coordinate memory Nos. ( for setting the work coordinate system) correspond to the tool selection Nos . in the T function . The work coordinate shift memory is an independent function, not related to the T function. )
selection
14
(3)
Write these data in the memory, before starting to operate the machine under automatic procedure, refer co; trol. - For the writing to 4.3.5, Displaying and Writing Tool Offset into Tool Coordinate Values . For writing Memory, follow the procedure described in 6.2.3, Work Measurement Value Direct Input *.
(3)
Description
of
tool
position
offset
motion
As mentioned above, when the tool specified by the address T and 4 digits is moved, the offset value corresponding to the tool offset number is added to the command value in the program algebraically and the tool tip is moved to the offset position. When there is no move command in the block, the tool moves only by the offset value. Once, the tool offset number is designated, the tool moves always to the offset position until another number is designated. When the other offset number is designated or the offset value is changed, the offset value is compensated for by the amount of the difference between the old and new offset values. OFFSET VALUE
2.6.3
When the tool offset number is specified, the offset value corresponding to the tool offset number is added algebraically to the command value in the program and the tool is moved to the offset Therefore, the difference between the position. coordinate values of the programmed tool tip and the actual tool tip must be stored into tool offset memory in advance as the offset value. When the coordinate value of the actual tool tip has changed due to tool wear or some other reasons, the tool position offset values should be Thus, the programmed machining is set again. attained (1) without of correcting tool position the offset of program. value tool offset value
Range
range
I
(+ +x EXAMPLE Tlol GO1 X.. T115
T101 T (+6X1,
+ 6z~)
T115 T 6X2,
+ 6Z2)
{3
+- 8Z2:
OFFSET
MOTION
COMPLETION
OF
input
I
,
I
o- f9999.999rnnl
O
,,1+ L!x~
.-8KL 2
Inch input
fE@3.&307 in.
( X,z) 7 L?z.
(2)
Sign
of
tool
position
offset
values
store the tool position offset values in the The offset value is the deOffset Memory. viation from the tool tip position of the reference tool which is determined as zero. +x
. . . . . . . . . . ...+.....
tiOLpOToN
. Z.. ; . F(E) . . . ; . z
...... a
I
I
J .
_ I
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..... B
6 ~
I&
DIAMETER)
P~OGnAtMMED
Fig. 2.5
The move speed of tool offset is determined by the feedrate command that is effective in the block. Therefore, the feedrate command should be issued before (GOO or GO1 F ..) or in the block containing the tool offset number.
15
25
---
GO1
U+. . .
W-.
. .
F..
,OE ~~L
T0216
OFFSET
l/AL~JE 3ET,vEEN
(5)
Instructions offset
for
commanding
tool
position
I
-~1
~
UOVEMENT
Tool position offset is executed by designating the tool offset number corresponding to the actual tool must be designated. a. Tool offset starts at the block in which the T-code is commanded. When Tcode is read, the tool selection signal ( BCD) is fed and the tool starts to move by the offset value corresponding to the tool offset number. Since T code is modal, it is retained until the other T code is designated. EXAMPLE GOO T0202 ; . . . The tool number N 02 is selected. Tool offset motion is made accord ing to the contents of the tool offset number 02. value must be changed, is re
~-
;y
- -
-=. .Z
STARTING EXECUTION POINT
- THE ~,,
(BEFOQE
OF COMMAND
When the T command and the move command are issued in the same block, the tool nose Therefore, in moves to the offset position. the taper angle is corrected the above case, by the difference of the offset value between T0202 and T0216.
d .
When the tool position offset is required to cancel, the T code with the tool offset numK ~ 00) must be commanded. ber O or 00 (T The tool Dosition offset is instantaneously cancelled~ EXAMPLE GOO GO1 T0202 X.. . Z.. . F.. . ;
b.
When
the
tool
offset
the Tcode whose tool offset written should be commanded EXAMPLE GOO GO1 T0202 X.. . ; Z.. . F.. . ;
number again.
GO1
U+. . .
W-.
. .
F..
ro216
GO1
T0216
Tool offset number 02 is replaced with 16. Tool offset motion is made at the cutting feedrate , in this
GOO
. . . . The
Note case, c.
that the
offset motion is cancelled. Tool moves according to the position specified Xand Z. by
The angle of taper cutting can be changed by the following procedure. T code for change of tool offset number should be commanded in the block together with cuttin~ feed command .
can
be
divided
Notes
1.
2.
offset
is
cancelled
by
RESET
For positive shift values AX and AZ, the coordinate axes are shifted in the direction shown above. Xo and Zo are original coordinate system setting values.
The tool offset must or M30 is commanded. The tool Automatic When mand the offset Zero should Return
be
cancelled
before
M02
(3)
be cancelled also before ( G 28) is commanded.
3.
This shift function is executed any of the conditions described and d is met.
at each time in a, b, c,
4.
the control is reset by M02 or M30 comor by executing RESET operation, offset number becomes O (or 00) .
(4)
tool
5.
When the Zero Return ecuted, the tool offset tally. The zero the tool the the med
When the contents of Work Coordinate System Shift Memory are rewritten, the new shift values become effective from the moment the operation a, b, c, or d above is subsequently executed, The procedure of 5.2.3, MEASURED WORKPIECE VALUE DIRECT INPUT is effective for the Work Coordinate Shift Memory with an offset memory No, 00. : The shift command by the Work Coordinate Shift function can not be cancelled unless the setting value is changed to O. NO reset operation is effective in canceling it. T~noO ;. . . . . Tool position coordinate offset cancel
(5)
6.
tool offset must be also cancelled before Return Check ( G27) is commanded. If G27 is commanded at the state where the offset is effective, the control will be state of Zero Return check error, because tool offset value is added to the program position.
Notes 1.
2.6.4 With
the Work Coordinate System Setting function, can be shifted through desired distances.
G50
T~UOJ;
. . . Work
setting
system
(1)
Shift values in the X and Z axes can be written into the Work Coordinate System Shift Memory (one group ) with which the offset memory No. is 00, by the same procedure as for writing tool offset values. The written shift from the moment When When When G50 values become effective described below, system coordinate is set is set set
The tool offset No 00 in these instructions has nothing to do with the contents of Work Coordinate Shift Memory.
3.
(2)
When G50 coordinate system is set or when position absolute display is reset by ORG key 1, parameter #6018 D7 determines whether work coordinate system shift amount is effective or not.
a. b. c. d,
coordinate work
G50GT automatic
system system is
2,6.5
NEW
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
SETTING
FUNCTION
coordinate
Position Absolute display is reset by ORG key That is, when these coordinate systems listed above are set, the-shift values are simply Tools are not shifted. added. -v, 4
. . . .
2.6.5.1
Overview
to coordinate system function. The following
A completely new approach setting is employed in this are the features. (a) A coordinate system. The tool nose on the current There in the system is
a machine
coordinate
-x
(b) point can always be displayed value display (absolute) . to set the coordinate system
20
ORIGINAL
COORDINATE
AXES
Xoi2
p%
(c) +2
is no need program.
SHIFT
I , AX,12 2.6.5,2
Fig. 2.6
~+z
Functions
of coordinate and at what system frequency setting ? is
SHIFT COORDINATE
AXES
17
Operation
Expression
for Coordinate
System
System
Setting
under
following is the
system ?
operation setting at
for
coordinate
value
= Machine position + tool coordinate memory + work coordinate system shift amount
Under the automatic mode, coordinate system setting is performed when the turret is called up The tool coordinate memory by the T code. number uses the turret number commanded on the command screen or the offset number for operation. Unlike the conventional offset method, the code command in the coordinate system setting specification is given as follows. T
Z-axis coordinate value = Machine position + tool coordinate memory + work coordinate system shift amount
The setting of parameter #6011 DO decides whether to set the tool coordinate memory number at the front two digits of T4-digit, or at the last two digits of the T4-digit, The execution setting differs as setting. (1) of the follows, coordinate system by the parameter
( 1)
position
is
called
the
position
(2)
The tool coordinate memory value number is of two types; the number when the timing for the next coordinate system setting is manual and when it is automatic.
The work called the coordinate system offset TOO, X, or shift amount Z data. is
front
two
digits
(3)
Offset 01
number
(Wear to 49
to 16/01
2.6.5,4
Timing
of Coordinate
System
Setting
under
,_
the Manual
Mode
Tool 01
Under the manual mode, coordinate system setting The is made with the following times (a) to (c) . tool coordinate memory number is created from the tool number binary value set in 1/0 input #13174 (TP1) to #13178 (TP8) , to be used for operation.
(Tool
coordinate
Note :
The
tool
The coordinate system can also be set up inside the NC, or by a request from the When set by a request of the sequencer. sequencer, coordinate system setting is executed to turn on output #12194 (end of coordinate system #13127 (coordinate setting output) when input
system
(a)
+ 50). selects
coordinate memory number is: Thus, the tool coordinate the contents of (tool number
setting
request
input)
turns
on.
By executing the T**$$ command, the turret is called up wherever the tool post is located, and is moved for the offset amount of the offset number, to execute the coordinate system setting corresponding to the selected tool coordinate memory number. By executing the T**OO command, the turret is.called up wherever the tool post is located, and the offset amount cancel movement is executed, to execute the coordinate system setting corresponding to the selected tool coordinate memory number, The tool nose coordinate system is always set by the coordinate system setting. When
(#6011
Upon zero point return. (NC internal setting at label skip, or sequencer setting for other cases. ) when On the tool setter, contacts the sensor upon internal setting)
When turret operation, indexing (Sequencer is
(b)
(b)
(NC
(c)
performed setting )
by
manual
(c)
Note : Coordinate system cannot be set by manual operation, when parameter #6011 DO = 1 [when the tool coordinate memory number follows the last two digits of T**$$I.
(2)
1)
18
T** -l-T
$$
These commands stop the advance reading of the control. For these M codes, M 2digit BCD code and their respective decoded signals are output.
Offset 01 (Tool number to coordinate (Wear 49 offset (TooI ) nose R) number) to 16/01
memory
1,
Note : (offset memory number (a)
M90 through M109 are for internal Even when they are programmed, output signal (BCD and decoded
The tool coordinate memory number is: Thus, the tool coordinate number + 50). value selects the contents of (offset + 50) .
Tool radius compensation circular path mode Tool radius intersection Subroutine Subroutine Not
compensation: computing mode program program used ( for call end special application)
By executing the T**$$ command, the turret is called wherever the tool post is located, and is moved for the offset amount of the offset number, to execute the coordinate system setting corresponding to the selected tool coordinate memory number. By executing the T**OO command, the turret is called wherever the tool post is located, and the offset amount cancel movement is No coordinate system setting is executed. performed. The tool nose coordinate by the coordinate system system setting. is always set
M100 to 109:
(b)
2.7.3
(1)
(c)
t
2.6.6
NOTES ****
WHEN
USING
THE
CONVENTIONNote:
M93
4-tIlock
buffering
AL G50T
FUNCTION
When power is applied wirh~. the current M code is changed However, it is not changed by to the M code maked
When using the coordinate system setting specification, do not give the G50 T**** Error will occur if commanded.
command.
RESET operation.
(2) 2.7
4-block
buffering
(M 93)
MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTIONS
(M-FUNCTION)
The miscellaneous function is specified with the The function address M and a maximum 3 digits. of each M code (MOO to M99) is determined by the Refer to machine, except for several M codes. the machine tool builders manual for the function of M codes except for-the following M codes concerned with the control.
2.7. I M CODES FOR STOP (M 00, M 01, M 02, M 30) To stop the NC control codes are provided. MOO: MO1: M02: M30: Program Optional End End of of stop stop program tape and machine, the following (3)
When M93 ; command is given, the control enters the 4-block buffering mode, which remains until M92 is commanded subsequentup to 4 blocks of data ly . In this mode, are read in advance for subsequent opera tion. With programs in which the operation time for the 4 blocks read in advance is longer than the reading and processing time of the subsequent 4 blocks, interruption between blocks can be eliminated. This function is effective in avoiding a shiny streak on the workpiece caused by feed stop between blocks . 1- block buffering (M92) the 4-block and the 1 block
When M92 command is given, buffering mode is cancelled, buffering mode is restored.
Note : While the tool radius is being compensated for with the M93 function , up to two blocks not containing move commands ar-e permitted , and as the result, up to 6 blocks may be read in advance.
19
BUFFERING
FUNCTION
(M93,
M92)t
(Centd)
(3)
Commands of M96 and M97 become effective from the edge in the following command blocks . X.. . Z.. . F.. ; Z.. . M96 (or M97)
Z.. M97) Z.. . ; ; -1 F.. .
M93
GO1 X.. .
;
U.. Z.. . F.. ;
a. GO1
1 ;J
;
(GO1) X..
b.
M58
M92
Canceling reading .
4block
advance
2.7.5
2.7.4 CIRCULAR PATH MODE ONIOFF ON TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION (M 97, M 96)+ These M codes provided with option. are effective the tool nose when radius the control is compensation
SUBROUTINE
(1) The
following function.
(1) The
following
M codes
are
used.
M code
Meaning
M cede
Meaning
M 96
M 97
Note:
(2)
(M98)
by RESET operation.
(2)
With the tool radius compensation mode by G41 to G44, the locus of the tool (center of tool radius) for commanded workpiece
contour lines gents larger two categories. with than the angle between tan 180 is in the following
With this command, the subroutine program starting with a sequence No. following Q in the part program with the program No specified times. However, by p is called and is executed L
when
M96 mode The center of the tool nose radius describes a circular arc around the perimeter in the contour line.
P is omitted:
subroutine program following the sequence No. Q in the main program is called. Q is omitted: subroutine program end of the program called. L is omitted: Subroutine 4 times.
M97 mode
The center of the tool nose radius moves along the locus that is formed by straight lines shifted from the contour line by the
distance equal to the tool radius.
lNTFFiSELll ON
is only be
once. up to
nested
.1
I
z
=Q!c3:000nOdO 3)
End of subroutine program (G99)
~,t~ reference pan! of lmtemacfmn.
b M 97 mode (calculation of
intersection) 2.8
; is written at the end of subroutine M99 program to end it. When this code is written, the operation returns to the block immediately following the main block in which the subroutine program was called after the execution of the subroutine program.
M99
P..
EXAMPLE
Man Program Subroutine program
When this is written at the end routine program, the operation the sequence program. No. specified by
(4)
Simple M99 P
jump
command
--
-; When this command is used in the main program, the operation simply jumps to the by Q in the main sequence No. specified program. If Q is omitted, the program simply jumps to the leading end of the main program. I
N1 N2 G50 GOO XO . . . 20 ; ;
J
2.7.6
-1 11
1 1 1
,1 ,A , ,/
,/ ,!
,
_,/$
--l
>:
\ \
1 \
N20 hi 99 ;
-:.
,--.,
ITotlmes
One hme
OTHER M CODES
How to use the other M codes other than the above depends upon the machine. Refer to the machine tool builderfs manual.
(1)
L
Writing multi this program make endless blocks (10 lines maximum) and executing cycle start operation. of Notes : 1. When the program No. specified by address P and the sequence No. specified by Q are not found, alarm code 041 is displayed. While command L for the number of repetitions is under execution, the remaining number of repetitions can be displayed. For details refer to 4.3.2.2. This function can be used when subroutine programs are stored in the part program Main programs can be commanded memory. through NC tap-es ~r the part program memory. When subroutine programs than 4 times, alarm code are nested more 042 is displayed.
Example
of M codes
for Machine
Meaning
Remarks
M 03
Spindle forwad running Direct switching from M 03to between M 04 cannot be done, them.
M04
M 05 must be inserted
M 05
Spindle stop
M 08
M 09
2.
3.
(2)
M codes are commanded in the with move command, execution on the machine tool design and M commands with or after ) the control out-
4.
construction. (Whether the are executed simultaneously completion of move command. (3) For these M-code commands, puts M 2-digit BCD codes.
2.7.7
When
BCD output option, it can command codes between MOO and M999. (1) M codes between MOO and and M999 are output codes.
M89,
M 3digit
and
between
M11O
in
3-digit
BCD
(2)
M90 through M109 are M codes, and no BCD put. See 2. 7.2 PROCESSING .
M
CODES
21
27 (3)
7 M 3-DIGIT
BCD
OUTPUTt
(Centd)
are
(b)
#6645
With MOO, MO1, and M30, decode signals output in addition to the BCD output. See 2.7.1, M CODES FOR STOP. The specific usages of the M 3-digit
r?
=1224
I
~ ~
MD51MD4
(4)
codes
l--m-l
--
--
depends machine
Refer to
36645 1
:.~=x
; xm---(Commanded by 2 digits)
2.7.8
HIGH-SPEED
This function is used to execute the M function at high-speed without the need of the ending
response. The M code is not output when the M code is
commanded, but the M decode output is setlreset. Thus, there is no need for the M code decode in the programmable processing and FIN processing
controller. The M code that perform the high-speed function processing is preset in the parameter. (There are both a setting parameter and a resetting parameter. ) When resetting to hold or reset M
(3)
#6646
. . . For
by the
the
set
can
be
==1
-T--..
MD3 MD2i MDl MDO
2.7.8.1
(1) For
1/0
Channel
output
decode
~. -_
F1224
FI
MD31MD2 7MD1 MDO
:- ~ IMD71MD6 -
MD51MD4
(b)
#6647
2.7.8.2
(1)
Parameters
High-speed #6007D5 M function ... . . 0: 1: The The function function for is is disabled enabled the
=7
setting
(2)
M code setting
decode output
parameter
Xx
lxx
(Commanded by 2 digits)
The 1,4 code is set in the parameter to the decode output bits.
corresponding
(Example of setting)
#6644 #6645
(4) Decode (upon
. . . 73 . . . 77
output reset)
72 ?6
71 75
70 74
setting parameter
#6644
holdlreset
(a)
to hold reset. D7
or
reset
the
decode
(b)
t! 6644 ~--~- ~
.xxxlx~
When the decode output is to be held, the numerals corresponding to each bit are added The result is output to #1224. to the total.
(Commanded by 2 digits)
22
of High-speed
M Function
The following are simple examples high-speed M functions. (1) Sets the parameter
#6644 #6645 #6646 #6647 (2) 01; M60; M61; M62; M63; M64; M65; M67; M30; (3) 02; M70; M71; M72; M73; M74; M75; M76 ; h177; M30:
of the
Value of each is to be held (Exampje {M~~ M {;$$ JM67 of .. . ... ::: . .. setting)
bit
when
the
decode
output
63 62 61 60
67 66 65 64 73 72 71 70 77 76 75 74
Set MD1 output Reset MD1 output Set MD4 output Reset MD4 output Set MD7
setting
for
\M77
When set
reset,
for
setting
The left program is executed. The bits corresponding to #1224 DO to D7 are set. M60 to M67 do not wait for FIN. If an M code is to be held, set the total of each bit corresponding to #6135. The value to be held is set in #1224 at the end of the program.
M code
setting
for
resetting
The value of each bit corresponding and MD7 are added to #6135,
to MD4
The left program is executed. The bits corresponding to #1224 DO to D7 are reset. The M codes M70 to M71 do not wait for FIN .
2.8
2.8.1
preparatory
LIST OF GCODES
Functions
(G-FuNcTlON)
2.7.8.3
Notes
Do not set the original the following M code. hl codes when setting Address G, plus ing of the block. their groups. (1) G codes following up to 3 digits Table 2. 8.1 specify the meangives G codes and
(1)
M30 When these M codes code functions are lost; has the priority.
classified
into
the
. M90 to M99
When functions these have M codes are the priority. set, the M code
Modal G-code Non-modal G-ccdeeffestive G-cede G-code block. Meaning until the other
when (2)
codes
are
not
found
If an other process is waiting to be completed in the same block, it waits for the first process to be completed. Do not command same block. * If executed, two or more
G-code
(3)
M codes
in
the
(2)
from
01 through
11 are
alarm
occurs.
in Table
2.8.
control is energized with the G codes marked with 1 are automatically selected.
23
2.8.
1 LIST
OF
G CODES
(Centd)
(3)
(3)
G codes of * group in the Table 2.8.1 are They should not be commanded nonmodal. together with the other G codes in one block . The modal G codes can be commanded ly in a block. mixed(4)
Along the axes specified by GOO, the machine slide moves in rapid traverse rates , independently of each other. The resultant tool locus may not be a straight line, and when working out the program , care must be taken to avoid fouling between the tool and the workpiece . GOO is a modal G code in the 01 group When it is commanded, it remains effective until other G codes in the 01 group are commanded.
For the positioning with G 00, the pulse distribution is started only after the ERROR DETECT state is turned on, and the program advances to the next block only upon the activation of the ERROR DETECT state after the completion of the pulse distribution. When this G code is used, therefore, the workpiece edges are machined true, and rounding is avoided. Notes :
(4)
(5)
G codes in Class B are basic, and those in Class O are options. The use of optional G codes is determined by the machine tool design. See the machine tool builders manual, Standard G codes can be coverted to special G codes I by parameters. This is a basic feature, and, when parameter #6005D7 is set to 1, standard G codes are converted to special G code 1. When the sDecial G code IIowtion is incor.
(5)
(6)
(7)
porated in the control, the setting of param eter #6005D 7 to 1 will convert G codes to Setting the parameter special G codes D. to the standto O will reconvert the G codes ard G codes.
(6) a.
The ERROR DETECT ON state means the decrease of the servo lag pulses to the permissible level after the pulse distribution for move command. When T code is commanded, GOO should be put in the T-code block. GOO is required for designation of tool traverse rate for tool offset motion using T code. EXAMPLE G50 GOO X150. TO1O1 Z1OO. S1OOO ; M03 ; . . . of traverse motion
b, 2.8.2
2.8.2.1 (1)
Z(W) . . .
system set by the G50 command or moves it away by (U, W ) from the present point for each axis independently. (2) For the rapid traverse rate, as it depends refer to the machine tool
machine, manual.
(GOO)
X30.
Z5.
12 m/min 6 m/min
-x
i
-5
,/
P- 1 -. ~,
/
E--l
i f
30 DIA
1-
-z [
z
Basic Optional
Function
Section B B, O B, O B, O B
Linear interpolation, 01 ~
Circular interpolation CW, (radius R designation) Gircular interpolation CCW, (radius R designation) . Dwel I * ERROR DETECT OFF positioning
G 22
G 22 G 23 G 27 G28 G 29 Gm G31 ~ I i
G 22 G 23 G 27 G 28 G 29 G30 G31
01
Radius programming fm circular interpolation -~ CCW
G 23 --+
G 27 G 28 G29 G30 G31
Automatic
return to reference
point
%T=T%G35 G% G%
tam=
Retunrn to 2nd reference Threadcutting, Variable lead threadcutting Tool set error compensation Stored stroke limit 3rd aea
-=
point
continuous threadcutting,
multi-start
O
* 07
-~
threadcutting
o
o o
G=
G 37 G38
G36
G 37 G28
G36
G 37 G28
o o o
0 0 0 0
06 ~-.;: v
G41 G 42 G43 G44
G39 G40
G41 G 42 G43 -. G44
G 39 r G40
G41 G 42 G43 G44 06 I
OFF
2.
When the control is reset, whether G code of 01 group should be GOO or kept as the current one can be set by parameter #6005D6. Radius programming for circularinterpolation can be made by G02 and G03 instead of G22 G23, respectively. Cornering can be programmed by GO1 instead of Gll and G12. Refer to 2.8.7 Cornering. Initial states of G codes of 05, 07, 08 groups when power is applied are determined by their respective setting data (#6001D0, Dl, D2).
3.
The followingG codes for initial state when power is applied can be set by parameters.
4. Group 01 04 03 G code GOOor G980r G900r GOl G99 G91 Parameter #6005 DG #?6005 DI h6005 Do 5.
25
2.8
PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS
(G-FUNCTION)
(Centd)
B: Basic Optional
2.8
List of G Codes
(Centd)
O:
G Code
; ~s~~~ll
II
Group
Function
Section B
0
G 50
G 51 G 65
G 92
G 92
G,, --* G65 t--
.
G51 G65 *
Maximum spindle revolution setup, work coordinate system setup 4 -- --- i Return of current display value to origin L -.. User macro simple call User macro modal call User macro modal call cancel Mirror image by programming ON - L Mirror image by programming OFF Finishing cycle Stock removal in turning .- - .
- ~
0 0 --0
G 72 G 73 G 74 G 75 G 76 G90 G 92 I
G 72 G 73 G 74 G 75 G 76 G 77 G78 I
Stock removal in facing Pattern repeating Pack drilling in Z-axis -Grooving in X-axis Automatic threadcutting cycle .L I
Multiple
repetitive cycies
0 0 0 0
Turning cycle A
Constant surface speed control Constant surface speed control cancel Feed per minute (mm/min) Feed per revolution Absolute command 03 G 91 G122 r G123 Gill GI12 T r I G 122 ~ G 123 Gill G712 1 ~ G123 Gill GI12 I * ; G122 : 11 Tcml registration end Ta~r multiple beveling/rounding
o +. -
-H..
----J
G93
Incremental
command .
0 .. ..
o . o
selected
when
the
control
2.
When the control is reset, whether G code of 01 group should be GOO or kept as the current one can be set by parameter #6005D6. Radius programming for circularinterpolation can be made by G02 and G03 insteacl of G22 G23, respectively. Cornering can be programmed by GOI instead of Gll and G12. Refer to 2.8.7 Cornering. Initial states of G codes of 05, 07, 08 groups when power is applied are determined by their respective setting data (#6001D0, D1 , D2).
The following G codes for initial state when power is applied can be set by parameters.
Group 01 I I G cede GOOor G980r G900r G(X G99 G91 i
3.
I
~
4.
5.
041
03
2.8,2,2
(1) G06
Error
(G06)
EXAMPLE G50 X1OO. T0202 x35. z60. s600 Z5. F1. ; ---Q ; Executed by ; M03 ;
x(u)
GOO With this command is identical to that following a. aspects. the positioning of GOO except process for the
@ GO1
G06 is a non-modal It is effective only EXAMPLE GOO G06 X.. x.. x.. b. . . . Z.. z,. z.. . . . ; ; ; Move Move by by G06 GOO G code in the * group. in the programmed block.
ZO
x60.
FO.2
+x
i i // /
With the positioning of G06, the positioning pulse dis~ribution &. immediately started on the completion of the pulse distribution for the preceding block, after making an ERROR DETECT check, and the program advances to the next block after the comple tion of the pulse distribution process. For this reason, wrokpiece edges are rounded to the extent of servo lag pulses. The ERROR on DETECT only the ON /OFF signals
Note :
Angle
programming
for
linear
interpolation
With the control equipped with this option, linear interpolation can be commanded at specified angles. GO1 X(U) A.. . F(E) . .. ; (a)
2.8.3 GO1
A tool is moved to the point (X, Z ) on a straight line at the traverse rate designated by the F or code in the coordinate system set by G50 moved away by (U, W ) from the present point. . F or E code must be specified in the block containing the G 01 or in the previous block. If Feedrate designot, i; causes a format error. nated by the F or E code is the tangential feedrate.
+,x
POSITION PROGRAMMED
With these commands, a linear interpolation will be executed by specifying angle A in the + direction of the Z-axis and distance either in X or Zaxis direction. rate in the tangential direction by the F or E code. The range specifiable with address The feedis specified of angle
A iS as fOllOWS.
% Metric Input
programmable
Range of Angle A
O- *360.0i)O0 z
\~ 1 /
Inch Input
u 2
+2
27
2. 8.3
LINEAR
(GO1) t (Centd)
Table
2.10 Meaning
Sign
Meaning
G 02
A+
A-z
(; {1?
*
G 03
+sr.rl-pyJ-y&%
Angle clockwise + Z-axis, from Z
c)(;1)3
-z
.A
x (u) z (w)
I
End point of arc on X-axis (Diameter value) End point of arc on Z-axis
+ .x EfQD POINT
z Iv START POINT L j
ii!=
~ CENTER --2 K
-z
START
POIN1
EXAMPLE
+x
CENTER
~ ~
GO1 GO1
X50. zO.
A+150. A180. ;
FO.3
F
2.8.4
50 DIP
WJ--
CIRCULAR
/ )/
INTERPOLATION
7Y-f+150 / -1 I .
1 -7
U-/
Fig, 2, 9
interpolation of be programmed
an arc on in a single
multiquadblock.
60
(G 02, G 03)
EXAMPLE
.x
G02(G03)
X( U)...
A tool is moved on the circular arc whose center is away from the present position by (I, K) . The end point of the arc is (X, Z) in the coordinate system set by G 50 or away from the present position by (U, W) A tool moves along a circular arc at the traverse rate specified by the F or E code. The meanings of G02, G03 and each address are shown below .
60
1~
DIA
100 [11A
.Z
Table 2.11
Arc Center Coordinate I (10000, 100 60 =20mm 2 J2~2 K
202. ,;~
Note
shaded
2700)
that if the end point is designated area, the alarm is not displayed continue point to move coordinate the endlessly. should be
tool The
will end
precisely is
commanded
when
circular
interpolation
= 19.596+
19.60
mm
The
above
case
can
be programmed
as follows.
apphed to the tool nose radius compensation, or the tool may not move properly. Generally, it is recommendable to calculate up to the next digit of least input increment and count fractions over 1/2 as one and disregard the rest.
3.
Gol ] G02
z-.
F.. . z-46.6
x60.
When the control is provided with Radius Programming for Circular Interpolation, radius value can be commanded by G02, G03 instead of G22, G23.
by
the
F code
is
a.
G03
X80,0
Z15. O
1-10.0
K-30.
F150
tangential Notes :
END
1.
The direction of the arc of G02 for Clockwise is defined as follows. !! When viewing the X, Z plane in -Y direction in the righthand coordinate system, the tool moves clockwise from the beginning point of the arc. Therefore, the direction of rotation in the plate (-X, Z plane) in the figure below is presented inversely.
b. G03
aaatl=?oo
I
I
15.00
55.00
U40. O
W-40.
1-10.0
K-30.
F150
. u
-.
2. point of arc.
G 03
40.00
When the end point of arc is not designated on the circumference specified by the radius, the alarm is not displayed and the tool path The mark o indicates the end is as follows.
20.00
&
/
42
&
40 {Jo CENTER_~30 lx) 15 0[1 :,500
END POINT
20.00
10.0(1
*-W/c
CENTER
2.8.5 (1)
DWELL (G 04)
G04 U(P) . . . ;
This command interrupts feed for the length of time designated by the address U or P.
o--0
(2)
P /
Dwell block
is programmed .
as an independent
29
2.8,
(3)
5 DWELL
(G04)
(Centd)
time which U or P is can be as folP
Table
2, 12
Meaning
For specifying
Dwell
time:
0.001
to
9999.99
seconds
x z
For changing the tcol offset value to the specified value. value to the original
is
not
influenced
by
input/output
u w
... . . .
3. 5-second 3. 5-second
dwell dwell The offset programmed values for which no are not changed. address is
G04 is a nonmodal
2.
The counting of dwell time is started from the instant the control enters the ERROR DETECT ON state upon completion of the move command block before G04. Therefore, with G04 UO ; , the control advances to the next block immediately after detecting the ERROR DETECT ON state. EXAMPLE GO1 G04 GO1 W-1. UO.2 W-1. F25 ; ; ; program, 1 mm feed (2) O. 2 second 1 mm feed chip cutting feed dwell time
T7
~ 0.05
Z- axis
LContents of is changed
tool
offset
No.
16
The above format is used to make offset value tapes, and to store the values in Offset M-emery at once. The tape format is as follows .
/
+x
\
Label
02 DWELL 1 mm
Q 0;
GIOP. GIOP. .. .. X... X... Z.. Z.. .R .R .. . ... ; ;
h .
GIO P... ~
2. 8.6
X.. ~
. Z.. .R
... ;
Z(W)
C..
R...
; are
30
2.8.7
(1)
CORNERING (G 11, G @
Beveling (Gil) X( U)... Gll K.. 1.. . . This command removes Addresses the sharp corner of X and Z cannot be in a block. is shown below.
workpiece.
{ Z(W) . . .
F(E)
. . .
specified Meaning
Table 2.13
Beveling for X-axis Beveling for Z-axis
Gll
X( U)...
K..,
F(E)...
Gll
Z(W)...
1... F(E)...
KEND POINT
K+
END POINT ,,50
N 45
+X
I+
START POINT I @7 / w
Ux 2
(DIAMEI ER)
I
K * L [
~
m
START POINT
I
Bevellng Value
f JZ
Bevellng Value (Raalus Value)
Bevellng
Dlrecllon
I)
are
(G12)
exceeding
the
above
value
causes This command performs the rounding of the corner. Addresses X and Z cannot be spec ified simultaneously in a block. The corner ZLS a quarterround. is formed Meaning of
X30.
ZO
Gll
Z-20.
18.
F30
each
address
is
shown
below.
I (Gil)
I
x80. 20. +x
K-7.
7,
DIA
8.
lo
30
DIA
-z
Fig. 2.10
31
2. 8.7
CORNERING
(Gil,
G12)t
(Centd)
Table 2.14
G12
X( U)...
K..
F(E). .,
G12
Z(W)...
K...
F(E)...
KEND POINT
-x
L.-...-.,
K L-,,,,,,
T-_
K*
,,!.
T___
T
w
,Our,lr,g
,Ja,e
qcu~d,r,g
c red
I)
are
limited
within
Notes
: .
1.
Ill<lwl 2.
]Kl
<lU/21
Gll and G12 are modal G codes in the A group They remain effective until other G codes in the group A are commanded. Gll and G12 are for one axis only. If they are commanded for both axes in the same block, they constitute a format error. EXAMPLE G12 X.. . W.. . K.. . ; Error 050
The
command format
exceeding error.
the
above
value
causes
GOO X20.
ZO
3. : m
.x
25.
no block without In the G 10 or G 12 modes, I and K nor block in which I and K are O can be commanded. If such a block is commanded, correct tool movement can not be assured.
.-. I .970
DIA 9 1 20 f DIA I +7
4. 5.
6.
GO1
7.
I GO1 code can be used instead of G12 to speciHowever, in this case, R must fy rounding. be used instead of I and K. Gol ~ X( U)... Z(W) ... i R... R, ..; F(E) ;
K.. . I 1$. . J
F(E).
32
DESIGNATION BY G CODE
make the display reset opera b. In principle, tion when current position display (external) is useci. input G
(metric specified
or by
inch) the
of
data is codes.
following
4.
The tool offset values ently in the G20 mode G 20/G21 must the tool offset
differmode. modifying
be commanded values.
4
I
Processing (Inch)
in G 20
Processing
in G 21
(Metric) 15.000 mm
1,5000 in.
These G codes are programmed at the leading If these G codes end of a block of its own. are commanded, the units of all the following motions are than ged. a. b.
c.
part values
programs
settings manual
and
parameters
In programming, circular interpolation (G02, G03) the control requires the data of the arc-center Normally, they are given by using coordinates. the addresses I and K. (1) In programming of G2.2 or G23, the control automatically calculates the arc center coor dinates (1 , K) from the radius value designated by the interpolation. address R and performs circular
d. e.
movements
Displays
Notes : 1. When G20 or of inch/metric G 21 is commanded, the selection is changed. setting There-
fore, the state of G20/G21 power application depends by parameter #6001D0. EXAMPLE
G22
( G23)
X( IJ) . . .
Z(W)
. . .
R..
F(E)
. . .
1
ER CR 01234 G20 ; ; Inch input designation
A tool moves along the circular arc whose center is radius R away from the present position. The end point of arc is at coor Z) set by G50 or is away from dinates (x, the present position by (U, W) . Tool moves along the circular arc at feedrate designated by F code.
(2)
G22,
G23
and
each
address
(3)
T
radius
value
Radius value R is commanded by incremental value with a sign of radius programming. 2. When G 20 /G 21 selection is commanded program, take the following procedure forehand. a. Cancel used. work coordinate system in the be-
In this case,
When radius value R > 0, an arc, describing less than 180, and when R < 0, an arc describin~; more than 180 are specified.
( G50T ) , if
position (G41
offset, G44)
and .
tool
radius
after
the
com-
for .
all axes
33
Notes
1.
2.
G22 and
until In the
G 22 .I G 23
x
\
... L!4_
~(,z
3.
G 23
When R is varied with both start and end points fixed , the tool will move along the following circular arc .
-z
x (u)
=F-R -t
The X-coordinate
(Diameter value)
+~
~
END POl-
arc
The Z-coordinate
l:w.~po. ---:
, +
z
!
Distance from the start point of arc to arc center (Incremental value with sign)
--&7 K:GIN
in not the following case, the arc cen
R < (Distance
between
start 2
point
and
end
point)
4. 5.
Tool for
nose the
radius
compensation G22 or
is
effective
block
containing
G23.
START POINT
Fig. 2.11
The block containing designated in finishing special canned cycles When the control is
of
6.
proby G02,
&
u X2 z \v
END POINT .-
ARC CENTER R
gramming option , circular interpolation radius (R) programming can be made G03 instead of G22, G23.
by
START POINT
2.8.10
(1)
I Fig. 2.12
EXAMPLE
GO1
$, G02
X40.
I(X40. )
Z-10.
z-52.5
F20
;
R30. (F20) ; ]
With this command, the tool is positioned to the absolute coordinate point ( X , Z ) or incremental coordinate point (U, W) by moving along the two axes simultaneously, and then, the position is checked for conformance with the reference point. For the axis for which no command is given, positioning and check ing are not executed.
.Z
Fig, 2, 13
(2)
If the position is the reference point, the returntoreference lamp lights. The posi tion is the reference point in all the axial directions specified, the automatic operation If the position is not is continued further. the reference point even along one axis, this constitutes the return-positionerror, and the automatic operation is interrupted. (Cycle start lamp goes off. )
INTERIU
POSITIONING
POINT
REFERENCE POINT
Notes 1.
The reference point is an fixed point on the machine tool to which the tool can return by the motion under the control of the automatic reference point return or G28 automatic ref See 6.2.1, erence point return function. Automatic Reference Point Return . If G27 is commanded in the tool position offset mode, the tool returns to the position displaced from the reference point by the tool offset value. Positioning cannot be made at the reference point. Before commanding G27, cancel the tool offset mode.
4+
-x .-
RETURN POINT z i \i x z
+Z
Fig,
2.14
2.
the
axis
for
(2)
to
EXAMPLE
a.
returned axis lights. When the tool to the reference point in both axes, automatic operation is resumed. offset in the block pre-
(3)
; . ; block TGT.; containing OO ; G 27.
b.
in the W.. .
The series of RETURN TO REFERENCE motions are as follows, With initialpower application, the return motions to the reference point are as shown below in the low-speed mode as shown below.
APPROACH SPEED 1
3,
The mirror image function is effective with motion commanded by G27. To avoid the return position error, command G 27 in the G 69 mode ( Opposite tool post mirror image off) .
the
,pEE,r-U::j::TER
2.8.11
Fig, 2.15 Thereafter, the RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT motion is in rapid traverse as under the command of GOO.
I
RAPID TRAVERSE
With this command, the tool can be brought back to the reference point automatically after passing througkl an interim point. In other words, the tool positions to the commanded absolute coordinate position (X , Z ) or incremental position (U, W) by moving simultaneously along the two axes, and then automatically returns to the reference point by the reference point return function. The specified point (X, Z) or (U, W) is known as INTERIM POSITIONING POINT , or INTERIivl POINT.
Fig. 2.16 (4) However, when low traverse speed is speci fied by parameter #6010D 5 set to 1, the same law motion speed as in the 1st time is obtaineci.
35
2.8.11
POINT Notes : 1.
TO
REFERENCE
(2)
For parameter setting and other details of the low traverse speed return motion shown in Fig. 2.8.11.2, refer to 5.2.1 Manual Return to Reference Point. The starting point for RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT motion must be in the area shown in Fig. 2.8.11.4. Fig. 2.8.11.3 can be started from any position. (3)
When G.29 is used, consideration on the distance between points B and C is unnecessary in programming. Especially when incremental instructions are used, this function is useful to return the tool to the original co ordinate system after returning to the reference zero. Motions C + B and B + D are made simultaneously along the two axes in rapid traverse. However, the tool will not move in the direction for which instruction is omitted.
2.
(4)
RETURN DIRECTION
Where G28 is programmed several times, the point B creat~d by the latest G28 instruction is effective for the motion by G 29. EXAMPLE Coordinates these two (absolute input) point is equivalent to
of interim blocks.
N20
G28
X1O.
z20.
;G.
(30. l--r ;
20. )
3.
Before writing G28 in the program, cancel the tool position offset as shown below . a. Canceling TU G28 b. X.. . in the preceding ; : block TE~OO containg ; G28 block N25 N26 I G28 G29 x30. x-40. ; z-50. 20. )
1100 Z.. .
in the Z.. .
Z20. Z-50.
I I
+-;
Notes : 1.
Commanding G 29 without G28 after turning on the an error 059. the execution of control constitutes
4.
2.
2,8.12
(1)
cancel tool offset before proIn principle, gramming G28 or G29. If they are programmed while offset is effective, the interim point B will be offset, and the tool will pass point B.
G28
X..
Z.. .
B
Point A-+B+C
(reference zero point)
Point
G29
X..
Point
Z.. .
D ~ -&
Point
C+B+D
[REFERENCE
ZERO POINT,
.4.4
Fig, 2.17
3.
Commanding G29 in the TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION mode (G40 - G44) or in CANNED CYCLES (G70 - G76, G90, G92 and G94) constitutes an error. EXAMPLE N50 N51 N52 N53 T0300 G28 T0400 G29 ; u80. ; u-80. w40. ; Notes
c ,/ / ,0 ,/ B / \ \ -x \ / (REFERENCE ZERO POINT)
T-],,,,/-~~E:
w20. ;
INTERIM TO 2N0 POINT POINT REFEPENCE PARAMETER POINT t 6613
1.
tion of the control, G28 or MANUAL RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT must be executed.
2.
For the 2rld REFERENCE POINT RETURN motion, there is no area from where returning is impossible , and the tool can be return from any position.
\\ \ \ \\ +Z ID
3.
The
same notes
3.
~L~l-
and 4. of to Reference
2.8.11 apply
%--l
2.8.13 (1)
40
4. When G29 is commanded after G 30, the tool moves via the interim point specified by G30 to the position specified by G 29. However, the interim point is renewed only in the axis specified by G30.
With this command, the tool first moves to an interim positioning point (X, Z) or (U, W ) in two axial directions simultaneously, and then, moves to the 2nd reference point. The tool does not move along the axis for which no coordinate position is specified.
2.8.14 (1)
2ND z
REFERENCE
With this command, a special linear inter polation is executed. During the interpolation movement under this instruction, the tool interrupts the interpolation motion immediately, when a skip and proceeds to the signal is received. next block,
POINT
(2)
of of
signal
a.
INTERIM POINT
is programmed
in incre-
Fig. 2.18 (2) The 2nd reference point is specified in advance in terms of the distance from the 1st reference point commanded by G28, by parameters #6612 and #6613.
The tool moves incrementally in accordance with the next block from the point where the interpolation is interrupted.
37
2, 8.14
SKIP
FUNCTION
(G31)t
(Centd)
(3)
G31 is a non-modal
G code.
When no skip signal is received during the execution of the block containing G 31, the tool stops at the end of the block, and alarm 087 is displayed. (4) The feedrate for blocks containing G 31 are set in the following two methods, selectively specified by parameter #6019D 4. Designation by F in the same way normal programs . as with #6232.
COMMAND
,-+
1~~
--
:J
1 I ,50
a. b
~z
/
SKIP SIGNAL ON
(5)
values at that moment as parameter data. #6568 b. When the next block lute values only for The tool moves position in the at the position ceived, if axis EXAMPLE is programmed one axis: in absofor storing storing be
#656 9 for
: When parameter #6004D0 is set to 1, the program is advanced to the next block automatically even when no skip signal. is received during the execution of the block of G31. Before programming G31, be sure to program
G31
GO1
Z400.
X1OO.
;
;
ACTUAL MOTION x --400 Lz --l SKIP SIGNAL ON COMMAND ~ v ~ 100 DIA
2.
3.
advances executing
c.
When the next block is programmed lute values along two axes : The tool from the received. EXAMPLE moves point
in abso-
G31 GO1
W1OO. X300.
Z200.
x
SKIP SIGNAL
\ 2
200. \ 300 \ \ ___ 100 L I / ON
G32
X( U)...
Z(W)
. . .
F(E)
. . .
; up
DIP
With this command, the tool cuts threads to the point (X, Z ) specified in absolute coordinates or (U, W ) specified in incre mental coordinate values, at a lead desig nated by F or E code.
(2)
of leads to be as follows.
specified
by
F and
Table
2.16
Feedrates follows.
are
limited
by
spindle-speed
S as
Metric Metric Input Metric output Inch Input E 26 I E 0,~0004-E19.685000 in. = F24 I FO,CxJOlF19.6850 in.
Output
inch Output
of
X-axis
speed
component
is
format
of threadcutting
is shown
I I
Table
2.17
Command format
FO.COl-F50.0000in.
R~ EO.O3OO1O-F5O.OOCOOO in.
F code E code
is
for
normal precise
thread thread
cutting. cutting.
is for
(3)
specified
by
F and
dI=*
EXAMPLE : Straight Thread Thread leac[ L = 5.0 mm 6~=5. Omm Omm mm tiz=3. Cutting depth = 1.0
of Lead
I
45
Direction of Lead
+x
o L~
(x,z)
~~~~
+2
0>
+x
cI
I I
--------END POINT
Y
/ +Z START PO IN T
(iJ
GO(I u--42.
G32
w--68. ;
; F5. O
GOO IJ,Q.
w 68. u-44.
; ; ; ;
G32
w--68.
GOO U44. x
L [Lead)
Fig.
2.19
.-
I
_12+2
2.8.15
Thread
1.
e
(b) Worm Screw
Cutting depth
= 1.0 mm
GOO G32
X13. x38.
; W-35. F4. o;
; ; ; w-35. ; ;
Notes
Since the stop time between thread cutting blocks is approximately zero, smooth, continuous thread cutting is possible. If thread lead specification is changed midway, the thread becomes irregular near the boundary of blocks. : Allowances 6 1 and 6 z are cutting because lead error starting and end points. required occurs for near thread the
1.
GOO x60.
+x
I
I
I
v f-------~
i & !
.Z
(.
2.
I
If spindle speed is not constant during thread cutting, the leads become incorrect due to the servo lag. thread G92 is not effective at (or G76t) should be
3.
Continuous G32 (G32) (G32) thread cutting Z(W) Z(W). Z(W). . . . F(E) ; ; . . . ;
4.
dur-
Regarded
as
100%
This command
5. 6.
should
not
be
commanded
In Dry rate.
Do
Run
mode,
at Jog feed-
7,
not command M code for continuous thread the commanded block cutting. If commanded, stops as feedhold and will not permit continuous thread cutting.
Pipe (a)
Joint
(6)
Allowance
+x
for
lead
error(
61,
2)
2.8.16
With this
tJ-
#- i
Fig. 2.20
+Z
start point pulse ( 1 pulse /revolution) generated by a pulse generator installed on the spindle to control the starting point of thread always at the same position around the workpiece circumference.
approximately
from
the
Table 2.18
Equation
With the multi-start thread cutting function, after cutting a thread by controlling the starting point by the starting point pulse, another thread is cut by starting the cutting feed at an angular position of the spindle which is displaced from the starting pulse position by a preset angle.
L (mm): Lead of thread S(r/min): Spindle speed K: Constent (Normal value: a ( ): 33) Accuracy of thread _ AL. Lead error
m
LEAD
1150
1/100
1/150
1/200
1/250
1/300
Two Start Thread
(ln~
1)
2.91
3.61
4.01
4.29
; 4.52
4.70
Fig. 2.21
(1)
EXAMPLE Lead Spindle Thread 61> (2) _3. ~= 60. K ox 500 60.K x3.61 3.0X500 60. K =3. =0 Omm p,qmm of thread speed cutting L = 3.0 mm
G32
X((J)
. . .
Z(W)
. . .
F(E)
. . .
B..
With this command, the tool cuts a thread starting at an angular position which is displaced from the position corresponding to the starting pulse by an angle specified by B, to X(U) or Z(W) point, at a lead specified by F Or E code. by address B in the cutting function is
increment: range:
62>
Programmable
When decimal point input is used, B 1.=ldeg. The B code is non-modal, and is effective only in the programmed block.
41
2.8.16
MULTI-START
THREAD
CUTTING
(G32)
EXAMPLE G32 W. W. B90 Continuous ting cannot because of this block. thread cutbe performed feedhold at
G32
starting points on workpiece circumference sh&jd divide circumference into equal portions. EXAMPLE GOO G32 GOO U.. W.. U.. . . ; ; W.. . . . . :
Two-start ; F.-. ;
1
Thread
~ Threading
of
part
I@)
@&@
w.. u..
NO 8 CO MtJAh D E180
G32
Fig. 2, 22
GOO G32 Notes : GOO 1. Since (4096 the angular pulses/rev. position detection ) generated from pulses the spinw.. u G32 .
. . .
; B180 ;
dle pulse generator is used to define the angular position of the spindle with respect to the starting point as controlled by the B command, the least detectable increment is 360/4096 pulses ~, O. 08790/pulse. From the position commanded by B codes, an error up to fl pulse may occur. 2. The angular position from the starting can be specified in both forward and directions by BO - B 360. commands. pulse reverse
B180.
3.
When B command is made to specify angles outside the permissible range (O - 360.000) , alarm 062 is displayed, If multi-start thread cutting B is specified, continuous thread cutting cannot be executed.
2.8.17 (1)
(3)
calculation thread
for
K command
of
a. With this command, controlled with the lead per revolution variable increase specified lead screws or decrease by address are of K.
K command conditions.
is restricted
(i)
Feedrate at end point must programmable range. 500 mrfl/rev (metric output) rev (inch output) Feedrate value. at end point must
not or
exceed 50 in
(ii)
not
be
minus
(iii)
Accumulated value of movement lead variation must not exceed mm (metric output) or 419.4303 output) . Feedrate variation (metric The control above using F: Fixed rev)
VARIABLE
LEAD SCREW
(iv)
Fig.
2.23
Variable
Lead
Threadcutting b.
change corres~ondin~ to lead must not exceed 5, 400 mm /rein output) or 540 in /mm (inch output checks the restriction the following equation. lead command (mm /rev described
(2)
for
variable
or
in,f
0.000001 (Inch
in./rev. Input) K:
lead
command
(mm/rev
or
w: is within the maximum range ( 500 mm/rev (inch)) resulting following. output) output) from changes s: N:
Distance between on Zaxis (mm or For facing screw, as U on X-axis. Spindle speed
start inch)
and .
end
points
distance
is specified
b.
The total displacement in lead is within the 4194.303 419.4303 mm (metric in. (inch
+$)
c.
change corresponding to lead must not exceed 5, 400 mm /rein output) or 540 inJmm (inch output). should not be minus value.
+2.
K.W
(i)
Equaticm F + ~
for + KN
limit
in
a.
d.
value
Notes : (ii) 1. When variable lead threads are cut by continuous block programs, command pulses are interrupt ed at block junctions. (iii) 2. If K commands exceed the permissible alarm (1 060!! will be displayed. range, Equaticm for (F+~-)2+2Kw>I) Equaticm ~KN2 for S limit in a. (iii)
3.
When G 34 command is executed in the Dry Run mode, the tool moves only at the speed specified by the manual continuous feedrate command, if parameter SCRDRN ( #6019 BIT5) is set to 1. !11oIN!! ( #6006D5) When parameter 1, least increment for K commands mm/rev or O. 0001 in./rev. Commanding address alarm 11(360.II B in G34 block is set is to
(iv)
for S
limit 5,400
in a.
mm/min
4.
0.001
5.
causes
43
2.8.18
G36
U.. z=
W..
1..
K..
This function is for preventing the entry of the tool into the prohibited area, in both automatic operation mode and manual operation mode, to Three types of pro secure safer operation. hibited areas can be set up as shown below.
1 ST PROHIBITED AREA (BY PARAMETER) OLTSIDE PROHIBITION 2ND PROHIBITED (BY G36) I AREA, / .4
coordinate
The area check function single code block G37 (3) a. Setting 3rd prohibited
Set up + side boundary point E and - side boundary point F by the setting function. Selectively designate the inside side of the area between points parameter #6007D 1. or the outE and F by
b.
I) -x
c1
INSIDE OR OUTSIDE PROHIBITION ~ P
= c. In addition to the method by the setting function, the following instruction can be used to set a prohibited area, and to turn on the area check function also. G38 U.. . W.. 1.. . K.. . ;
4+--- z
(1)
a. Setting Set B by b. 1st prohibited boundary + side
Fig. 2.25
area A and The area check function single code block G39 A off by a
c.
\
Ist Point A
X axis
z 66m
Division
(2) a.
Setting
Set
2nd
prohibited
Prohibited
Area
Point B
~ %06
8 &137
Parameter
+ side
D by b.
the
Selectively designate the inside side of the area between points parameter #6007D0.
(4)
Coordinate
system
for
area
setting in
The above Points A through G are all set absolute values on the machine coordinate is, the position system (MACHINE) . That is written as the distance from the ( lst)
function, the following instruction used to set a prohibited area, and on the area check function also.
reference point ( 1 = least output (move) inthis function will not crement) . Therefore, become effective unless the manual or automatic RETURN TO REFERENCE ZERO is ex ecuted once after the energization of the control.
44
(5)
Effective-ineffective are a
selection
of
prohibited
With the following setting, the 2nd and the 3rd prohibited areas are selectively made effective and ineffective.
Setting
Meaning 2nd prohibited area check OFF 2nd prohibited area check ON 3rd prohibited area check OFF 3rd prohibited area check ON
o
~6001 DI 1 0 1
EXAMPLE
1STPROHI131TED AREA
+x 1 A (2003, 10CO) )
When G36 through G39 are commanded, these setting data are automatically rewritten. Therefore, the ON or OFF state ultimately specified by G code commands or setting The 1st profunction becomes effective. hibited area is always in the CHECK ON mode.
/ /
i:D AREA(NISIDE) 10,-8000) E (-4000 6500) / / / / / / / 7-/////////
B . D (-11000, -10000)
+Z
REFERENCE POINT
ir
(6)
Starting
area check
<_.
WORKPIECE CENTER
When the tool is returned to the reference point once manually or automatically after the energization of the control, the area check function is started immediately. Therefore, if the reference point is in the prohibited area, immediately, STROKE LIMIT ERROR will be caused. In this case, turn off the area check function, and change the data.
Table 2.20
Inside/Outside
(7)
Stored When
stroke
limit
error
the tool enters the prohibited area, it stops just inside the boundary line, and the control enters STORED STROKE LIMIT ERROR state. In this case, the tool can
only tion. be moved manually in the return direc-
=s
Pararnetar/ Setting
Contents
o o
5000
+ 6501
:6502
6000
11000
# 6503
10000
(8
Displaying
remaining
distance
Third Area
With this function, the distance between the current tool position and the boundary of the prohibited area in the X and Z directions are displayed on the CRT . Refer to 4.3.4.6. Stored Stroke Limit .
First Area
e;
#e601
?6606 + 6607
~L
1000
11000 ICQOO ) B
Notes : 1. The points on the axes are included Two prohibited overlapping. In the CHECK MACHINE function boundary line in both in the prohibited area. can be set with partial
2.
areas
3.
LOCK is not
ON mode, effective.
AREA
45
2 8.19 TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G 40 THROUGH G 44) of a nose radius of lathe tools, there is a deviation between the desired curve and the Therefore, tool offsets actual curve produced. are not enough for taper and circular cuttings. The tool nose radius compensation option resolves See Fig. 2.26. the problem of nose radius.
Because
Fig.
2.27
m-+
For the writing of radius values for tool nose radius compensation, refer to Fig . 4.3.5 Displaying and Writing Tool Offset Data. The address character is R .
(2) a.
CENTER PROGRAtiMED CIJTTING CONTOUR, WITH TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION j \ TOOL NOSER
code
The must
T code be
programmed
~n
~~
4-digit)
l--T-l-
Fig. 2.26
(1) a.
Tool Radius
nose
radius
values ~
L
ll+l! . . .
1- Offset
Tool
value
storage
Direction of compensation Right side viewed of tool travel Left side viewed of tool travel 1-
tool
nose
radius
Tool nose radius value must be written in the storage before the tool nose radius compenNumber of pairs that sation is commanded. can be written in the storage depends upon the machine. T T Refer 3-digit: 4-digit: 9 sets 16 or 50 sets Offset Memory+ .
in
the
direction
rl_ll
. . .
in the
direction
..,1. ,,
to 2.6.2, Tool
b. Range
Radius range.
of
tool
nose can
radius be set
value
x -lfiii2 4iiL
Fig. 2.28
Metric
Inch
i
o *99.999 I o *9.9999
b .
c.
Setting
of
tool of
nose tool
radius nose
When a tool is used for turning and for facing , as the direction of tool motion changes , the correct direction of compensation should be programmed with sign of T code .
q,~~. s,~~
,X CO!b)PEhSATION (T ~ LEFT SIDE COMPENSATION
*
Fig. 2.29
-z
The direction of compensation is changed from + to or - to + during program execushould not tion. G40 or T~ U 00 command be necessarily programmed to cancel the tool nose radius compensation.
(3) a.
(iii) When the RESET button is depressed, G code of 06 group are cancelled and G40 becomes effective.
(4) Tool sation
a. Fig.
motion
on the
tool
nose
radius
compen-
motion
2.31. .
shows
the
outline
of
the
tool
... ..>
BLOCK OF COMPENSATIOh WITH G 00 :3;,
~, +x
-Z
Fig.
G~~
Fig. 2,31 2.30
Regardless compensation,
of
the path
virtual tool nose is displayed ing the POS pushbutton. b. Issue G40 pensation. Cautions to cancel the tool
nose
radius
com-
c. (i)
in programming
G code
In compensation mode, the tool center path is deviated by radius from the programmed contour. Therefore, the path of virtual tool nose does not meet with programmed contour. But the current position displayed by depressing POS ke is the position of virtual tool tip ( (iii) bto @).
Since G40 to G44 are modal G codes of 06 group, they are retained until the other G code is commanded. Before switching one of G41, G42, G43 and G44 to another, G40 must be intermediated to cancel the compensation.
The (connection between two blocks in compensation mode is provided by the intersection of tool center paths (M97) and I:)y the circular arc (M96) . In the above diagram, blocks 3 and 4 are connected by a circular arc. Block @ for compensation start and
El
G 42 \ //
n]
G NJ \\
c1
G41 G 44 c1
(iv)
block @ for compensation cancel perform the connection of compensation mode and compensation cancel mode. Program should be made carefully for these blocks. b, Relationship pensaticm between tool tool position nose radius offset com-
c1
G 43
and
Tool nose radius compensation apply to the programmed contour which has been offset by the tool position offset function.
47
(b) GOO GO1 G02 T+0202 G41 U30. x20. W-15. ; z7. 115 F600 FO.2 ; ;
(5)
a.
HOW
to
enter
compensation
mode
@ @
Compensation mode is set when both the tool offset number by T code and G41 (or G42 through G44) are instructed. When this mode is set, tool nose radius compensation is started. More precisely, compensation mode is entered when the AND condition between T code and G code is established. Hence, the order in which these codes are specified does not affect the operation.
Compensation
Mode
-x
G U1 CEhTEP .
DIA
3 h -z
b.
center of the c. If the block of the G41 (or G42 through mode G44) condition
block G41 to G 44 which entered the compensation mode first or of the block immediately The offset is made to the after T code. right of tool advancing direction when T + is specified and to the left when T is specified. Sample Program (a) ~ GOO GOO GO1 T+ O1O1 G41 z-18. Mode X30. FO.25 ; Z5. ; [ ;J (A) : Movement at Start of Compen sation ( for GOO)
satisfying
compensation
(2J
,-, 3 U
does not have the move command, the compensation starts and the tool center is moved on the normal. Since G41 (or G42 through G44) involves such a movement, it is necessary to specify GOO or GO1 in th last or current block for the G code of 01 group. Specification of a G code other than GOO, GO1, and Gll will result in alarm 026. EXAMPLE (B) : G41 (or has no move command.
(c)
G42 through
G44)
Compensation
l@ g (3
; . . ; F.. . ;
48
(d) @ @ GOO
GO1
(ii)
; . ;
For an outside corner (tangent-line angle is more than 180) , the movement is controlled. by the following M-code commands: M96 ... Tool radius compensation circular path ON ... Tool radius compensation circular path OFF (execution of intersection calculation)
G03
X..
Z.. .
1..
F..
; M97
m
I
CENTER
G44
M96: Note that the tool center point normal to the start diately after G41 (or G 42 T code, for each of above through (b) . If G41 (or is offset onto the of the block immethrough G44) or examples (a) G42 through G44)
\/\\ m
/ \
., \ .
Circular
Path
Mode
block or the block following T code has no move command, one block ahead is read and the compensation start operation is performed With no move command specion that block. fied, up to two blocks may be programmed However, if three or more consecutively. blocks caused. have no move command, an error is
M97:
Intersection
Computing
Mode
(6)
Movement
in
compensation
mode
Movement of circular path is included in the previous block. Normally, M96 is used for this operation However, when there is a possibility of an overcut in cutting special shapes with the M96, M97 should be used.
When the tool nose radius compensation mode is entered by G 41 (or G 42 through G44) command, the tool center keeps moving along the path which has been offset by the tool nose radius by the program command, until the mode is cancelled by G40 or T l 000 The path is automatically calcucommand. So, only the cut conlated by the control. tour may be specified in the part program. However, the following should be considered for the inter-block movements and special contours: a. (i) Inter-block movement
b, Movement
in GOO mode
The instruction G 00 positions tools independently alc,ng each axis toward the final offset position,. Care should be taken on the cutter path so that tool does not contact the work.
TOOL
MC VEMENT
For an inside corner (tangent-line angle is less than 180) , the intersection point (Intersection is computed and is passed. point computing formula.
GOO G 01
OR
PROGRAMMED COMMAND
Fig.
2.32
v
PASSING POINT INTERSECTION
49
2.8.19
TOOL
d.
no movement
in compen-
(6)
c.
in compensation consideration
mode
(Centd)
in compensation
(i)
to program contour. TT
a wedge-
(a)
M 96
-------
~;;::oo, f i ;l&cJp,4::
NOSE OF GET IN
The control normally reads two blocks ahead during tool radius compensation mode and calculates the tcml path. If either of these blocks gives no coordinate instructions such as G04 (dwell) , the control reads a block further ahead and makes calculations. When coordinate instructions are missing in three or more blocks , tool radius compensation becomes impossible and accurate tool path can Therefore, in a program not be obtained. where G41 to G44 are used ensure that, after them , two or more blocks without movement command in the compensation plane will not follow . GO1 G41 F.. .
IS 4 FAR AWAY
(b)
\l 97 ------i----------L ~ ----. 1 ; j _
M..
Compensation is normally made by the two or less blocks without move command.
Q
1
M40 If
(ii)
Program the tool movement so that the tool nose of 2R diameter can be in the contour, e. Wrong
PROGRAMMED CONTOUR
instruction is programmed no movement in three consecutive blocks , tool center is offset on the normal line at the end point of the block immediate before them.
Use If of dummy blocks to specify a move command
(a)
it is impossible
in three or more consecutive blocks and the offset on the normal line is not satisfactory, a dummy block may be inserted. The dummy block does not cause an actual This block is specified for the movement. purpose of providing the data necessary for the tool nose radius computation. For the address of this dummy command, I and K are used. (b) Correct
PROGRAMMED CONTOUR
I:
X-axis
K :
Z -axis
dummy dummy
command command
(incremental) (incremental)
. .
I and
K should of the
,M96
be
signed
arc.
according
to
the
type
circular
CIRCULAR
PATH MODE)
N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N1O Nll
. .
; K.. . ; Dummy
U.
1
;
Three
blocks or more
block By dummy block N 11, the linear command block of N 10 stops at point A for the following circular movement.
f. Switching
mode
between
T + and
T - in compensation
X. Z. . Ii
z.. ;
11
This coml?ensation provides the switching between T + and T - without canceling the compensation by G40 or T 3P 00 command. EXAMPLE:
%0
IN5
GOO -T+O1O1
; ~
~
THREE BLOCKS OR MORE INCLUDING NO MOVE COMMAND
N6
N7 N8
G41
GO1 x.. .
X.. . Z.. .
X.. ; Z.. . . . Z.. .
;
F..
right-
Namely, specify incremental to K, which are equivalent in N6 for the dummy mand, If the purpose Remarks: is a circular interpolation, linear dummy block that tion of the tangent line the circular command. EXAMPLE N1O IN1l N12 N13 N14 rN15 N164. GO1 GO1
kfxx
commands
N 10 block
I and com-
r:
N9 N1O
x
T-O1O1 X..
F600 7::::~:eft;
; compensation
> F..
(M96
MODE)
of
: Z. 1(-a)
;
F..
; ; I
K(-b)
MOO MM G02 .
; ; X... I Z...
Dummy
block
1...
K...
CENTER
in compenoffset
sation mode code in compensation mode. The originally specified tool offset number remains valid until the compensation mode is cancelled by G40 or T G3 00 command.
-b Nil DUMMY BLOCK (LOQEAR LINE)
It is invalid number by
to newly T
specify
a tool
51
2.8.19
TOOL THROUGH
NOSE
RADIUS (Centd)
COMPENSATION
SINCE THE TOOL POSl TION OFFSET IS CANCELLE2 THE POSITION IS (110 40) FOR THE REFERENCE TOOL \@ c ()[, (;4!
(G40 (6)
G44)
Movement
in compensation
mode
(Centd)
,,7,
However, the tool nose radius value may be changed by varying the offset memory con tents corresponding to the originally speci fied tool offset number, by means of MD I operation. After this modification, the new tool offset number is made valid beginning with the block newly stored in the prefetch buffer.
,, /
---::-----=U
--+---
(b) (T+0202, G41) MOTION ON COMPLETION OF COMPENSATION (GOO)
(7)
How When
to cancel
compensation
mode
@
@ @ @
Z..
F.. ; z40.
a.
G40 or T q~ 00 is specified, compensation mode is cancelled, terminating the tool nose radius compensation operation.
FO.3 x80. ;
I
F6. ; -1
.~i
% *CJ
~-d
~o
T+0200
CLz . g. U G40
I._.
. j---i6iO; ; G40 ;
____ -; --G~Oj-iOlOo ;
TOlOO b.
Upon termination of compensation, the tool center is offset onto the normal line to the end point of the finalblock in compensation mode, or the block immediately before that for which G40 or T 3700 has been specified. (Consequently, if a retracting which results in acuteangle contour is specified in G40 or T 3E 00 block, no uncut portion is produced. ) Then, the tool moves so that the virtual tool nose matches the end point of the move command specified in G40 or T all 00 block.
EXAMPLE
(a)
--+---z
c.
If
the block of G40 (Nose radius compensation cancel) does not have the mov-e com mand, the virtual tool nose moves to the specified end point.
A :
(and T DU 00) commands contain movement. Specify GOO or GO1 in the block previous to or the same as G40. If the G code of 01 group is other than GOO, GO1, or Gil, alarm II027!! will be activated.
G40
21.
1.
(~1 ~ IQ GO1 GOO TO1OO U20. G40 ; FO.25 X11O.
MOTION
TION (GOO) ; Z40. OF
ON
COMPLE-
si? 1
; ~
in
EXAMPLE B: G 40 block
(c)
Notes :
a.
programmed errors
input
(T-0303,
G41)
(i)
an inside programmed
arc arc
@
~
X... G40
Z... F... ; ;
F...
T-0300
62
--. R :> r.. R 7
TOICL
COMPENSATION START BY 2
r~:$.?.L --., ,
r
r<d
is correctly R
-. -
K..
F..
; (ii) When :no intersection point exists on the locus lofthe offset tool center.
T+0400
,--
m
cc ,., .-
NO INTERSECTION
/
\)<
-.
-.
5,2:
, , I ~ TOOL
L_.. -_. i
, /
G44
%
(a)
CENTER
Note that, for each of above examples (a) through (b) , the tool center is temporarily offset onto the normal line to the end point
NO INTERSECTION
&
R,
(b)
The cancel operation provides the movement in which the virtual tool nose matches the last specified position for which tool
position offset has been cancelled. If co-
existence of these operations is not desired, cancel either of them by the use of GAO
command.
53
2.8.19
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G 40 THROUGH G 44) (Centd) (iii) When reversing command or an angle close to reversing command is programmed in M97 (Outside Corner Circular Arc Path Off) mode. (a) Reversing command
Usable G codes
Remarks
G04,
G06,
Gll
Constant surface speed control G 98, G 99 Feed function designation (G90, G 9t) designation Absolute/incremental
G02, G70,
G12, G72,
G22, G73
Command
(b)
Command
close
to reversing
d. The
fied
may
be
speci-
above
shapes
are
e.
When the tool offset mand of 00, T:= ing two meanings : Tool Tool The position nose offset
b.
Interference
(i) ( ii)
is
radius
compensation can be
Interference check error is activated when the difference of moving direction is 90 to 270 between the programmed virtual tool nose and compensated tool When an error is detected, the block prior center, to the block in which overcutting may occur is immediately stopped and an alarm is shown.
following
program
N2 N3
G41 GOO
; T+O1O1 ;
This function does not always prevent over cutting. There might be occasions when overcutting is not detected as an error or normal cutting is detected as an error.
:1 N21 GOO TOlOO ;
TOOL
RADIUS CANCEL
N25
GOO
T-0202
OIRECTION
IS 180C
DIFFERENT
:1
c.
G codes
usable
in
compensation
As a rule G codes other than shown below not be used in the compensation mode.
54
f. Inhibition
(i)
of MDI
mode
i,
(tool arc
nose path
Operation in the MDI mode cannot be performed in the compensation mode. When ,RESET button is depressed, GOO (compensation cancel) becomes effective and the operation in the MD I mode becomes possible. G40 through G44 cannot operation in MDI mode. Command or compensation operation for be written
circular arc distances AX, AZ are smaller than the fixed values, the tool does not follow the corner circular arc path but moves directly to point B . The fixed values are those which are set by parameter #6230.
~z
@X,2 -- \
. TOOL MOVEMEN1
(ii)
by the
g.
canceling
*
PROGRAMMED COMMANO
The following command or operation during tool radius compensation, cancels the compensation completely or temporarily. The command or operation should not be performed:
A/
S NEGNR S NEGNER Constant parameter value for setting
In
case
of
AX/2 AZ
NEGNR:
1. Three
2< MOO or 3.
Temporarily cancelled
EXAMPLE ?41 G50
X140. s1700 G41
A :
z.30. M03 XO ; T+02132 z5. ; ;
N2 N3
COO (cOO)
4.
N4 GO1 20 F0,2 ; 1 Completely can celled, i j rJ5 X20, ; N6 z-20. ; N7 X30, w-15, S11OO ;
5. 6. 7.
off
power
supply
Gll
X50.
K-3,
S700
BEVELING
h. Commands
The for 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. they G28, G50, G74, G90, G31 G68, G122,
causing
CIRCULAR Nll G22 X90. Z-90, R20, s360 ; ARC BY RADIUS N12 GO1 xI1O. S300 ;
N13 N14 G04 (GO1) UO : DWELL
Z-11O. ;
N15 X120, ; G76 G94 TOOL NOSE N16 GOO x140. Z30. T0200 ; ~o~p~Ns*~~oN
COMPLETE N17 G40 ;
BLOCK
,. ~lj :___
=-------------------------------a :O;
CC$,IPENSATION ---ill;-CANCEL - -----__.. T~j:~&~:N->;,@ OF%ET MOTION,,. /. PROGRAMMED CONTOUR COMPENSATION START +X:J I 50. // ~ 3;3 ; II I j ,{ \ j# /, ~~~L CENTER
G123
1109;$
.1 DIA
1 ~ 30.
,! DIA 15.
1
3 fv/M
BEVELING
R3 RI:) UN61NG
20.DIA 20.
b
II N4 5
: 1 It
-z
20.
b
:!0. k
15.
r
20.
K-no.
--90. P-70
55
2.8.19.2
Conditions
Nose
Compensation
(Centd)
Function
(7)
How to cances
compensation
~. T -
mode
becomes effective Automatic nose R compensation the projected tool nose point by four conditions: designation set by the offset number, the radius of tool nose R, the offset side setting by G41 and G42, and the T code command. The following are the details.
.2.1
Designation
of
the
projected
tool
nose
Direction
of
the
projected
tool
nose
point
The shift direction of automatic nose R is prescribed by determining the projected tool nose point position by specifying a numeral of O to 9. The direction is as shown in Fig. 2.34 (X
plus specification) . 2 6
G41 T.
G 42 ~_
4 G -il T:
G42 T,+
@
VI RTIJAL TOOL NOSE
71
I
09
I
Fig. 2.34
L
Projected
8
Tool Nose Direction
(2)
How
to
set
the
tool is set
nose
point the
through
(b)
is decided
Fig. 2.33
All
Round
by setting
Relations for Tool
(b)
between Nose
Radius
Compensation.
projected
tool
nose
point
is
3.
2.8.19.1
Automatic
Nose
R Function
Nose R compensation is performed by the nose R control point (0 to 9) command and G41, G42. The offset side switching from the end face to the outer diameter becomes simple.
When the T command is executed, the selected and the nose R and control point corresponding to the tool is also selected, tool is
Then the tool coordinate system based machine coordinate system is set.
After the T command is given, for nose R compensation is performed control point and G41, G42.
on the
Fig. 2.35 Offset Screen
56
2.8.19.2.2
memory
(1) (a)
Approach
GOO + GO1 or
relief
GO1 + GOO
is
set
through
the
OFS
When the cutting command move axis direction is larger than 45 against the Z-axis vector (wall) (1 X/21 > I ZI ), a projected parallel to the Z-axis is assumed, to calculate the compensation with the cutting move axis. The position. machine moves toward this calculated
(b)
tool
nose
R data
is
O, 8 mm ,
2.8.
19.2.3
G42
command is plus
When the cutting command move axis direction is smaller than 45 against the Z-axis ( lX/21 < = I ZI ) , a projected vector (wall) parallel to the Z- axis is assumed, to calculate the compensation with the cutting move axis. The position. machine moves toward this calculated
2.8.19.2.4
code
command
PROJECTED VECTOR
The T code number ( 4 digits) determines the coordinate system, wear off set, and tool nose R. For details, refer to par. 2,6.5 ! New coordinate system setting function. It
PROJECTED VECTOR
(a)
x
T** -rT
$$
offset
number
(wear (tool
offset) nose R)
SMALLER -z THAN 45
01 to
16/01
to 49
Too,
(tool 01 to
number
coordinate 16/01 memory number)
to 49
Nose
Compensation
and
The automatic nose R compensation function been improved from the nose R compensation function of the conventional YASNAC LX3. 2.8. 19.3.1 compensated. performed.
2.8. 19.3.2
The In
not alone
is
Compensation
is
performed
for
approach GOO + GO1 (G02, G03) by setting a prolected vector (wall) on the tool to prevent excess infeed or shock, as follows. Compensation is performed for relief GO 1 G03) + GOO, by setting a projected vector to prevent insufficient cut, as follows.
(G02. (wall)
57
2. 8.19.3
Offset
Calculation and
of Automatic
Nose
Compensation (Example)
Approach
Relief (Centd)
U7
-7.
ED
,/ /
/ / / / ,/// /,,
,
,, . I
(PARALLEL
WITH
I
PROJECTED
(a)
THAN
PROJECTED VECTOR
(pARALLEL z-AXIS)
PROJECTED vECTO R
(b)
co],
@42)
l/ /
SMALLER THAN 45
GOO(G42:I
(2)
(or
G03)
or
relief
G02
(a)
When the circular cutting command move direction is larger than 45 against the Z-axis, a projected vector (wall) parallel the Zaxis is assumed, to calculate the compensation with the cutting move axis, The position. machine moves toward this
axis to
calculated
(b)
When the circular cutting command move axis direction is smaller than 45 against the Zaxis, a vector (wall) parallel to the Zaxis: is assumed, to calculate the compensation with the cutting move axis, The position. machine moves toward this calculated
58
( Example)
Tool
nose
point
PROJECTED
VECTOR
SMAIIER
THAN
45
PROJECTED
VECTOR ?HAN 45 / /
QQ , G,/
j;/ @/
SMAIIER
59
2. 8.19.3 Offset Calculation of Automatic Nose Compensation Approach and Relief (Centd)
Table 2.20A Automatic
Nose
R Approach
and
Relief
Patterns
LINEAR
\\
i, \ \
C=l
2.8.19.4
Cancel Nose
The
G40
; Command Automatic
Function R Function
is Also
ZIK : command cancel The G40 GOO X function (menti=ned~at=) , ~s well as the same function by the GO I command are available. This commands command, makes a projected wall by the I, in the block before the G40 GO1 to execute the nose R calculation. K
ABSOLUTE ZERO POINT (O, O) d
x .
2
+Z
Notes :
1.
The nose R center is on the normal of the end point in the G40 GOO X Z ; block or G40 single-block. The nose R complete cancel is performed in the block immediately before the G51 singleblock or G28 block, The cross point is calculated in the block immediately before G40 GOO X Z I K ; and the vector indicated by ~, K. r When GO1 and G41 (G42) are commanded at the same time, the nose R center will be on the normal of the start point of the next block . However, in canned cycle, start up can be performed by GO1 G42 of the first block, but cannot be performed by repeating the command later. (2) G50 U.. .
Fig. 2.34
2.
W.. .
; (Incremental
G50 )
3.
When the addresses U and W are specified instead of X and Z, the new absolute coordinate is set up by adding incremental values U (X-axis) and W ( Z-axis) to the absolute coordinate previously set. When the tools the incremental use f ul. groups. are very cliff erent in length, G 50 (addresses U, W) is
4.
The tools should be divided into two Then, the difference between the length of the reference tool and that of the second group of tools can be set at the incremental G 50 command and an absolute coordinate system can be stored. G50 U1OO. W-1OO. ; . . . Setting Position of B
5.
; and G40 GO1 Z I ; are G40 GO1 X K of the sam~command format as th~ ch>mferin g command, but the cancel function has priority only when the G40 command is given.
+x B I H FOSITION OF THE SECONO GROUP
100.
FOSITION TOOL
50 y
/(G50x
2.8.20 (G 50)
PROGRAMMING
Absolute coordinate system should be set before After setting up the absolute move command. all motions can be commanded coordinate system, on the absolute coordinate system.
+------+
Fig. 2.35
(1)
G50
X..
Z..
This command makes the present position of tool tip the absolute coordinates (X, Z) . The values with a sign following the addresses X and Z are the distances between tool tip and the absolute zero point (O, O) to be Therefore, it can be said that G50 set. command specifies the absolute zero point.
61
4.
When
Assume that the tool No. 01 is reference tool, and perform the setting of the following coordinate system for this tool: G50 X80. z62. ;
the power supply is turned on, the preof tool is set to the coordinate sent position Therefore, the absolute coordinate (o, o). system should be set up before operation.
5.
The current position of the tool in G 50 coor dinate system is shown in POSITION ABSOLUTE of current position display. The coordinate system which was set is not affected by reset operation. The cmrdinate system is reset by one of the following operations:
The
6, then , select the tool No. 02 which has the tool position compensation value shown in the figure below and peroform the compensation operation, and the tool No. 02 moves to point A.
N3 N4 G50 GOO x80. TO1O1 z62. ; ;
(ii)
(i)
by ORG
ABSOLUTE)
key
(see
is per-
is written
in MDI
(iii)
7.
turned
on
again.
N1O
GOO
T0202
When setting work coordinate system by G50, Work parameter #6o 18 D7 can select whether System Shift in 2.6.5 will be efCoordinate fective or not.
2.8.21
TOOL NO 02
H+
G50 COMMAND POSITION AT TOOI NO 01
~;
the control
option.
provided
40mm
+------+z
Fig. 2,36
the address S Four digits following the upper limit of spindle speed specifies in rpm. If an S command exceeding the limit is issued in subsequent blocks, the spindle speed is governed at the upper limit,
(2)
If the coordinate system setting is performed tool and tool position com with the reference pensation is applied to the other tool as shown above, the tool movement may be programmed on a single coordinate system for alltool noses.
Notes :
In G 96 (Constant Surface Speed Control) mode, when spindle speed rises up too fast as the current X-coordinate of the tool is too small, the spindle speed is clipped the limit. EXAMPLE
1. When
G50
S2000
X.. S500
Z.. M03
; TO1O1 ;
1.
G code which is valid only G 50 is a nonmodal block. in the specified the other Generally, be G codes, and M, S, and T codes cannot
Maximum spindle speed specified by G50 can be displayed on the CRT display. Refer to 4.3.2.1, Command Data Display. The specified maximum spindle speed is not cleared by reset operation. In case of S 4-digit designation B , unit of Refer to address S is not shown by rpm. machine tool builders manual. For S 2-digit designation, this function cannot be used.
2. 3.
specified in the same block. Note that is a ;or G50 T.. . ; command G50 S.. . separate feature and is not for coordinate system setting.
3.
62
2.8.22
(G 50T, G 51)+
+Z
Ztn I
This feasure is used in combination with 5.2.3, Measured Workpiece Value Direct Input option. Hence itis necessary for the programmer to be familiarwith paragraph 5.2.3. The purpose of this feature is to retain a work coordinate system with a certain point on the work used as absolute zero point by performing G 50T coordinate system setting at the replace ment position of each tool. In other words, programming may be performed with a single coordinate system throughout the entire machining.
Tn
Atn
TOOL SLIDE AT THE POSITION INDICATED BY CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY (0, O) (SEE NOTE 1) Xtn
Zm r -1 Xm (< T, I \ :~g~~ DIRECT COORDINATE SYSTEM SET BY TOR AT WORK MEASURED VALUE INPUTOPERATION +Z % wORKPIECE
(number)
It is necessary, before specifying G 50T, to write the coordinate data for each tool to the tool coordinate memory. For the writMeasured Working procedure, see 5.2.3, pieceValue Direct Input.
The number of available tool coordinate memory units corresponds to the number of tool offset memory combinations as shown below.
Number of Tool Offset Memcxy Combinations %tilable Menwy Tool Coordinate Number
Fig. 2.37
(2)
a.
Work G50
b.
50)
Specifies memory
Using
this
command,
system for each of the following work value: Work coordinate system setting value Content of programmed
Tool Coordinate Memory I Tool No.
c. For ease of use, write the coordinate data for tool No. 01 in tool coordinate memory No. 51, etc. , as shown below:
tool memory
coordinate
[~:~n: 1[ 1
+ Content of programmed tool offset memory offset
1! unit current position value is Note : the one which is shown in POSITION [EXTERNAL] screen of the current position display (POS ) on CRT display.
b. Usually,
number
d.
It
ory
is assumed contains
memdata
EXAMPLE
G50
T51OO
L
;
1100,1 specifies the work
coordinate system setting with the contents of tool offset memory being zero. When the above program is specified with the tool slide at a given position (for example, x, z in the unit current position display) , the work coordinate system defined by the operator is set correctly as shown below :
63
2,8.22
(G50T,
G 51)T
4.
(Centd)
T1 WHEN TOOL SLIDE IS AT A GIVEN POSITION (\, :)
When the G 50 T work coordinate system setting is performed, 2.6.4, Work Coordinate System Shift is made valid. The current position of the tool in the set work coordinate system is shown in the cur rent position value POSITION ABSOLUTE. It is not shown in POSITION EXTERNAL. The work coordinate system set by G 50 T cannot be cancelled by a reset operation. EXAMPLE A : (The start point is current position display (0, 0))
5.
-x
M
z,,
r, / WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM
+--T--;T,
P, -~ . ~
I ,
--i 6.
X,l
N1 G50 T51OO
N2 GOO TO1O1 M03 s1OO ; Selection of tool No. 01 (Note 1). (Machining by tool No. 01)
2.38
Fig.
c.
G50
TOOOO
..z. T5200
..; ;
By this command, the coordinate system is set with the unit current position value. This means that the canceling of the work coordinate system setting is performed with the content of tool coordinate memory = O and the content of tool offset memory = 0 by the specification of TOOOO. (3)
a.
N22
GOO T0202
Positioning to a given point. Work coordinate system setting for tool No. 02. Selection of tool No. 02 (Note 1) .
(Machinig Return to current position origin (G 51) to the the unit N40 G51
by
tool
No.
02)
By G51 ; command, tool is returned point at rapid traverse rate where current X-axis position value and Z-axis. a part program is (O,
O) , on both
Return display
to current (O, O) .
position
b.
With
that
uses
work
coordinate system start point is the (O, O) in principle, command facilitates point (O, O) after c. G51 command a single block
setting, the machining current position value Hence, the use of G51 the return to the start completion of machining. always be specified on
Note 1: The tool position offset in TO1O1 and T0202 commands may be used for the When specified compensation for tool wear. during machining, the tool position offset may also be used for the compensation for taper machining.
should basis.
Notes : 1. G 50 T and G51 are nonmodal G codes which are valid only for the specified blocks. When this function O (G50 off) . is preset used, of set parameter
2.
#6005D5to display is 3.
POS-EXTERNAL
to the
following
wCRK
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
m Consequently, after the execution of this command, the tool offset number is cancelled together with the work coordinate system, setting the tool offset number to 00.
64
Notes : EXAMPLE B:
N1 N2
G50
T51OO
; M03 S1OOO ;
GOO TO1O1
If the machining which was started by the following program is interrupted and the program is restarted without returning the tool to the machining start point, the tool correctly moves to the first approach posi tion. N1
(Machined
by
TO1)
N25
G50 GOO
TOOOO x-50. . . .
G50
T51OO ;
N26
N2 N3 @ N4
GO1O1 G96
position
S150
M03 z2.5
; ;
iN27 N28 G50 GOO T5200 T02020
GOO x20.
PROGRAM STARTED AT THE POSITION OF CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY (20 27 5) AFTER MACHINING INTERRUPTION /
(Machining
by
T 02)
-x
p
(
/1
WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM
.P
T 01
-rO1
40. B
--l
MACHINING CURRENT 10 o)
N48 The by
G51
480.
A APPROACH
POSITION
[20
25)
X z
= (-50. = (-35.
+ 110. +40.
= 60. = 5.
~z
MEMORY
88
This is because N1 G50 T51OO ; command at point B performs coordinate system set ting with the following values to retain the work coordinate system, thus keeping approach position A unchanged: = = 60. 12.5
P+x 110 / F--h. s. 40. 47.5 $
1
= MACHINING START POSITION = CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY (O, 0)
TO
DI.A
30. 2
100D[A
35.
X = (-20. Z = (-27.5)
) + (80. ) + (40. )
Z=i.
I
T
To,[Z
T 01
EXAMPLE
C :
This example shows a program for which the replacement position of each tool is different from each other, and the values for work coordinate system setting .
x
Im. 110.
z
47.5 40.
+r z
\ wORK COORDINATE SYSTEM
x=
60.
DIP,
28.23
AND G67)
Special programs written by the machine builder or user by the use of a group of instructions are memory. These registered in the part program programs can be called by the use of G65 or G66
command These to execute special them . programs are referred to as the
The argument designation: in calling a macro program body from the main program makes it possible to assign the real numbers to the variables in the body. This enables this macro program to run as a series of specific programs that provide tool movements, In this manual, the macro program body is some times referred to as simply, macro. II
macro program body, which can be written and stored in the same format as a subprogram. 2. 8.23.1
Main Program
User
/+09001
Macro
Body
A macro program
following fiv;
#
G65 P9001
(Argument Designation)
r ~ Variable
No.
Type of Call
Code
-. tiemams
/
L
1
( 1)
1 2 3 4 5
Simple call Modal call Call by arbitrary G cede Call by M code Call by T code
YI
M99
Main
Program
Subprogram Simple Call (G65) (argument whose designation) program ; number was
G65 The
P.. . L.. .
macro
program,
specified by p) is called and is executed L times. The default value of L is 1. When the designation of an argument to the macro program is desired, specify it in (argument designation) . I!Argument designation is the assignment of real numbers
used in the to the Ilocal variables For details, see 2.8.23.2, macro program. ARGUMENT DESIGNATION. Modal Call (G66 and P.. . L.. . (argument G67) designation) ;
However.
gram ( 1) (2) allows:
unlike
a subprogram,
a macro
pro-
(2) G66
Use of variables.
Computation between variables or between
constants. (3) Use of al branch. These to provide complicated control commands such as a condition-
This command calls the macro subroutine specified by program number P. Each time a move command is executed, the specified macro is run L times. G67 ; cancels the modal callmode.
features enable the user macro body a generalized program that requires computations and decisions .
This command
(3) Gxx
Macro
Call
by
Arbitary
G Code ;
(5)
Macro
Call
by
Code
(argument
designation)
This provides the command with is equivalent to (argument designation) ; . For Gxx, G65 P... ten G codes of GO1 through G199 excluding those designated by NC maker can be set by parameter. The macro program numbers which correspond to these G codes are as follows:
Z..
Txxxx
With this command, the macro of program num ber 09000 is executed after the move command in the same block is completed.
Transmission of T code and TF signal is not performed. Whether a T code is to be used as a macro call command may be specified by the following parameter : Parameter No.
#6120
program
~. . Sets
number
calls
the
macro
of
calls
the
macro
of
\
#6129 ...
Sets G
program
1 . . . T code
Note : Macro call by arbitrary G code permits Namely, the macro which only sin gle nesting. was called for by using arbitrary G code, M code, or T code does not permit another macro call by arbitrary code.
(4) G.
Macro X.
Call
Z--
by
M Code
hixx;
This command may call macros. In this case, the macro is executed after the move command is completed in that block. MF and M codes are not For Mxx, four M codes may be destransmitted. ignated by parameter excluding MOO, MO1, M02, M30, M90 through M99. which calls the macro of
When a T code is specified as a macro call command, the value designated by T XXXX (up to decimal 4 digits) becomes the argument of common variable #149. NOTE THAT THE ARGUMENT DESIGNATION OTHER THAN THIS IS NOT PERMITTED . When a T code is programmed in a macro subroutine that has been called by an arbitrary G code or by a macro M or T code, it will be processed like a normal T code.
(6)
a.
Multiple
G65 Simple
a subprogram
#6130
program
. . ~ Sets M code
number 09001.
As
another
#6131 . program
calls
the
macro
of
#6132 . . . Sets M code which program number 09003. #6133 ~ .. Sets M code which program number 09004.
calls
the
macro
of
program, a macro program may be called from another macro program. Quadruple nesting is permitted for simple call and modal call combined. Multiple call is disabled for the macro call by arbitrary G code, or M code or T code.
calls
the
macro
of
b, In
Multiple
Call
by
G66 Modal
Call
NOTE DOES
BY M CODE DESIGNATION.
When a macro M code is programmed in a macro subroutine that has been called by an arbitrary G code or by a macro M or T code, it will be processed like a normal M code.
modal call, each time a move command is executed, the designated macro is run. This is also valid for the move command in the macro called by multiple call. The macros are sequentiallyexecuted from the one designated latest.
67
2. 8.23.1
(Centd)
For the address in which no argument need designated , the command may be omitted, Sample Program #1 #2
#24 + #26 + z50.2 ;
be
S ample
Program
1
G66 P9400 ; GOO X1O. ; G66 GOO G67 G67 GOO 09400 ; GOO X40. ; GO(J z50. ;
M99 09500
GOO
++ @ G65 @
Main Program
P91OO
L3
A30
B60
Designation
17
@ 0 Macro
(2) A, K
Argument B, and
Designation and
D 10 sets
+=
; ;
Id
@ o
J
Macro
of I, J, and I, J, and K The relationmust be designated in this order. ships between the argument designation address es and the variables are as shown below . arguments may be designated.
Address of Argument Designation H Variables in
C arguments
-l
User Macro Body #l 72 #3 *4 85 #6 87 *8 ?49 $10 *11 *12 #13 #14 #15 #16 #17 #18 #19 %20 #21 #22 #23 $24 $25 #26 $27 $28 #29 WI #31 #32 K33
is executed in the
2. 8.23.2
Argument Designation
Argument is the real value to be assigned to a variable used in the macro program body. Argument designation, therefore, is the act of assigning real values to variables, Argument designation is of type I and type II, which can be selected as required.
(1)
Argument
Designation
Argument may be designated in any address exThe relationships cept for G, L, N, O,and P. between the argument designation addresses and the variables are as shown below .
Address of Argument Designation A B c D E F H I J K M Q R s T u v w x Y z I Macro Variable in Program Body M #2 #3 $7 :8 #9 #11 #4 ;: $13 Z17 k18 ?19 420 ?!21 #22 #23 #24 #25 #26
The
suffixes
1 through
10 to 1, J, of the
and
K are 1, J,
de-
termined by the order and K combinations. For the address designated, the
designated
be
68
Sample
Program #4 #5 #6 #7 #9
2,8,23,
3 Overview
of Macro
Program
Body
using the
+++++
G65P9005A. .. C.. .C. .. I.. .J..K,..K...K...;
A macro
combination (1)
Variables Local Common System operation Arithmetical Functional variable variable variable (#1 through #33) #549) #5104)
Argument
Designation
Part a.
(3) An
Position
of Decimal
Point
in Argument
b. c. (2) a.
argument may generally be designated with a For the designation withsign and decimal point. out decimal point, the position of decimal point is as shown on the next page.
Metric Input 3 o 4
Inch Input 3 0 6
b.
(3) a.
Control Branch
Commands command (IF < qualification> GO TO n) < qualification> m) a program which and conditional re-
b.
Repeat
command
(WHILE Do
1012
3 (2) o o 4 (3) 0 0
1, J, K, C
M, S, T Q R
3 (2) I
3(2) I
4 (3)
4(3)
u, v, w
x, Y, z
3 (2)
4 (3)
judgements may be written in the general format. Hence, the feature of user macro is to enable the programming of the wide range of NC functions from a simple machining cycle which is rather a subprogram to a special, complicated canned cycle, and the storing of these cycles in the machine. Described below are details of the commands mentioned above.
The value shows the position of decimal point as counted from the least significant digit. The value in parentheses indicates the number of digits that follows decimal point at the time of parameter #6006-D5 = 1.
2. 8.23.4
Variables
(4)
a.
Considerations
in
Argument
Designation
assigning a value to an adInstead of directly dress in a macro program body, the address may be designated by a variable. When this variable is called during execution, the corresponding value is fetched from the variable area to provide the address value. There variable, Each are three types common variable, by of variables: and system number. can be part of local variable.
Argument designation types I and II may be If the same variable has been used concurrently. designated twice, the last one is validated.
is identified
a variable
b.
For
both
types
I and
II,
addresses
I,
J,
and other
To the local variables, real numbers assigned using the argument designation macro call command by G65 or G66.
be designated in this order. The may be designated in any order. argument designation may be part, used
Local
Variables
(#1
through
#33)
G65 and G66 should d. In G65 and G66 blocks, always be specified before each argument desigThis holds true with the macro call by nation. G code.
A local variable is the one that is used for each That is, when the local variable macro locally, is used, the variable area ( #1 through #33) is independently allocated for each macro call, Certain values are stored by argument designation, and the results of operations in macro are retained ,
69
2,8.23.4
Variables (Centd)
Main Program
Single-level Macro
09201 ;
Double-level Macro ~.
09205 ;
#1,
#2,
#3
#i
#2
G65
P9205
#3
o
Argument Designation (2) Common #549) Variables throuth
~
eadlwrite Enabled
\\
#l
=...
ow
Read /write Enabled #l =... area macro Local variable area for duplicate-level macro
Hence, the variables #1, #2, #3, , . . of the same macro assume different values each time it is called. Each local variable is reset for each macro call and is registered by argument designation. The variable not designated becomes blank. Each local variable is set to blank at the time of power-on and reset operations.
a.
are
#100 through
cleared at the
#149: time
operations and are set trols, they are not cleared by reset parameter #6008Dl is set at 1. b. #500 through are not cleared operations. These #549: at the time of
common powe-on
( #100 through
#149,
#500 The common variables are available to the They cannot be user without restrictions. designated by arguments. Indirectly, however, they can be designated as follows:
A common variable may be shared by all macros and through all macros of all nesting levels. That is, the common variable enables a macro to refer to the results obtained by another macro. Common Variable Area
oJIoKIJ\oK
(3)
Single-nest Macro Double-nest Macro Tripple-nest Macro Quadruplenest Macro a. Common variables are divided two types depending on clear into the following conditions: #1015, b. #1115,
Argument
Designation
of
#1
System
Variables
use is unique types of sys-
A system variable is the one whose There are following to the system. tem variables: Interface #1032T output signals input signals
. . . #1000
through
Interface #1132.~
. . . #1 100 through
c,
Tool
offset
amount,
tool
coordinate
data.
YASNAC
and tool wear amount #2051 through #2080, through #2150, #2151 through #2199, #2201 d. e. Alarm Clock message . . . #3001,
#2050, . . . #2001 through #2081 through #2099, #2101 through #2180, #2181 through #2250 . . . #3000
display
#3C102
(printout
jm
Positional
information
. . . #5001
through
#5102 Note: The interface input and a. and b, may not be installed. specifications of the machine output signals Follow the builder. the deof
tool
tails
describe above.
Input
Signals
( #1000 Through
#1015,
of
the
system
variables,
#1000
through #1015, is specified to the right-hand side of an operational expression, the on/off state of each of usermacrodedicated 16-point The relationships between input signals is read, the input signals and the system variables are as shown below.
Each read variable is 1, 0 or O. 0 when the assoor open respectively, ciated contact is closed regardless of the unit system of the machine.
When system variable #l 032 is designated, ii. the input signals (UIO through U115) that consist of 16 points (16 bits) are collectively read as a decimal positive value. #1032 = \5# [1000 + i]
* 2i
mo3
UI 3 23 :1011 Ulll
211
*IOO2 fm)l
UI 2 22 :1010 Ullo 20 u! 1
#looo
UI6
26 #lo14 UI14
214
UI 5
25 #lo13 (JI 13
~13
UI 4 24 #lo12 UI12
212
UIo 23
Sample IF
i =0 Program [#1015 EQ O
GO TO
100;
a branch
Variable Value
Input Signal
Bits 2 through
27 (UIO through U17) are tively read to be stored in common variable as a decimal positive value. Note: System not be placed expressions. variables #1000 to the left-hand through side of
collec#130
#1032 canoperational
71
2.8.23.4
b.
Variables (Centd)
Output Signals (#1100 Through
11.
Interface #1132)*
#1115,
i. When one of system variables #1100 through #1115 is specified to the left-hand side of an operational expression, an on or off signal can be sent to each of the usermacro-dedicated 16Point output signals. The relationships between the output signals and the system variables are as shown below:
#1107 Uo 7 #1106 UO 6 #llo5 Uo 5 #llo4 Uo 4 ZII03 Uo 3 $1102 Uo 2 #llol I #lloo
.,-.,, t . ., . . . ,,----When system variable 7fl15LIS speclllea, Tne output signals (UOO through U015) that consist of 16 points (16 bits) are collectivelyoutput. At this time, the decimal positive value substituted in #1132 is output in the form of binary 16-bit value.
#1132
~ #[1100 i=O
+ i]
* 2i
i~i. With system variables #1100 through #1132, the value sent last is retained. Hence, when one of them is written to the righthand side of an operational expression, its value is read.
Uol
2 20
#1109 U09
i Uoo
27
#1115 UO15 2
26
#1114 UO14
25
%1113 Uo 13
24
#1112 Uo 12
23
~1111 Uoll
22
~#1110~ ~ Uolo
#1108 UO 8
iv. Considerations
When any values other than 1.0 or O. 0 are substituted into one of the system variables, #1 100 through #1115, the values are handled as follows:
15
14
13
12
11
10
29
~ 28
Variable Value 1 o
Blank and any values less than O.5 are assumed to be O. Any values of O.5 and over and other than blank are assumed to be 1,
Sample #llo7 Program = #lo ; (#lo = 1.5)
YASNAC
20 21 G-4
I
o Uoo Uo 1
The output signal of bit 27 (U07) is outputted in the contact (closed) state.
#1132 = (#1132 AND 240) OR (#8 AND 15)
The output signal of bits 24 through 27 (U04 through U07) are outputted without change and the contents of local variable #8 are outputted to the output signals of bits 2 through 23 (UOO through U03) . (Decimal 240 = 11110000 Binary 15 = 00001111)
c. Data,
Tool
Offset Wear
Amount Amount
And
Tool
Coordinate
Tool
#2001 #2101
#2050, #2150,
#2051 #2201
- #2099, - #2250
#2151
#2199,
i,
When
one
of
the
system
variable
#2001 side
b 22 h-t
through #2250 is specified to the right-hand of an operational expression , the tool offset amount, tool coordinate data, and tool wear amount can be read, ii. The numbers below : relationships between the and the system variables tool are offset
as shown
When 1.0 or (). O are substituted in any of #1100 through #1115, the associated output contact is output in the closed or openstate.
72
System
Variable
d.
Alarm
Message
Display to be
#2001
X-axis to
01
to
50
alarmed
system variable #3000 may be the machine in the alarm state. message>);
#2050
= n ( <alarm
I
Tml Nose Radius
#2201
to #2250
I
I
Using this command, specify the alarm message (less than 32 characters) preceded by a 3-digit alarm number n and enclosed with control-in and controlout symbols. The alarm number should
01 to 50
digits this
and
not
be one
used
by
the
maALM
#3000 command
is executed,
System
Variable
or A/B is displayed on the bottom of CRT screen regardless of the mode and function. Its message can be seen by the following operation: Press ALM function number of CRT key. and message screen. and displaved . . on
51 to 80
51 to 80
I
I iii. When one of the above system variables is USERS 550 E: ; tool offset for common number variable 16 for X-axis ?41 16. t ALM MESSAGE MACRO ERROR: specified expression, Sample to the lefthand its value can side of an operational be changed. Programs :A oiRd
#116 = #2016 The contents are substituted #2081 The tool is erased are set. = #24 wear and of
; amount (memory the contents of No. local 81) of X-axis variable #24 When cause
state
Message
Sample #3000
73
2.8.23.4
e.
i.
Variables (Centd)
(#3001 , #3002) variable #3001 or clock can be read. #3002 for clock
Clock
is
When the finish signal is not waited for, the distribution end signal (DEN) is not transmitted. In this case , the FIN is waited for in the block with the check skip cleared. Hence, when the FIN is not waited for, be careful not to specify the next auxiliary function.
System Variable
;3001
Type
Unit
I
At Power-On
Count Condition
+3003 o
I
I
[
!
lClockl
I lms
Z3002
Clock 2
1s
ii.
g.
To preset the clock, system variable put substitute the at the left-hand value side with of
Feed-Hold,
And
Posi-
tioning
Completion
Sample Program
#3001=o; iii. The . . . The clock is preset to value O. 1
When the value listed in the following table is substituted in system variable #3004, feed hold, feedrate override, and positioning completion can be made valid or invalid.
I
Restrictions
accuracy of clock 1 is 8 ms. reached, to O. When and overflow
$3004
Feed Hold Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Valid Invalid + I I I
Feedrate Override Valid Valid Invalid Invalid Valid Valid Invalid Invalid
o
1
21
31 41 51
I I I
The accuracy of clock 2 is 8 ms. When 429496800 sec has been reached, an overflow occurs , setting the clock to O. t Sample Main Program Argument of variable designation #1 Sample for
I
I
I I
61 7
Irival id
Invalid
Program
[~]
o~
09351
G 0(1
-+
I
lJ2
#3002 = O ;
WHILE END [ #3002 1 ; ; LE #1 ] DO1 ;
ii
%~ AKk
THREADCUTTING
M99
I
Macro Block Wait Stop And Auxiliary Control ( #3003) Function
r? / \
C all
-7 ,y
f. Single Completion
When the value listed in the following table is substituted in system variable #3003, the single block switch can be disabled or the next block may be entered without waiting for the checking of the finish signal (FIN) of the auxiliary func tion (MST) .
%Lead
[L
#21: ~ #6: radius #23: Negative value Negative value,
Without
sign, value
value diameter
74
Macro
Program
iii.
The
above
output
is performed
when
system
09093 M93 ;
variable #3100 is executed in It is required, therefore, to the external equipment such RS 232c interface and preset use the interface. Sample #3100=( #3100 #3100 Program ); = (TOOL . . . Carriage OFFSET 01) ;
the macro program. previously attach as a printer via the parameters that
feed
U-#10
#3004
= o ; ; ;
1
(#3100)
;..
. = 10.000
-10.000
mm mm
;. ..= :..
. =0.800mm
Printout I TOOL
Data OFFSET 01 z R
I
Output messages external interface. the above
I
1
UUUU1O. OOOOUUU10. I I
Data
0000 uuuu I
I-10.80000
h.
RS232C
A ~aximum of 6 digits (data plus signs) before the decimal point can be output.
When system variable #3100 is specified, and NC internal data can be output to euuipment via RS232C data input/output is a printer, If- tie external equipment information is printed. i, Output of Messages
i. i.
Modal
Information
#4001 Through
#4120)
#3100 When
When one of system variables #4001 through the modal commands that are #4120 is specified, specified up to the immediately preceding block These modal commands are somecan be known. times called the current values of modal information commands.
enclosed by controlin via RS232C interface. Each (Carriage #3100 which output Return
controlout
System
Variable
Modal
Information
= ( ) is specified, only CR/LF is outputted, is useful in tabulating the punched data. When by the message is output, it controlin and controlout. should be
# 4001
# 4021 ?$4108
code
(group 01 ) \
G code (group 21 ) E code F code Sequence number Program number S code T code
Output = [ i
#3100
specified, the value of the variable, or system varia ble at the right-hand side is output via RS232C interface as plus or minus decimal 9 digits (4 digits after the decimal point, 5 digits before the decimal point) data. Notes: 1. The value is rounded after the decimal point. 2. When the value is of the decimal point, the
#4119 #41 20
information,
out
to the or
fifth more
digit before
The just
of either being
or
F ( #4109) and
# 4108
6 digits asterisk
same
is output.
75
2,8.23.4
Variables
(Centd)
Positional Information X-axis skip signal position (ABSKP) Z-axis skip signal pesiton (ABSKP) X-axis tool offset amount Z-axis tool offset amount X-axis servo position deflection amount Z-axis servo position deflection amount
ii #4001 through #4120 cannot be placed to the left-hand side of the operation expression. Sample Program
#5062
#5081
Enabled
Main Program
$5082
G65 P9602
<Argument
Designation>
T5101 z5102
(Note) Enabled
Macro
Program
~Gcodes(.oothr.u.h
Note: Reading of #5021, #5022, and #5102, performed dingly, when commandd after
z5041,
#5042,
.Y.
.;
I
R...;
G03) of retained.
01 group
ar~
completion
nose
radius
compensation
is not performed.
.F .Z. . ;
. . . ; ..
Mnemonic
ABSIO
ABSMT Command current position (same as Pos. MACHINE display). Machine ccardinate system
ABSOT Command current position (same as Pos. ABSOLUTE display). Work coordinate system
ABSKP Position at which skip signal did not go on in G31 block. Wofk ccordi nate system
].
Positional
Information
( #5001
Through
#5102)
When system variables #5001 through #5102 are specified, various positional information can be
Coordinate System
/
Not included
,
Not included
~ Included
Included
Iv
v
Included
Included
In the macro
feature is
program invalid.
body,
the
input
unit
10
1. When the skip signal is not turneri on in G 31 block, the skip signal position is at the end of G 31 blcck. 2. The input unit x 10 feature is valid up to the macro call
System Variable
Positional Information X-axis block end position (ABSIO) Z-axis block end position (ABSIO) X-axis current position (ABSMT) Z-axis current position (ABSMT) X-axis current position (ABSOT) Z-axis current position (ABSOT)
X5001
115002
3. System variables iz5001 through ~5102 may not be placed to the left-hand side of operational expression.
#5021
(Note) Enabled
$5022
IJ5041
(Note)Enabled
I
z5042
76
Sample
List of Variables
The tool is positioned to the (X, Z) on machine coordinate and the specified M feature, point. Main Program
power-off). $500 to #549 Common variables Dff) rllo~ to #lo15 Interface input signals (each signal for each bit). (retained at power-
G65P9603X.
..z
OM #:.:
zH032
,=0
#[lOCO + i] *
2i )
irlloo to #1115
~ #[1100+ ( ,=~
i] * 2 i
).
09603 #1
K
;
#5001 ;
#2 = #5002
#2151 #2081
G91
; ; ;
Alarm message
+3003
f13004
Feed-hold, exact-stop
feedrate-override, control.
and
RS 232 C data output (print out feature). Current value of modal information command.
$5001
to $5002
85021
to #502Z
#5041
to +5042
UNIVERSAL
+508 1 to 85062
t!5081 to # 5082
~5101 to $5102
77
2. 8.23.4 (4)
Variables
(Centd)
Sample (i) When #l = 45.2346 x#l ... = X45.235 mm (for metric input) in a variable number
(ii) When F#2 ...= #2 = O. 255 FO. 26 (mm/rev)
Variable
Representation
How
to designate a number
,2,3, #lo 4,...)
directly:
(iii) When #3 = 5.37672 G04 P#3 ... = G04 P5, 377 (see)
(iv) When #4 = 2.7236 M#4 . . . M03 GW. 4. the ..GO3 Value for each address maximum programmable value with that follows <expression should value. not exceed
#i(i=l me
#130 #2000
How b. number: to designate an expression as a variable
# [ <expression>]
5. The replaced
an address >.
may
be
&22E&
# [#loo]
# [#500 + 1] # [#2012J
(J. The constant without decimal point enclosed in brackets [ ] is assumed to have a decimal point at its end.
#i may >]. be (6) Undefined Variable
(5)
Variable
a. The replaced
The value of an undefined variable is assumed to be blank. An undefined variable occurs in the following situations:
a. The local variable for which argument designation was not performed in macro call command. b. time Common of variables and #100 through reset operations. #149 at the
When < address> #i or <address> -#i is specified, the value of the variable or its negative value (complement, more exactly) is made the specified value of the address .
poweron
Es!2P.k
; ; ; Z-#102
c. The local variables and common variables for which the values were not written from MDI panel.
F#140
;
to the
is equivalent
x1OO.
FO.3
/ , 0,
and
N may
not
refer
to varia-
/#8,
N#100
number
3. When a variable is used as address values below the least significant digit ed.
Designation and function of <blank> is classified in the following two versions A and B. The Switching from control is set for either version. versions A to B and from B to A cannot be inter changed,
2.8,23.5
Operation
Commands
Version A Version B .#O defined as No conception Concept of #0 of #o. Commanding causes alarm. *O variables of (blank>. Commanding #0 at the lefthand side of the equation. -Where (blank>, means *3 = <blank}. -Where #2 is #2 is com-
Various operations can be performed between variables and between variables and constants . The operation expression is represented in the form of #i = <expression> , in which < expression> is a general arithmetic operational expression produced by combining variables and constants with operators and functions. The available operations and functions are as follows. Instead of fi and #k, constants may be used.
(1)
Variable . . .
Definition definition,
and
Replacement
#i = #j
replacement.
Variable
<blank> in
(2)
Add-Type
#j+#k
Operations
. . .
mand #3 = ?22;
#i.
#i=#j #i=#j #i=#j
. . . . . . #k...
Where #2 is Variable <blank> (blank>, command 600 ~ #2; is equivaler to command G C GOOXO; is commanded in the part prcgram.
(3) #i=#j
Where <blank),
ti2 is
#i=#j #i=#j
<blank>
Note: In OR, XOR , or AND variable value (or constant) the binary 32bit equivalent is performed on each bit.
?3 =F [#o+~o] ?3=R2 *60; Y3=PO+$O; Y3=*OI$O; ?3=5*+O; ?3=2$0; ,!3 =51} <Blank>
I
(4) #i=
Functions SIN [#j] . . . .. . . . [#j/#k] . . . Arctangent Square Absolute Convert Convert Produce root. value. from into BCD. BCD . by fractions rounding. . . Sine Cosine Tangent (in degrees) (in (in degrees) degrees) . . .
#i=cos[fi] #i=
described
TAN[#j]
K
#i
ATAN
Others
#i=
SQRT [~]
[#j]
. . . . . . . ..
when #2 and P3 are <blank>, or #2 is O and $3 is <blank), -Condition IF:3 established (blank>, and *3 = O.
LT fi2 is not
[#j]
. . .
or 72 is (blank),
[#jj .. [#j]
integer the
#i= FUP[#jj
fractions
to a unit.
79
2.8.23.5 (5)
GOO
X#10
Combinations
Usually, ROUND is not used as mentioned it is used as shown below : Sample (b)
above;
The above operations and functions may be used in combinations. A functional operation is performed first. Then, a multiply-type operation is performed. An add-type operation is performed last. S ample #i= #j+ k * SIN ~ @ Y [#L]
When ROUND is used as follows, the program turns to the start point correctly: @ @ @ @ @ #10 = 12.3758 #11 = 13.1236 G()O U#10 GO1 GOO U#l~
U-
re-
; ; :;;;a +x [#lI]] ;
; F.. . ; [#10]
[ROUND
+ ROUND
IJ2._J
(6) Change of Operational Order by [ ]
Priority may be given to an operation by enclosing it in brackets [ ] . Up to quintuple (fivehold) nesting of brackets is permitted including those of functional operations.
This is because the data of #10 and #11 in @ and @ blocks are substantially rounded before being executed. If @ @ block is GOO U- [#10 +#11] is made ; by the following
Sample
*h]
block movement
of
I
I
(7) Considerations for Operational decimal to have a. The constant without <expression > is assumed at its end. b.
rJ#10 + U#ll
Hence,
the program
(8)
Operational
Errors
The data format and the operational errors in the macro programs are as follows:
a.
Data
Format
When used in conditional Expression IF or WHILE, function ROUND truncates the fractions.
The numeric data handled in macro programs of the floating point format.
are
c. When used in address data, function ROUND rounds off the part below the least significant digit. Sample (a)
m
where, M is sign + data 52bit binary, E is sign + data 10-bit binary. b. Operational Errors
#10 = 12.3758 When the least significant digit of address X is O.001 mm, the following command
Goo x means [ROUND [ #lo]];
Each time an operation is performed, the following error is caused and is accumulated. The number of significant digits is 15 to 16, which compensates the error sufficiently.
; 12.3758 is also
is rounded. equivalent to
80
2.8,23.6
Control
Commands which control the flow of the are of the following two types: . . . IF [ f conditional expre-
GE,
Conditional
#i EQ#j #i NE#j
. . . WHILE
[ < conditional
#i GTi!j #i LT#j
#i GE#j #i LE#j
[ < conditional
expression
>] GO TO
n ;
If < conditional expression>of this command is established, a branch is made to the block of sequence number n within the same program. When a variable or an expression is used for n, the branch destination may be changed. If the condition is not satisfied, the program proceeds to the next block.
constant and < expression> may and #j. A variable and <expression used for n.
be
for be
#i
Notes: 1. The sequence number must be located at the head of the block when it is called for by a branch command. Otherwise, the data prior to the sequence number is ignored as shown below:
TO
n;
Branch Destlnatloc
Se~uence
No
~ ,gnored
program forward
takes branch.
(2) IF [< conditional provide a simple expression>] may be omitted to branch command as shown below:
a.
Repeat WHILE
(m = 1,
2 and
END GO TOn;
While blocks When to the
<conditional expression > is satisfied, the between DO m and END m are repeated. it is unsatisfied, block following the END processing in. branches
Nn. .. ;
---- .
TJ
.c m
- WHILE
<Conditional [
DO
1
m;e
expression> ~ ~
2 ~ * :
d m;
END
(Blockfollowing END m)
81
2. 8.23.6
Control
Commands
(Centd)
When the specification is made omitting WHILE L< conditional expression>], the blocks between DO m and END m are repeated infinitely. Generally, this is used in the format shown below .
I DO1; I)ol; D02; D03;
I
IF [< Condlt> onal GO TOn;
expmssmn>] I
D02; D03;
G65.. ABC
END END 3 ; 2 ;
;.
END 1 ;
.; .
Enabled
-Nn.. , 6. The codings shown
Enabled
below cause an error:
(i
Notes: 1. DO m should be specified before END m.
DO1;
?
The returndestination of END 1 isunknown.
2. m of DO m and END m should have the same value. However, only 1, 2, or 3 may be specified in m.
DO1;
DO 1 1
END D02 1~ --l
1
?
J END 1 ;
-J END 1 ; ( iii DO1; DO1; Overlapof DO rangesisnot ? permitted. Rewriteas shown right. D02; END 2 1 ; ENDl; I
D02;
3. The same identification repeatedly except where 4. To get out of a Do number may be used repeat ranges overlap. loop, a GO TO n can enable be
1 1 ; END
: ; L !__
GOTO 100
; DO1; z d .2 Q N1OO
-1 END
2 ;
END 1 ;
82
(iv)
(2)
Classification
of Program
Numbers
numbers
(v)
DO1;
2.8.23,
Variables
Display
and
Write
of
Local
and
Common
~ ; T
END 1 ; I IF.,GO 2. 8.23.7
(1) How
T07000 ;d
enteredfrom I be outside.
Do loopmay not
Local variables (#1 through #33) and common variables (#100 through #149, #500 through #549) can be displayed and written by the following operatio~s:
(1)
Display of
Display
a.
Registration
to Make
of Macro Programs
of Macro Programs
may Registration b. The registration and edit of macro program bodies are performed in the same manner as usual part Hence, there is no programs and subprograms. program size restriction that applies to the user Part programs, subprograms, and macro body. macro programs may be stored together in the part program memory to its full capacity.
and press
cuRsOR I key or ~ ~uR-soR key. However, # 1 need not be keyed in. Ten sets of variable num hers including the specified variable number and their data are displayed. The data are displayed in the signed 8-digit integer part and the 8-digit fraction part. Macro nesting level (0: Macro not ln execUtlOn) MACRO 01234 0035
I SETTING
*LEvEL #oloo 0
#olol
#olo2
#olo9
83
2. 8.23.9
Programs
Considerations
and
Remarks
for
Macro
of Restrictions
be scrolled up or down,
a.
Available Variables
#33 #149 #549 T ~~ ~ Local variables. variables.
#l through
#100 through
Common
variables may
always be displayed
#500 through System
For local variables , those of the macro currently executed are displayed. Consequently, when a macro of a nesting level is in execution, the local variables belonging to macros of the other nesting levels cannot be seen. The local variables after completion of execution are all rest to blank.
(2) Write of Operations Values to Variables Mode select position
b.
b.
Available
Maximum Minimum
c.
value value
Constant
Values
Writing
a.
:(8 digits above decimal point) . decimal points ). Sample Maximum Minimum
(7 digits below
may b.
Press SET function key. be provided anywhere. Key-in the variable number
ress
ever,
# need not be keyed-in. The keyed-in variable number is specified and the cursor is positioned to it. ~. Key-in the value to be written. Press WR key. The keyed-in value is stored as the data of the variable number with the cursor positioned. d. Press key ~w or PAGE ~ n key key or =1 to move the key or
to be
written d. Operational
Quadruple
f. Maximum
(four-hold) .
Nesting Level for of Repeat macro. m Command
each
Repeat
K
(DO)
Identifier
m
in c. and variables. d. to write the h.
1, 2, and
Maximum
Level
of
Brackets
Quintuple Remarks a.
( five-hold)
Common
Local other
between
Macro
Program
and
Sub-
b.
time
a.
Any attempt to do so is invalidated. However, rewriting of local variables during macro execution may cause an unexpected failure. Before attempting the rewriting , stop the machine operation by single stop function and check to see if it is safe to rewrite variables.
not.
The written local variables and common varic. ables #100 through #14$1are reset to Iblankll by the reset operation or the power-on operation .
The macro program directly branches to the macro program body without executing any command that was specified in G65 or G66 block and has no relationship with the macro. With the subprogram, however, a branch is performed after the execution of the command (if any) other than P and L in M98 block.
The maximum nesting level of macro program c. That is quadruple including G65 and G66 calls, of subprograms is also quadruple but separately. If macro programs are specified via MDI d. during automatic operation, the maximum nesting level is restricted to quadruple. With subprograms, up to four levelS of nesting are permitted in tape mode or memory mode, or separately in MDI mode, (3) Relationship with MDI Operation call and the
(6)
Relationship
with
Optional
Block
Skip
The slash / character used in the right-hand side of an operational expression or in brackets is assumed to be the operator for quotient. It does not mean the optional skip. (7) Parameter Setting of Program Number
a. MDI execution
The following setting is permitted to protect the registered user macros and subprograms from inadvertent destruction: Setting Number #6004 D2 =1... The programs of program for numbers registra-
c. When a macro program being stopped by the single block stop MDI writing command not related may be specified and executed. (4) Relationship with Address
#8000 through #8999 are tion, erase, and edit. Search D2 =0... Registration,
disabled
erase,
and
edit
are
The address search function is not permitted to search for the sequence numbers in the macro body. (5) Relationship with Single Block Switch
enabled.
Parameter Number
a. The operational command and control command blocks do not singleblock stop if the This switch single block switch is turned on. is enabled for the other macro program blocks. b. However, when setting number #6004D1 = 1, the single block switch is enabled for the opera tional command and control command. System variable #3003 (for the control of c. single block stop see 2.8.23. 5) and setting #6004 Dl mentioned above operate as shown below:
#9000 through #9999 are tion, erase, and edit. D7 =0.. . Registration,
disabled
erase,
and
edit
are
enabled.
(8) a.
Effects A reset
of
Reset
operation
(#l through #33) and part of common ( #100 through #149) to blank.
4 I T
Dl=l Dl=l
None of the operational commands, control commands, and general commands stoD, Operational commands and
b, A reset operation resets the user-macro multiple call state and the multiple DO loop state, making the program pointer return to the program head.
=Oor2
None of the operational command, control commands, and general commands stop. All of the operational =Oor2 commands, control commands, and general commands stop.
85
2.8. 23.9
Programs
Considerations
(Centd)
and Remarks
for
Macro
2. the Body
When the codes shown NC unit for punch-out (UC) or before, lower
below are output from or other purposes, the code (LC) is output
(9)
Special
Codes
Usable
in
Macro
Program
(1) The special codes listed below may be used in the user macro body :
by LC
UC
. ~ ~ #, . . . @.
+,
$,
?.
C. Codes designation
by UC only , *, =.
at parameter
Outline
of
User
Macro
External
Output
The following macro commands addition to the standard user (1) (2) (3)
Open command (POPEN) Data output command (BPRNT Close command (PCLOS)
or
DPRNT)
The above commands are used to output and characters via external devices with RS-232C interface.
variables the
2.8.23 (1)
.9.2 Open
of
Each
Command
(Format)
-RS-232C (Function)
Notes :
1. For the hole pattern of EIA code, when the character is attached with an asterisk, the pat tern shown above is standard. However, other patterns may be specified by using the following pzirameters: #6110 #6111 #6112 #6113 .. [
The DC2 control code is output from Give this command the NC side. before the sequential data output The RS232C number can commands.
be specified as 1 or 2. The default is the 1st RS-232C. (Example) POPEN POPEN ; ..... Opens the 1st RS-232C. [2] ; ,... Opens the 2nd RS-232C. (BPRNT or DPRNT)
(2)
(a)
. . . J . . *
(Format)
. . . = 1
BPRNT [a $b
#6114 #6115
.. ...
(1 )J
[cl.,..]; L
Effective digits below
Read the desired hole pattern in the binary value, convert it into the decimal equivalent, and set it to the parameter. For examfile, the hole pattern shown below is set as 152 :
L;::: ~Character
pon
When the value of the parameter is O, the hole pattern listed in the above table is provided.
86
(Functions) 1 The commanded characters are directly output in 1S0 code, . Alphabets (A to Z) . Numerals . Special characters (*, /, +, -) However, * is output by Can be output. the space code. The value of the variables is regarded as 2word data (32 bits) considering the digits below the decimal point, and is output from the higher order bytes, directly as binary data. The effective digits after the decimal point are commanded in parentheses after the variable command. 3 After outputting the command code is output in ISO code. data, the EOB
The variable values are output from the higher order digit, digit-by-digit, for as many digits as commanded. The decimal point is also output in 1S0 code. The variable value is output by commanding the variable number after l#il . Then the digits before the decimal point, and the digits after the decimal point are each commanded in parentheses. Assume that the variables have a maximum of 8 digits. When the higher order digit is O, the output follows parameter #6016D7. [Parameter #6016D7 = 0: #6016D7 = 1: Output space code. No output. :
(Example)
BPRNT [C ** X #100 [3] Y #101 [3] M #10 [01; When the variables are; #100 = 0.40956 #101 = -1638.4 #10 = 12.34 it is output as;
When the digits after the decimal point of the commanded variable is other than O, as many digits after the decimal point as commanded, digits after are output. When the commanded the decimal point is O, no decimal point is output . When the sign is positive, the output of the space code follows parameter #6016D7. [Parameter #6016D7 = O: #6016D7 = 1: Output space code. No output. ] data, the EOB
C3
AO AO D8
01 9A
59
FF
E7
Cl) 00
4D
OC
OA
(Hexadecimal)
After outputting the command code is o~tput in ISO code. DPRNT (Example) When; Variable value
~~~T~~o~
~12
And; When
Space Space
parameter
#6016D7 = O
AO c
AO
AO
61
B2
B8
2E
B4
37
B4
I
(b) DPRNT DPRWT [ a (Format) #b[c
TTT
I
~
~ L
d].. ]
128.474 -x
Digits after
point
decimal
~;-2
D4 AO B2 33 OA
(Functions)
1
The commanded characters are directly output command. in 1S0 code, as in the (i) BPRNT
87
2, 8. 23.9
Programs
Considerations
(Centd)
and
Remarks
for
Macro
(2)
The output data output command can be stopped by resetting the command. All later data will also be erased. Therefore, if reset is commanded by M30 , etc. At the end of the output program, it necessary to give the close command at the wait until all the data end of the program, are output, and then command M30, etc.
When
parameter
#6016D7 = 1
is
~:
(3)
option
is
p. 8.23.
I(I
Alarm
Number
Of
Macro
programs
~;
alarms
???
htAc Ro
ERROR
(CONSTANT)
L
(3) Close (Format)
I
command
~EOB -23 T
The number of constants is in excess of the specified range. 106 MACRO There ERROR G67 cancel codes.
(FoRMAT)
PCLOS
107
MACRo
(Function)
The DC4 control code is output from the NC side. This is commanded after all the data output command is given. The RS-232C number is given in the same manner as the (1) POPEN command. PCLOS; .... Closes the 1st RS-232C.
has an
error. 108
The ber MACRO ERROR (UNDEFIN #NO) num-
as a variable
(Example)
109
2.8,23 .9.3 Function (1) When
ERROR
(#NO
NOT
LEFT)
Setting Necessary
when
Using
This
outputting data by the BPRNT, DPRNT command, set #6022D3 = O (no parity bit upon ISO tape output) . If #6022D3 = 1, the data cannot be output correctly.
110
The the
MACRO
ERROR
( [
5 LIMIT) is in excess of
level
(2)
When outputting data by the DPRNT command, set whether the leading zero is to be output by spaces. #6016D7 = O: Output space as leading zero when outputting data by the DPRNT command. No leading zero is output.
111
MACRO
ERROR
(MOVE
112
MACRO
ERROR
The open command (POPEN) and close command (PCLOS) do not need to be commanded in sequence. Once the open command is given, there is no need to give another open command until the close command is given.
113
88
114 DO
MACRO and
(DO
FORMAT)
T :
END
paired.
Type I for small number of variables. This type allows the use of U , W and F and therefore makes the argument designation easier to understand.
115 The
MACRO format
ERROR of
([
] UNMATCH)
S:
<expression > has an error.
116 DO
MACRO m is not
ERROR in the
(DO range
- END of
NO.
) 3.
1 Sms
117
T:
118 MACRO GO TO 9999. ERROR (GO TO N) of O Sn L S:
m3)
Right, former OK. (P4) Using these variables program (P 2) . , rewrite the ~ ~ GOO U#21 G32 w#23 GOO U-#21 GOO w-#23 this ; F#9 ; ; ; ~ ~ Is all right? add this body. and we have a complete Yes. user Just macro Thats easy.
n is not
in the
range
2.8.23.11
(1) T Canned (Teacher)
Exercises Cycle :
of by
Macro G92
pro9rams
We have ed rules
write user macros. Now, lets create some user macros as exercises. Lets take straight threadcutting cycle by G92, because it is a simple operation. S (Student) T: : Where shall we start?
T:
~ An example of usual following format: G 92 command takes (Pi) T: G92 u-50. w-60. F6. O : the s:
Then, using G65, create this macro call and the macro program body in the complete formats. Let me try it.
Supposing the body is 09093; be: program No. of macro program the macro call command will
This command is divided into the following It is and executed within the NC unit. assumed that Rapid Pull Out of Threading is not included i; this command. (P2) (?J Q__ m I ~ @
L
s:
(P5)
G65
GOO U50. GOO w60. ; ;
P9093
macro
u-5o.
program
w-6o.
body
F6. O ;
is: (P6)
l&1
(Z
-z
The
Fir st, these moving distances and lead threads can allbe converted into variables.
09093
; ; F#9 ;
S : They are local variable #1 through #33, arent they ? But which type of local varia ble ?
89
2.8.23.11
T:
Exercises
of Macro
Programs
(Centd)
T :
Very
good.
**********
to program Rapid threading
s:
I think something is wrong. With this program, I have to specify points W and F every time ! Thats true. With a usual canned cycle, when points W and F have been specified once, their values are retained. Thereafter, only U is specified. Do you have any trick to overcome convenience ? this in
T:
OK.
How about designating the width of rapid threading pullout using address K ? AH right. Lets see . .. . .
T:
s:
s:
T:
common variables I do. In such a case, Using common variables, (#100 - #549) help. write points the macro to designate W and F. got it! Now, I divide the position of
s:
Ive
the
macro
M99 ; (P9)
Macro 09093 ; ; F#lOl ; ; ; 09000 #100 #lol #102 M99 ; ; = #23 ; = #9 ; = ABS [ #61; body is as follows:
and
I write
the
macro
call
as follows: (Plo)
09093
; [ #1021 *2 ; ; [#102] ;
#10 = ROUND #11 = ROUND G65 P9000 G65 P9093 G65 P9093 G65 P9093 G65 P9093 w-60. u-50. u-51.4 u-52.6 U. . . ; F6. O ; ; ; ; #12 = ROUND GOOO U#21 ;
[ #211 + #10
[ #1001 + ROUND
90
T:
your reasoning is right. Practically, Yes. vou had better prevent a malfunction by invalid control of single ~rogramming #3i03: invalid control of feedhold. block or #3004: This threadcutting can be performed in Uand W-directions only. Now wed like to expand this function in four directions.
buffering
#10] Tel;
?-??_-Q
II - --%w ,,
~-__---#+
Negative
UL---J
s: Let me think. I see. --- How about the next program ?
[#21]
-#n
;U:
Positive
#12 = -#lo N2 IF
[#102] #13] 3 ; 4;
; GO TO 4 ;
IF [#100 IF [ #loo
+ #13
;W:
Negative
L----------G 00
U, K:
K:
Designation Designation
?)
#15 = #13
Error
display
command
is as follows:
G65 P9000
K4. O F5.0
I I
; -~
= o ; ; ;
GOO U-#11
body
is as follows:
09000
#3003 M99
Well.
If
Uor
W=
O,andl
U/210rl
W I<K,
91
2.8.24
h. The operational direction after X-axis tool position compensation is inverted. i. T command for tool nose radius compensa tion tool nose center is inverted in the sign. ~. G command for tool nose radius compensation virtual tool nose position is inverted.
Program
mirror image is the feature to reverse the NC program operation in all directions around the work center line (Z-axis) by the use of G command. G68; . . . Program mirror image on. The program mirror image on state is held until G 69 is speci fied. - Program mirror image off. The program mirror image off state is held until G68 is speci fied.
(1)
G69;
?rogrammeo !00 rad]us com~en sation Tool center ,, .,,, T-, ..,.. Wrtual 1001 r ose G 41
TOOL TOGL
NOS?
.
NOSE COm PellSatlOfl T. and tool center G44 when PROGRAM m,rr Or Image fumt,o m 0. OOL CENTER . P
When program mirror image is on, the Xaxis operation by the NC program IS inverted with Z-axis being the center line. The manual operations (manual continuous feed and handle /step feed) are not affected by this feature. (2)
When the PROGRAM mirror image feature is on, the movement by the NC program is inverted with Z-axis being the center line. The following inversion is processed in the NC unit:
a. X command inverted. for X-axis coordinate value is
b.
U command for X-axis value is inverted. I command arc center Circular for x -axis is inverted. motion direction
incremental
coordinate
c.
coordinate
value
of
d.
inverted.
{ G 02.
ARC
CHANGED TO G 03
CIRCULAR ARC ROTATIONAL OIRECTION OF ROTATION WITH PROGRAM MIRROR IMAGE FEATURE ON
Fig. 2.39 e.
I
f.
I command for canned distance is inverted. U and finishing I commands allowance, for
!3.
special are
canned inverted.
cycles
etc.
92
(3) a.
Cautions
for
G68 and
G69 commands G commands They must basis, image reset which be speci-
Power +
on
G68 and G69 are modal belong to 10 group. fied on a single block
Manual
+
Program execution
b.
G69 (program mirror the time of power-on, program reset. These commands tool nose radius state. These commands finishing shape cycle.
c.
NOOO1 G50 x240. N0002 NO003 X40. G68 ; U480. z80. : u480. z40. ; Z120.
Z220. TO1O1
240.000
1 u-144.000
d.
in the canned
; 96.000 -96.000
; Tllll ;
+384. 000 +144.000 -144.000 336.000 TO1O1 ;176.000 u-160.000 u240. 000
e.
If automatic origin return G28 X. . . Z. . . ; is specified when the Xaxis mirror image of the interfeature is on, the positioning mediate point specified in X and Z is affect ed by the mirror image, but the machine origin, which is an absolute position, is not affected by this feature.
NOO08 x120.
+x
G28 X...:...:
/ / /
,----\ / 7
\___ --PROGRAMMED iNTERMEDIATE POINT
x
ABSOLUTE ZERO POINT OFFSET 01 X56. 28
t
220 F
TURRET
u
EXAMPLE :
T 01
+Z Fig. 2.41
Described below is a sample program which uses G68 and G69 for the opposed tool rest shown in the diagram on the following page, and the X-axis movements. B
OFFSET TURRET 11 X64 Z 8.
93
2.8.25
MULTIPLE
REPETITIVE
CYCLES (G 70 TO G 76)+
(3)
The ing
for
storing
the
finish-
2, 8. 25.1
General
This option makes program simple and short. For instance, both stock removal and finishing are performed only by commanding the finish ing work shape.
Multiple Repetitive
To shorten the stock removal cycle compu t ation time, the finishing shape program is binary-converted and then is stored in the memory for storing finished shape program (one pair) in the unit. This memory is called the internal memory for finishing shape program, which differs from the part program memory. In the block after G 76, the G codes specified again. group G codes may have been the cycle of G70 through of 01 group should be This is because the 01before the cycle to other G codes
G 70
G71 G 72 G 73
specified changed
G74
-=c!=minxais .: ::=::discOmRnsatiOn
G 76 ]
Automatic threadcutting
(6)
Tool nose radius compensation cannot be performed on the cycle of G14 through G76, Any attempt to do so will result in an error.
(1)
G70 through modal. The program by G71, G72 The memory is 45 blocks.
G76
are
in
group
and
non-
(2)
finishing
Program
of
finishing
shape
S 45 blocks
~ J
When cornering (Gil, G12) and Note: multiple cornering (Gill, G112) are used, each block containing them must be counted as the value listed below.
No. of blocks
One blwk
or G12
including
G 11
G 111
Five blocks
2.8, 25.2
Stock
Removal
in Turning
(G71) allowG71. between caved monotonous increase shaped path. /decrease and con-
in turning with the finishing uncut can be commanded by finished contour are different increase /decrease finishing
ns:
Sequence Sequence
G71
Pns
I--nf
T_TT__l==_
Depth of cut (designation Rough finishing
Feedrate and spindle-speed designation for stock removal in turning in X-axis direction without signs) in Zaxis direction
Nns
. . . .. . .. . .
; .
allowance in
. . F . . . . . s . . . . . . . . Nnf . . . . .
; ; Rough (radius
I
X-axis
direction
Finishing direction
allowance of Z-axis
of Note: Feed command F(E) and spindIe command (S) are given for executing
Finishing shape program (45 blocks maximum) A+ A+B Tool path: Sequence number should start with ns and end with nf. F and S commands are effective only when G 70 finishing cycle is executed. x
+x
E&x
L-, \
~\ \* -1 ~_ ! !~I ING AL I*
------1 NE-t-H-H
+Z Fig. 2.42
FINISHING ALLOWANCE
~ Q
stock removal cycle.
(Retrac:ng) / 4
3;
!-4
+2
Fig.
2.43
G 71 starts at point A, executes rough finish cycle () and the rough finishing to point A to be cycle (--) , and returns terminated. In the case of I = O and K = O (or no designation) , the rough finishing cycle is omitted.
Retracting is performed by rapid traverse Thrust motion depends on the speed GOO. (GOO or AA. GO1) specified by the program of
Each depth of cut D along X-axis can be overrided by 10% step within the range of O to 200%, by G711G72 cut depth over ride selection or setting . See item (3) , g.
95
2,8.25.2 Notes : 1.
Stock
Removal
in Turning
(G 71) (Centd)
Note 1: Specifies the feed command (F(E)) and spindle command (S ) for the execution of stock removal cycle.
Note 2: concaved specified. Computes finishing the cutting path for the shape program if R 1 is
FCSIT:CNI Shl FTED FRC~J POINT ABYu2-
The tool path of finishing shape should be programmed to be monotonous increase or decrease in X and Z coordinates.
The following should be taken into consideration in programming the start block ( Nns) and the end block (Nnf) of a finishing shape program.
2.
IRelr,]ct r \--+ B \ \ \ \\ \ w%. i -x \ \ \ L . 21 FINISHING SHAPE ,,/ / :p<~ pg~:;c, ,.~ ----j---+~j-, /
.GI
, .1 :/
1)
X ;pxq:,
MONOTONOUS INCREASE
MONOTONOUS INCREASE
id !
-+---
- ________ _ t1.--l
11
.4~
A Nns AA IS N ~A;&LEL Speclf!ed :$:& WITH I
12&5iil
g. b. Cautions gram (i) finishing format
ns: Sequence number farcyclestart
G71 starts at point A, executes the rough and the rough finishing cutting cycle ( ) to point A to be cycle (---) , and returns if I is not specified, the rough terminated. finishing cycle is skipped. lletracti~g is per forrn~d by rapid traverse Thrust motion depends on the speed GOO.
( GOO or GO1) specified by the program of Each depth of cut D along X-axis AA. can be overrided by 10% step within the range of O to 200%, by G71/G72 cut depth See item (3) override selection or setting.
for
concaved
finishing
shape
pro-
(2) a.
Concaved Command
contour
COMMAND POINT Cf FINALBL02K Cf FINISHING SHAPEPRffiRAM
START POINT
J
G71 PAS
~
CJf u:.
.,:
..
F(E) Note 1
S... R1
;
A COMMAND PO(NT OF 1ST BLIXK OF FINISHINGSHAPE PRCGRAM
~ Nns.. , F.
s. .. ..
Note 2
; ;
;
lTI
...,,,
Nnf . . . . . .. . .
,~ ;J I_
Rough
Since cutting starts with the concave nearest the start point, the cutting path is interrupted if it hits the convex be The concave is cut to yond the concave. Then, the its bottom. turns to the interrupted cutting beyond it. cutting cycle repoint to perform
(iii)
Any contour having an overhang does not allow cutting. Hence, the Z-axis specification value of the finishing shape program should be a monotonous variation.
(iv)
The termination block for the finishing shape program has the following limitations:
(ii)
For
a simple concave, only one interrupted However, for a complex point is provided. concave containing a smaller concave and a convex as shown below, the cutting path interrupted first at the larger convex is
For the G command ; ) , specify (Nnf. . . pal. (v) The cYcle retracting may be
of
after
each
approach
setting.
SETTING
)T
.-----
CUTTING 1 \
PATH
cONcAvE \
UA
/
(vi) Each block of the finishing shape program should be of monotonous increase or monotonous decrease. A circular arc which extends over two or more quadrants must be divided into two blocks before being programmed. Generally, Zaxis finishing allowances W and K are not specified. Otherwise, a bite is caused into the wall of the corresponding side. If R 1 is not specified, the conventional monotonous increase /monotonous de crease stock removal cycle is provided. Approach is performed at the feedrate. [t is not affected by the G code of the finishing shape program. Hence, depending on the finishing shape program, positioning may be performed by rapid traverse after the approach at feedrate.
A A
CONCAVE
The maximum number of interrupted points that, allows cutting is three, beyond which cutting is disabled, causing 097 error. Within this limitation, any number of concaves is allowed. (vii)
DISCONTINUATION 1 ,
(viii)
DISCONTINU-vA ATION 4
Sample
Contour
Not Allowing
Cutting
:ing
APPROACH
d
97
2. 8.25.2 (3)
a.
Stock
Removal
in Turning G71
(G 71) (Centd)
Rules
in programming
Addresses U , W, I and K must be programIf a wrong sign is promed with signs. grammed, the workpiece may be gouged. An address D for depth of cut must be programmed without signs . Finishing shape program must be programmed immediately after the block containing G71. Even a block between them is ignored. When F and S codes are not specified in the block containing G 71, F and S codes specified in the preceding block are effective for G71 mode. F and S codes specified in the program of finishing shape become effective only for G 70 mode and are disregarded in G71 mode. The following should be taken into consideration in programming the start block ( Nns ) and the end block (Nnf) of a finishing shape program.
f. The above rules and cautions in programming G71 also apply to G72 cycle. In other words, the G72 cycle is the same as G71 except that cutting is made in parallel with X-axis.
g.
Cut
depth
override
of
G71 and
G72
b.
Ten percent step override may be applied, within the range of O to 200%, to the depth of cut D of each time in the following two manners: (i) By setting with #6004D3 5-bit code. through ) D7.
(Set
(ii)
c.
By G71/G72 cut depth override switchEither of the above methods ing. shown in (i) or (ii) may be selected by parameter #6023D2.
Parameter
Function
d.
Usable G code
Remarks
Gill
G112
e.
When a program has entered the tool nose the G 71 radius compensation mode before
is tive commanded, for the the G71 compensation is effec cycle. is executed but in the not rough
finishing cycle. Thus, the compensation is ineffective for the program in which the rough finishing cycle is omitted. (I = O, K = O)
EXAMPLE
A:
Tool
finishing shape
applied to
+x 1
!
------. i
.-
D -- (260 220. )
J-u
100. DIA
60. DIA
m-~mm)
k.
(L+qi
!
30.
---
40.
DIA.
-+
-0.5
mm 0)
O.,rnm (})
1-
40.
10.
20.
,.
N1
G50
x260.
Z220.
; TO1O1 ;
N2
N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N1O Nll N12 N13 N14 N15
F
1
Stock
removal
in turning
WO.5 ; . ; ;
K2. traverse
D4.
FO.3 \
s800
shape
W-10.
S200
; /
Z220.
TO1OO
99
-x
CENTER I
~.
1P
1 ./( 6(
1
25 R
1
15. i ~ >Ji .
\
120 L)IA
I
5.15 I 20. I 1
wI
ii
10. 1
\~/
t
10, I
20.
IT
%A
:0 \ 1 50, !
I
z
I
+2
NO1
G50
x260.
z70. M03
;
;
TO1O1 ; ~ Stock S250 RI removal ; in facing
N02
N03
GOO S500
x124. Z-10.
,
N04 N05 N06 N07 N08 N09 N1O Nll N12 N13 N14 G71 GO1 x80. W-10. x 110. ; X90. w-20. w-5. w-5. ; ; ; / 270. TO1OO ; W-20. 125. 115. ; K-20. ; P5 Q14 ; FO.1 S500 ; U2. D6. FO.2
Finishing shape I
z70. ; ;
Executes
above.
100
2.8,25.3
Stock
Removal
in
Facing (G72)
G 71 is for cutting in parallel with Z axis and G72 is for cutting in parallel with X axis.
This
cycle
in
finishing remaining
provides facing
(1) a. G72
increase format
ldecrease
finishing
shape
Qnf
Ut...
Wf...
If.
. .
Kf,
..
D..
F(E)
. . .
S..
Nns
. . . . . . . .. . . . . ...< F s .
T Depth of cut in Z axis direction (without signs) of each address as that of G71 command. (45 B blocks maximum)
. .. . . . . . . . . . . .
.........
Nnf . . . . . . . ..
;
; J Finishing shape program Tool path: A + A +
+x {
l-%
Retracting is performed by rapid traverse Thrust motion depends on the speed GOO. ( GOO or GOl) specified by the program of AA. Each depth of cut D along Z-axis can be overrided by 10% step within the range of O to 200%, by G71/G72 cut depth over ride selection or setting .
b. Rules
shape
and
cautions
in programming
finish
G72 is the same as G71 cuts into the workpiece Refer to 2.8.25.2 axis. Turning.
tool Z in
_ -----
Flmshlng shape prograrr Stock removai cycle Siart and ftnlsh at PosIton A
Fig. 2.44
starts at point A executes cycle and rough finishing to A when completed. K = O (or
stock cycle,
rere
In case of I = O and
the rough finishing
no designation)
,
Nns ~~~ AA IS IN PARALLEL WITH Z AXIS Nnt ~~~ BA IS IN PARALLEL X AXIS 1 Speclfled ,n GOO or G 01 mode
cycle
is omitted.
Fig.
2.46
Fln!shng
Stock removal
Fig. 2.45
101
2.8.25.3 (2)
Stock Removal in Facing (G 72) (Centd) finishing shape ns: Cycle start sequence Cycle finish sequence Kf. .. D.. . number number S.. . R1. .. ;
Concaved
r Pns
Qnf
nf:
W~...
F(E) ...
~T
cutting path is comIf R1 is specified, Note 1: puted for the- concaved finishing shape program.
b.
Cautions gram
of
concaved
finishing
shape
pro-
_----
G 72 only performs the operations which are The same cautions as parallel to Z axis. with G71 are applied to G72 except that the retracting amount of G72 may be set by setting #6203.
(3)
for
cautions
to G72.
RETRACT MOTION FINISH ALLOWANCE
EXAMPLE
In
case is not
of I
= K = O, tool
nose
radius
compensation
ROUGH CUTTING ALLOWANCE
applied. i
mm (1))
x
-x L.: \ ~. 4 -z L1l-1 ~M K R D I ,
I
+
t-l
m
160.
LMA
G 72 starts
at point
A , performs
stock
re
moval cycle (- ) and rough finishing cycle (---), and returns to point A when comIf K is not specified, rough finishpleted.
ing cycle is skipped. Retracting is perI I 1 I -,.
formed by rapid traverse rate depends on the speed specified by the program E-ach depth-of overrided by O to 200%, by selection or
cut D along X-axis 10% step within the G71/G72 cut depth setting.
102
N1
G50
X260.
z60.
N2 N3
N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N1O Nll
Z5.
011
;
uO.6 FO.15 ; ; WO.5
IO
KO
D4.0
FO.3 at feed
s200
. . .. .
Cutting
x80.
Z-20. X40. Z5. ;
Z-40.
; ZO
S400
I I
I
Finishing shape program
S800
J
z60.
;
Ul>o
Executes
finishing
cycle
$li7?sl.%
A x
+Z WORK SHAPE OR G71 AND FINISHING ALLOWANCE x-
,-
%2
A
U,l <o WK<O U,l <0 w,K>O
In
Fig. 2.47
Relation between
Finishing
Shape Program and Signs of Addresses U, W, I and K A wrong workpiece sign will cause a grouging as shown below . of the
2.8.2.5.4
Pattern
Repeating
(G 73)
This cycle is useful for cutting the workpiece such as moldings and forgings whose cutting shapes are roughly made beforehand. (1) Command
G73
W*. ..
If.
. .
K+. . .
D.. .
s.. . ;
Nns
. . . . . . . . . . . .
l-I
I
allowance
in Z-axis
direction
Finishingshape pro~ram (45 blocks maximum) Tool pat;: A- A-+ B (See Fig. Sequence number should startwith ns and end with nf. F and S commands are effective only when G70 finishing cycle is executed. Note: Feed command (F(E)) and spindle speed command(S) are given for executing closed loop cutting cycle.
-x
K
(Retractlnal t--i c
(2) a.
Rules
in programming I and
r B ?
b.
THRUST MOTION
Address D for number of cuttings programmed without signs, obeying lowing restriction.
must the
be fol-
FINISHING ALLOWANCE
u ( -1 2
t#& I
Flnlshlng shape Pattern repeating program cycle
D command 72
out
of
the
above
range
causes
data error. (Alarm code 096) When D is 1, the cutting of I and K values is completed in a single cycle remaining finishing allowance.
c.
should be programmed imthe block containing G73. and cycle end (Nnf) block of must be programmed not be parallel a
Fig. 2.48
d.
need
with
e.
Finishing shape program does not be repetitive monotonous increase crease in X or Z coordinate.
need to or de-
EXAMPLE Incase AI = ~
Notes :
=0.001mm
1.
When F(E) and S functions are not specified in the block containing G73, the F (E) and S functions specified in the preceding blocks are effective in the pattern repeating cycle. F (E) and S functions specified in the program of finishing work shape are effective in finishing cycle G 70 and ignored in pattern repeating cycle. Table below shows the G codes which can be specified in the program excluding the blocks of Nns and Nnf.
AK
=+=
0.001mm
Therefore, the cutting allowance of each cycle is as follows. 1st to 6th cycle . AI .AK 7th cycle ...... AI =LK (6) When the program =0.001mm .O.004mm
2.
Usable G codes GO1, G06, G02, G 03, G 22, G 23 Gil, Gill GI12 G12
Remarks
EXAMPLE
L/
20.)
3.
When I and K are O or not designated, it causes input error. (Alarm code 096 is displayed. ) A I and A K (rough cutting allowance per
+Z
4.
AI=~
Note
that
the
control
ignores
the
value
below 0.001 millimeter. program should be made are not smaller of 1 than AI
s400
O. 001 millimeter. AK
and
Finishingshape program
I = 0.005
mm,
K = 0.005
mm,
0.005 6 0.005 6
x260. z220. ;
*1
105
2.8.25.5
Finishing
Cycle (G 70)
G73, the commands
a,
Mode ; Stock removal in turning Finishing shape program (A) (25 blocks maximum)
After rough cutting of G71, G72 and finishing cutting can be made by the
Pns
Qnf
T nf:
for
:sNnf. ..
L
I
;J
Qnf. . . ; Pns Pns Qnf . . . ; . . . ; L
ns:
for G70
This command permits the execution of the finishing shape program in G71, G72 or Gi3 which is commanded previously.
F(E) and ing shape ing cycle. S functions specified program are effective in the finishin the finish-
G72
Nns
F(E) and S functions for rough cutting specified in the block containing G71, G72 or G73 are ignored in the finishing cycle.
Nnf ... .
After
J
the above program the pro-
executing
The internal memory for storing the finishing shape program: To shorten the stock removal cycle time, the finishing shape program is binary-converted and then is stored in the memory (one) pair) in the unit. This memory is called the internaf memory for finishing shape program.
(2) G70 does not need to be commanded immediately after the block of G71, G72 or G73. Necessary information such as tool change from a rough cutting cutter to a finishing cutter can be inserted between them.
Note :
gram (A) is eliminated and the program (B) is retained in the finishing shape memory. Therefore, the finishing command with G 70 in the trailing program is effective for the finishing shape program (B) . If the sequence number specified by G 70 does not match the sequence number in the memory for finishing shape program , an error (091 ) is caused. b. Operation in memory (MEM) mode
and operaHowever, the following command tion should not be programmed between them .
] Result
When the sequence number specified by G 70 matches the sequence number in the memory of finishing shape program, the finishing cycle is normdl y executed. If they do not match, a search for the specified finishing shape program from the part programs is performed. Then, the program is stored in the memory and is executed. This is called the finishing shape program search feature. This feature enables , only in memory mode, the programming in which the stock removal cycle (or closed loop cutting cycle) is per formed two or more times as shown below and then the finishing cycle is performed for each stock removal cycle :
Stock
(3)
Storage program
and
search
of
the
finishing
shape removal + removal *cycle 4 cycle cycle cycle (A) (B) (A) (B)
The processing of the finishing shape gram is different in tape operation mode and memory operation mode.
proStock
Finishing Finishing
Supplement: (i) The ture use of the finishing the cycle shape time shape program as follows: program search fea-
(ii)
This
search
feature
is executed program
only
in the
increases of
number
finishing
machining
tape
is
For the sequence number ns for cycle start and nf for cycle finish, the following case causes input error.
When the sequence numbers ns and nf of G70 are not commanded in the finishing shape program (Tape operation) When the sequence number ns of G70 is commanded in advance of sequence number ns, or ns = nf.
long and the finishing is stored in the middle cycle time is about
100 msec.
. Example of the execution time for storing the searched finishing shape program in internal memory: When the size of the finishing shape prothe execution time is gram is 30 blocks, about 1 sec. However, the storing of the searched program in internal memory is performed in the block which precedes the block of G70 command. Hence, the cycle time is increased by the amount obtained by subtracting the execution time of the preceding block from the above time (about 1 see) .
2.
has entered the tool nose mode before G 70 is com is effective for
compensation
2.8.25.6
Peck
Drilling
in Z-axis
This command permits the operation ing with pecking motion in parallel (1) Command G74 format z(w) ~~~~~ f...
X(U)*
1..
K..
D..
F(E)
.. . $eedrate
(Rl) N~tel
1
Depth Move Z coordinate X coordinate of position amount of in C of position B
Retracting amount of the tool cutting bottom (without signs) in Zaxis direction direction (without (without
at the
cut X-axis
signs)
signs)
R -x i F ~.
(Sett!ng t6204)
The cycle starts and finishes at position A. The fixed amount of pecking is set by the parameter No. 74.
is of the cause Note 1: The above diagram R1 is not specified. When R1 is where specified, the retracting amount ( 6 ) for each approach is ignored and the tool returns to the approach start point, namely point A in Z-axis. This cycle starts at point A and ends at it.
m:
+------z
Fig. 2.49
107
2.8.25.6
Notes : 1.
Peck
Drilling
in Z-axis
(G 74)
(Centd)
8.
The tive
is ineffec-
K and
D must
be
programmed
2.
When the command of I >lU/21 is issued, the cycle finishes after the finish of the pecking motion from position B following the pecking motion from position A. When the command of K > I W I is issued, the cutting is made at once to the cutting bottom without the pecking motion. When D is programmed as O or D is not programmed, the retracting motion is not made at the cutting bottom. The final cutting K and the final tion I are amount in the Z direction move amount in the X direccalculated.
+x
3.
-h: -=53
1
15
80. DIA
4.
40. DIA -z
5.
automatically
50. 6.
If X(U) , I or D is omitted, only one-cycle of Z-axis, operation which is is made used for in the direction drilling.
120.
7.
When the contents of setting #6204 are set to O, the cutting is made at once to the cutting bottom without pecking motion.
2. 8.25.7 (1)
Grooving
in X-Axis
a.
G 75
x(
+...
Z(!A
TT~te=
Retracting cutt!ng amount bottom of the tool signs) at the (without Move amount jn Z-axis d(rection (wtthout signs) wttmg
(without s(gns)
of posit{on
108
EXAMPLE
.. +x
B -F .- R
N2
R F 8 Rapid traverse Speclfled F code Retracing amount (Setttn G# 6205) by
h?
N1
GOO G75
Fig. 2.50 The above diagram is of the case Note 1: where R 1 is not specified. When R1 is specified, the retracting amount ( 6 ) for each approach is ignored and the tool re turns to the approach start point, namely point A in X-axis. This cycle starts at point A and ends at it. Notes : G74 permits the cutting in the direction of Z-axis, and G75 in the direction of Xthe cautions in programming axis. Therefore, G75 is the same as those of G74. Refer to 2.8. 25.6 Peck Drilling in Z-axis (G74) .
+2
Threading
Cycle
Command X(1
format Z(w
t _.. .
*... .
It.
. .
K..
D..
F(E)
. . .
A..
T T T =-First Height of
Lead
of
thread
depth
of
cut
(without signs)
signs)
thread
(without
Distance ( radius
of tapered designation)
section
Z coordinate of position C
X coordinate of position C
109
2 8.25.8
The sign of figure following the address I is decided by the direction of position B viewed from position C .
Fig. 2.53
(3)
,Z
Rapid threading pull-out If Rapid threading pull-out input (CD Z ) is on when G76 is specified, Rapid threading pull-out is performed. (y) may be set to parameter #6080, in the range of O to 25. 5L and in increments of O. lL , where L is the lead of the specified thread.
Fig.
2.51
The
The
following shows
poin~ B (In starts G76 cycle
Notes : 1.
around
The depth of cut D in the first cycle is restricted by height of thread K as follows.
,
----CYCLE 2ND CYCLE 3RD CYCLE NTH CYCLE
When taper threading is commanded with an effective angle, except O, X coordinate of threading start position does not extend to the depth of cut.
Fig. 2.52
~.
441
THREADING L). ,q:~ .-. -.. _ THRE4DING START POSITION
as the
3.
If the thread angle other than the above listed (0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80) is arbitrarily commanded, the next larger angle is selected.
Cutting in final cycle is made with the depth of fixed amount a, which is set by the setting #6206.
(2)
Straight thread When the address I is O or not designated, a straight thread is cut as shown below.
110
4.
When the depth of cut in the final cycle along the thread angle ( = D ) is not met with (K - a), the difference between K and a is deThe depth of cut in first ducted from D. cycle never becomes larger than D.
5.
Thread
N,.,
D K
a
When this option is used, depressing the FEED HOLD during thread cutting causes the tool to perform threading up immediately and then return to start point A. When parameter #6019D7 K 1, the tool stops at position B where Rapid threading pull-out is terminated. Then, the tool returns to point A upon depression of CYCLE START .
.-.
--.-
B DIFFERENCE
EXAMPLE Incaseof a (Fixed D =5. amount) = fix = H Omm, K =9.8 = 0.2 mm 5.000 D mm,
r
-D
= 10.000mm (K - a) - 0.200)
1
First Second Third Fifth
Difference
o
~------k_ l~zR HOLD
START POINT
i,,
=EED HOLD
in each
during thread cutting does not hold the operation, which stops at point C where retracting operation is completed.
0.400 (4) Tool nose radius compensation available for G 76. t is not
cycle
5.000-0.400 mm (5)
= 6.671 cycle . . .
G code of 01 group must be newly programmed in the next block of G76 cycle. EXAMPLE
= 9.600
; ;
9.600
111
2.8.25,
Single
block
operation
EXA.MPLE
. Executing switch ON
X66. x56.2 . . .
Z115. Z30.
r- -~
-x
t
1 I
G 76
I <
64. im~
(a)
56. 2 1)1.1
Symmetrical
.2
pattern
The symmetrical four patterns can be commanded by each of G71 to G76. Signs of U, W and I should be properly specified in the finishing shape program for G71 to (See Fig. 2.8.25.33) G73.
Command position of (X, Z) or (U, W) spect to position A should be properly ed for G74 to G76. with respecifi-
60
(b)
/
a
~ 390 +x ~, ~--,]
u-, w-. 1
Depth of cut for a (fixed amount) 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th cycle cycle cycle cycle cycle
mm mm mm mm
LJ+, W-.1I
L,w , I+ -z
Though D20(I (2.0 mm) is programmed, the actual depth of cut becomes 1.7 mm by the calculation of = D because of the dif ference between ~= D and (K - a) .
Fig. 2.54
Four patierns
of G 76
2. 8.25.9
Precautions in Programming
G 70 through
G 76
Prohibition
of
. Operation in MD I mode cannot be made multiple repetitive cycles ( G70 through are executed. . Multiple repetitive cannot be writtenin MDI mode.
112
Table 2.22
Cutting Cycle
Command Format
c
n~ 1 -l L-\\, > l-G 71 Stock Removal in Turning
TAPE COMMAND N(ns) N(ni)
- ---
___
A 3
(1) Monotonous increase/decrease path G71Pns Qnf U... W.. . 1.. . K.. . F(E). . . S.. . ; Nns. . . 1
D.
-1 F 112
1 ~
I
Nnf. ; I
1...
D...
F(E)...
s.. . F/J;
Nns. . . ; Finishing shape program Nnf. . . ;.
t-%
A (1) Monotonous G72Pns F(E)... Nns. . .
TAPE COMM I u ~
increaseldecrease W.. . ;
Nnf.
program
\\
2. 8.25.9
through
Precautions
G 76 (Centd)
in Programming
G 70
Table
2.22
Multiple
Repetitive
Cycles
(Centd)
Cutting Cycle
Command Format
Kl\ ._ <
I -
W,,
1.
K.. .
D.. .
G 73
Pattern Repeating
I
~ Firwshing shape program
Nnf.
.
G 70 Pns Qnf ;
G 73
Peck Drilling in Z-axis
:;: I
IL. . K.. .
x(u). . .
z(w)
F(E), . . ~;
D.. .
(t) R 1 not specified: The operation shown left is performed (2) R 1 specified: Retracting amount (6) is Ignored and the tool for each approach
returns to the !evel of point A every time. G 75 Grooving in X-ais (1, D, K must be programmed without signs.)
G76
X(U)... A.. .
Z(W).. . ;
1.. .
K., .
D.. .
=--
.4
2,8.25.10
Improved
Multiple
Repetitive
Cycle Function
also be against
(1)
G74 executes
by the following of (Upgrade
in
Fig.
1,118,
2.8.25 .10.1 Nose R compensation can executed in the finishing form program G70 to G73 cycles.
the
Par. _K_D_A_
(l).
G74x(u) _z(w)_l . This adds G41 and G42 to the G codes that can be specified in the blocks of the finishing form Nose program (except for the Nsf. Nnf blocks).
F(E) _(Rl);
-
R compensation is enabled by the G41 or G42 command blocks in the rough finishing cycle and finishing cycle. When commanding G41/G42 in the starting block of the finishing form program, also command the GOO or GO1 move command. Commanding in a single block is prohibited. . Upgrade of Itparo 2 .8.25.2 (notes uPOn commanding
. Upgrade (5) . Upgrade (2) of
IL
L
I nfeed Clearance (without Z-axis direction (without sign) X -axis direction (without sign) C ooint Z-axis (with sign)
Feed ~orn~and
Tool width
(without steps sign) sign)
(without
move
(4), (5)
and remarks)
(notes
coordinate
of
Par.
2.8.25.5
(notes
and
remarks)
coordinate
STEPS
2.8.25
.10.2
The
code
command
can
also
be
NT
executed against the G70 to G73 cycles in the finishing form program.
the F, S, T codes commanded This enables finishing form program (G70) and disables during outer form rough cutting, . Upgrade the G71 . Upgrade (1) of l~par. command) of 2. 8.25.2 (3) (notes and remarks) (nOteS Upon in the them giving
WIDTH
Mparm 2 .8.25.4
A finishing form program in which and end point differ can also be against the G70 to G72 cycles.
+2
2 .8.25.2 (notes n he . Upgrade of !tpar. (BA does finishing form program) (1) . need to be parallel with the Z-axis. ) . Upgrade finishing parallel of Mpar - 2 .8.25.3 (BA form) (2). with the X-axis. ) (notes does on not he need
not
(2)
G75 executes a cycle as shown by the following command. (Upgrade of Par. 2.8.25.7 (l).
in
Fig,
1.119,
) F(E) _(Rl);
to be G75X(U)_Z(W)_.1
_K_D_A_ B_ l--rl
2.8. 25.10.4 When both rough and K are omitted against the finishing margin U and W can rough finishing margin. Upgrading D1 = 1. is enabled by related
parameter
#6009
2.8. 25.10.5 The A command (infeed steps) and the B command (cutting tool width) are added to the G74 (end face cutting cycle) and the G75 (outer diameter cutting cycle) functions to allow execution of the groove machining canned cycle.
c point
Z-axis direction (without sign) X-axis direction (without sign) B point Z-axis (with sign) X-axis
r
L
L Clearance (without coordinate
Feed command
move
coordinate
(with
sign)
115
2.8.25.10 Function
Improved (Centd)
Multiple
Repetitive
Cycle
(d)
TOOL R ; I A
When A is commanded, the return amount is the #6208 setting amount (G74) or #6209 setting amount (G75) , If the contents are lfo It, no pecking is performed. (Addition to Par. 2.8.25.6 96 occurs f B (tool Notes when width) and the . remarks) command .) is groove
(e)
+
Alarm width
-r 1
~t
n L I
T
1
I
1
;TEPS
2,8.26
CANNED
CYCLES
Y
II -+ -/---
the
following
three
canned
cycles
I
I
2,8.26.1 (1)
Turning
Cycle turning
---
!
-
x +Z
Straight G90
i
of the improvement cycle functions of
X( U)... ~ this
the
to ~ shown command.
below
(b)
This improvement expands the maximum storage of the finishing form program to 39 blocks . (Improvement of Par. 2.8.25.1 (general) (2).)
made to Par. 2.5
~
Fig. 2.55 Since G 90 is modal,
the cycle operation will cut
(2)
Notes on G741G75
improvement
(a)
be continued by specifying the depth of in the X axis direction in the following blocks as follows. x(u) x(u) EXAMPLE . . . . . . : x94. X80, : z62. W-42. ; FO.3 ; ; ;
(b)
When B alone is commanded, tool width is performed at the beginning and end G741G75. Details are as follows.
(i)
The first movement is the shift for the tool width, from the positioning location of the block immediately before G741G75 to the Xaxis command direction (G74) or Z-axis command direction (G75 ) . The final movement is positioning location of before G741G75 to the and then to return to block immediately before When A alone is to positioning from the the block immediately tool-width shift position the position of the G74/ G75. only groove
N1O
Nll N12
GOO
G90 X70.
(ii)
N13 N14
x6o.
; ;
II
cut changed .
GOO. ..
(c)
commanded,
116
+x
2. 90. U 1A 40.
60.
1)1.A 1 1
(2)
Taper
cutting
cycle
G90
X( U)...
~ by
z(w)
to this
...
I. .
F(E).
below is
~ shown command.
. .
. I
1>
The sign of figure following the address I is decided by the direction of position A viewed from position B.
Fig. 2.56 EXAMPLE N20 GOO : X87. z72. ;
~ N25 -x GOO. . . ;
Lw
30. _ -------
+J
1
8(1. D[.A
7(], DIA
1(1.
40
2.
5(I 1)1.4
87 DIA tz
117
2.8.26.1 (3) a.
Rapid threading pull-out : If rapid threading pull-out input (CDZ ) is on when G92 is specified, rapid threading pullout is performed. Rapid threading pull-out value (Y) of O may be set to parameter ##6080, in the range
to 25. 5L and in increments of 0. lL , where L is the lead of the specified thread. Generally, it is convenient to create and use the sequence in which rapid threading puil-out (CDZ ) is turned on/off through the use of a given .M code.
Cautions
for G90 cycle must be T, S and M functions specified as a rule beforehand in the preceding blocks. T, S and M blocks without move commands are effective in the effective area of G90.
.. ;
I..
.I.
. . F(E)
. . . ;
h
Effective area of G90
; M05 ; E
G90X.
..
I..
.I.
F(E). .
EXAMPLE: N30 N31 GOO x80. G92 x66.4 z76.2M. z25.4 F6. ;--M ; out .,: ON Rapid pull-
threading
N32 x65.
N33 I N34 x63.8 x62.64
;
; ;
I
I I
Threading
cycle four cutting times
effective area of G91) is from the block containing G 90 to the one before the block in which the other G code of 01 group is specified. This rule also applies to the G 92 and G94 described later. b. In Single
cycle ~to@. Block mode, the execution of G90 stops after the completion of the cycle
The
~_..
T_ -
5.
- ---V
k 7Z
Depth of cut
II
2.8.26.2 (1)
Threading
Cycle
(G 92)
I
Straight G92 threading Z(W). cycle . F(E) . . . ;
X( U)...
18rnm
07mnOfinm 058mnl
! designation below
(L)
is ex
25.4
76 2
to ~! shown command.
/
I
Fojrlh
z
. ~ ---
START POSITION
Hapd traverse
1-
.~
Fig. 2.57
118
(2)
thread
cutting z(w). .
cycle K
with F(E)
angle -- ;
EXAMPLE
T
command permits the thread cutting ~ the angle of thread . The cycle shown below is executed.
I
I 70. 111A
76
!2
T
DIA
F code
(or E code)
=
I K1 = -1.8 = -2.5 = -3.1x = -3.68 GOO G92 x65. x63.8 x62.64 GOO K2 K3 K4 N40 N41
-+?-
Calculation of K. .. x 0.57735
x 0.57735 0.57735
= d.tan(60/2) = -0.866
= -1.443 =-1. mm mm
Fig. 2.58
The sign of figure following decided by the direction of ed from position A.
ANGLE a
address position
K is A view
790mm mm
= -2.125 MOO ;
OF THREAD
K- O.87
F6.
-----
Y .A
/(!
1,10
First cycle Second 1 cycle +/ K k ~ ~ .4~/
f:~
-; 1>
1, ,, DEPTH OF CUT
z1OO.
MAA
CYce
(3)
IK,, I= dn~n(;)
Taper
threading
cycle
-1+@
a
K,
G92
X(U)-
Z(w)
1..
F(E) below
. . .
Fig. 2.59 For the threading along the angle of thread, the K for each cycle obtained from the above formula should be programmed.
shown
is exe
+ .x
~
1 & ~
290
30
I
I
0.267949 0.520567
0577350
0.839100
550
60 60
+Z
I
I
!-L--3+
L
Fig. 2.60 Details of Rapid TPfeadlng Pull-out
119
2.8.26.2
The sign of figure following address I is de tided by the direction of position A viewed from position B . Since G92 is modal, the cycle operation is continued by specifying threading depth in the X-axis direction in the trailing blocks as follows.
x(u) x(u) EXAMPLE N50 GOO . . . . . . : X80. Z80.8 MOO ; ; ;
{f I-7
OF
-+
Fig. 2.62
w-50.8
1-1.5
F2.
Z1OO.
MAA
For the threading along the angle of thread, the K for each cycle obtained from the following formula should be programmed. 1 I dn. tan(a/2) IKn{ = It ~ .tan(a/2) The sign in the denominator depends on 0 :
m,
:: \
@711 -r
et < 900
e! > 900
~
~
11+11
II _ 1!
EAD20
!15 tz Depth of Cut ::::
Note : For the control equipped with Multiple Repetitive Cycle~, the above troublesome calculation can be omitted by using G76 (Automatic Thread Cutting Cycle) . The control performs the above calculation automatically by the G 76 command.
(5) a.
(4) Taper along threading the angle cycle with angle (Cutting of thread) Z(W) . . . 1.. . K.. . F(E) ...;
Cautions T, S and
G92
X( U)...
specified as a rule beforehand in the precedT, S and M blocks without move ing blocks. commands are effective in the effective area of G92.
This command permits the threading along the angle of thread in taper threading. The figure following the address K must be programmed with a sign.
b.
ln Single Block mode, the execution of G92 cycle is stopped after the completion of the cycle @ to @ .
c.
.x
1 ,
Thread
w
c --. ___ ,...
Rapid traverse Specfed by F code (or E code)
g . J I
2
When this option is used, depressing the FEED HOLD during thread cutting causes the tool to perform threading up immediately and then return to start point A. When parameter #6019D7 = 1, the tool stops at position B where threading up terminated. Depressing the CYCLE START at start point A or B restarts the current processing from the beginning.
THREADCUTTING CYCLE PATH WITHOUT HOLD
tz
SWT
POINT
Fig. 2.61
FEED HCLC
Fig. 2.63
120
If the
lected, thread which
threadcutting hold option is not sedepressing of the FEED HOLD during cutting does not hold the operation, stops at point C where the retracting is completed. in Multi G92 comcan be
(2)
Taper G94
facing X( U)...
operation d.
is exe-
Six angles of thread can be used ple Repetitive cycle G76. In the mand, arbitrary angles of thread performed for threading.
Q1
,+
When
G92
(threading
cycle)
is
used
with
Rapid traVerSe
2,8,26,3
(1)
Straight G94
X(U).
F(E).
to
;
@ is
Fig. 2.65 The sign is decided of figure by the following direction the address K of position A
A
u 2
f?
A 3) -.
EXAMPLE
START POINT A __: Rap]a traverse : Spec!fled by F code
: X74.
X20. ; ; ; Three by cycles
l!a ;g, I , ~ B
N70
N71 N72
+2
GOO
G94 z25. Z20.
z32.
Z30.
;
K-5.29 FO.3 ;
r-l
I
N73 N74
Fig. 2, 64
GOO. . .
G94 command
Since G94 is modal, the cycle operation will be continued by specifying depth of cut in the Z-axis direction in the following blocks as follows.
7.
x
2.
z(w) z(w)
EXAMPLE N60 GOO
... ...
: x65.
; ;
Z42.
; I
+2
c;:::es
N64 GOO. . . -x ; -z
(3) a.
Cautions
in programming
G94
T, S and M functions for G 94 cycle must be specified as a rule beforehand in the preceding blocks. T, S and M blocks without move commands are effective in the effective area of G94.
Block mode, the execution of G94 b. In Single CYC~ is stopped after the completion of :3 to &l .
121
2. 8.26.3
(Centd )
Table 2.23
Code Straight Cycle
Canned Cycles
Taper Cycle
G90
X(U)...
Z(W)..
F(E). . .
G90
X(U)...
Z(W).
..
1.. .
F(E). . .
/
R
R , F R( ! ~,~
G 90
Turning Cycle
11F z w
u/2
~!
x
a 1 x
.G92 X( U)...
Z(W)... F(E) ; G92 X( U)... z(w)
.,.
F(E). . .
F
G 92
Threading Cycle
u,/2
1G94 Z(W).
THREAD PuLLOUT 7
l-Z(W). ..
THREAD PULLOUT
..
F(E). . .
G94
X(U)...
K...
F(E),.,
G 94
Facing Cycle
122
2.8.27 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL (G96, G 97)+ This feature may be installed when specificationoption is selected. The following G codes are used: the S4 digit
Before the block of G96 command, the spindle maximum RPM should be specified by G !50. This specificationprevents the spindle RPM from getting abnormally high by the computation of surface speed when the X-axis
current EXAMPLE value : is smaller.
G 96
N1O
Nll N12
G50
MAA G96
S2000
; s150
Specified limit of
G97
the
Cancels
M03
time
of
power-on,
G97
(cancel)
is FI ro
(2)
are modal G codes which belong to 02
;
directly specify the
Constant
surface
speed
control
(G96)
Using
this
G96
Using speed
S.. .
(M03)
this command, specify the surface of the work in a numeral of up to unit of the
spindle RPM in a numeral of up to 4 digits The constant surface after address S. speed control is cancelled and the usual spindle feature of S 4digit specification is resumed.
(3)
a.
Cautions How
for
constant
surface system
speed (See
control Note)
Unit i
to set
coordinate
+=+-=
When the surface speed is specified, the equipment assumes the X-axis current value (Note 1) to be the diameter of the work and computes the spindle RPM every 100 msec so that the specified surface speed is ob tained. The computation result is sent as the analog voltage output or the binary 12bit signal output. In the subsequent blocks, the surface speed may be varied by S speci fication. b. For
a machine tool that allows spindle gear change, instruct the M code for gear change specification before the block of G96 com For details, refer to the instruction mand. manual for that machine tool. EXAMPLE N8 MAA : (ii) ; M code for spindle gear change ( gear No. 4 is specified) M03 ; ratio .
When performing the constant surface speed control, make programming by setting G50 coordinate system or G 58 work coordinate system so that X-axis coordinate value of the spindle rotational center become O. In other words, the coordinate system should be set such that its X-axis coordinate value correctly represents the diameter of the work at its machining point.
b. How
to handle
tool
position
offset
amount
(i) When
per formi~g the constant surface speed control, parameter #6020D 1 is generally set to O. This enables the control to perform the computation for constant surface speed control without adding the tool position offset amount to the specified coordinate value. If a large value is used for the offset amount, the tool position offset is normally executed and, at the same time, the constant surface speed control is correctly performed. When #6020Dl is set to 1, the value
N9
G96
S1OO
(Specified coordinate value + tool position offset amount) is assumed to be the work diameter to compute the constant surface speed. Hence , care should be taken not to use a large value for the offset amount by performing coordinate system setting for each tool and using the tool position offset for tool wear compensation.
123
00/
/ /
END SPEED
and #6020D7 are independent from each other. position obtained by adding the tool position offset amount and the tool nose radius compensation amount is shown in the current position display POSITION ABSOLUTE.
#6020D7 = o #6020D7 = l . . . The position the tool position by not adding amount is shown in the current display POSITION ABSOLUTE. . . . The
Note:
#6020DI
AT START OF GOO
O@-/
.4 ~ x,
Fig. 2.67 EXAMPLE: N4 G50 S1500 ; s150 M03 25. ; ; ; ; 7 #6020 ;+ = O Upper limit of spindle s~eed clam~ (in r/rnin) . M code for gear change
1 .,.
obtained
offset position
Thus , the switching of the computation for constant surface speed control and the switching of the computation for cur rent position display on CRT are performed separately.
c.
N7 GOO X40.
N8 GO1 20 FO.15 The spindle gear may be changed in the for maximum of 4 steps . The parameters the gear change are as shown below. For details, see the Parameter List.
COMMAND 10 h SPINDLE TO MOTOR 4 T 4
I
t
2-30. ; X120. ;
W-20.
R20.
J
Cancel of constant ;
OR
4095
; -~
L
+x
DIA
+Z
20.10. 30
AND
FEED/REVOLUTION
These G codes are used to switch between the designation of feed per minute and the designation of feed per revolution, before specifying F(E) code (feed) command.
Fig. 2.66
d.
When parameter #6020D0 = 1, the constant surface speed control is performed on all positioning blocks ( GOO, G06) also. For positioning , however, the constant surface speed is computed for the end coordinate of the positioning block. The constant surface speed is at every moment computed for only the cutting block . Jvhen #D6020D0 = O, the constant surface speed control is performed only on the cut ting block and the positioning block immediately before it. For the positioning block, the constant surface speed is computed for its end coordinate.
(1)
G98
G 98
eiCd- -
Inch input
124
(2)
G99 By
b. T designation for tool lifecontrol For the T designation in the part program, the special T designation for tool lifecon trol must be used. c. Input/output signals for tool life control.
after basis.
is executed
on a feed
revolution
. Tool =
Notes :
replacement
replacement input.
1.
2.
G 98 and G99 are modal G codes, which valid until the designation is changed.
When switching between G 98 and G99 is performed, F (E) code designated before is canSo, it must be designated again. celled. an error is caused at the next Otherwise, cutting block.
The above inputs are provided to implement the highly efficienttool lifecontrol feature. The following describe these three steps in detail: (2) Registration of tool information The part program for tool information
3.
The initial G code at power-on may be switched between G98 and G99 by the use of the following parameter:
a.
registration
1
G code for tool information registration start Command for group number and life Address P : Tool group number [ Address L: Life per tool
This feature allows a long, unattended operation by replacing the tools each time the designated number of pieces or the designated use hour is reached. (1) The tool lifecontrol consists of the following three steps:
G123 ; 1
The tool numbers of the group designated by address P, and offset memory number :~1 : Tool number (1 to 50) _:: Compensation memory [ number (1 to 50)
a. Registration of tool information (i) Registration of tool group number. The tool numbers of the tools of the same type are registered as one group .
Group No.
life of each tool group. pieces that can be machined registered in each tool usable hours of it are regLife per
19 groups, 1 to 19, may be used. For groups 1 to 9, life is designated by the number of works (1 to 9999 works)
Number of pieces
of each
These must be registered from the part program in the memory of the equipment before starting machining.
1-
For groups
designated by use hours (1 to 9999 minutes).
10 to 19, life is
125
2.8.29
b.
TOOL the
(3)
T designation for tool lifecontrol Using the following special T commands , create the part program for machining :
When
is executed, the following screen registration on is shown in the COM function display The screen enables the confirmation CRT. of the registered information. (Depress PAGE key to display the following screen. )
EXAMPLE The display : of the the information following registered
The tool of the group specified is given as T command. position offset is cancelled.
in Z= tool
However,
by executing shown.
program
is
TC091
is given as T command and, at the same time, the content of the registered offset number is applied as offset.
0... ;
G122 P1 ; L7890 ; ; ; ; ; ; L7890 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Note:
TO1O1 T0303 T0606 T0909 Tllll T1313 P12 T0404 T0808 T101O T1212 T1414 G123 M30
b. When
ber of number
a group
number
registered
by
the
num-
pieces 1 to
(C Zis the group number) for the for counting the number of pieces, completion of machining .
deWhen the group numbers 10 to 19 which operating time of a signate the maximum
single tool, the control automatically counts the-feed time as operating time. T-command need not be programmed for time counting on part program.
c.
Display
for
confirmation
of the contents of
01234 N,1234
TUD 91
EXAMPLE: When the executed
command.
1 (LIFE7890 COUNT)
o
(2) :
01234 N1234
TOOL GROUP 12 (LIFE7890MIN.) TIMER O MIN. T0404 ; T0808 ; T101O ; T1212 ; T1414 ; RDY
Fig. 2.69 TOOI Life Data on TOOI Life Gontrol
by Operating Time
126
At
the
execution
of
the
part
program
speci
(4)
Input
/output
signals
for
tool
life
fied with tool life control, the tool number in the current group and the offset number beiniz used by TG 791 command may be shown in COM display on CRT screen. In the above program, T0191 specifies the ~ shows that machining by T0606
signals
Table 2.24
Signal Name Description
in the registered tool information. ( ~ shows that T0190 becomes T0600. ) TOOL LIFE CONTROL TOOL GROUP
COUNTER
TLSKP
TLCH
on the
operation for each input /output depends operation panel and external sequences provided by the machine builder. For details, refer to the instruction manual offered by the machine builder. The following describes the control function in response to the input /output signals to facilitate the understanding of the tool life control feature. Tool skip input
TLSKP
RD Y
~ shows that T1291 command the machining by T0808 in the tool information. (~ shows that 11T129011 becomes command. )
Fig. 2.71 Example Offset B of Display of Tool
An ~,,,, * ,
This is the input signal for replacing the tool before the registered lifeof it expires. When TLSKP input is closed during the time from the output of the tool registered by group number 1 to 19 as T command to the output of another T command, the con trol outputs the T command of the next tool registered in the group at the time of the next T command output.
b.
No. and
No. of Current
Execution
TLCH
I I
P-a-
127
2 8,29
All tools in each group the registered life (the TLCH hours) expires. . Tool when life expires of in
d.
T K C 99 commands specified.
number
workplaces
by
Tool replacement completion input (TLRST) and tool replacement completion group number inputs (TLA1l through TLA21). These signals are used to indicate the re placement completion to the control after the tool replacement request output (TLCH1, TLCH2) goes on and the tools whose life has expired are replaced with new ones. When the tool replacement operation is completed, set the group number to tool replacement completion group number in )Ut (TLAII, TLA12, TLA14, TLA18, TLA21 and put the tool replacement completion input (TLRST) in the closed state.
completion
group
num-
When the tool replacement signal goes on, alarm number the CRT screen. c. TLCH1, output TLCH2: Tool
on
replacement
request
After all machining life of registered tool with either tool group No. expires, TLCH1 and 2 are closed by performing program end When main input is or reset operation. check for the tool No. of machining closed, life expired and replace it. When tool replacement request inputs Note: TLCH1 and 2 are closed; automatic start is mode. prohibited in automatic operation
I 1; I
0 0 0
0
0
L ;
0
0
0 0 0 0
When the tool replacement request output signal goes on, look at the CRT screen, namely , the tool life control display screen of COM func tion, make confirmation of the number of the erouD in which all tools have come to the expie. ration of useful life, and replace them.
k
0 0 0 0 0
L % G-I
EXAMPLE
Shown below is a display example in which the life of the tools belonging to g-roup r,umber II 11(has been completed.
TM. 18
T1.A21
1
01234
N1234 #/henthe tool replacement oDeration has been completed with the tool re~lacement com II look at the tool life pletion input II closed, control display screen of COM function on CRT and c-heck to see if the control internal memory is accepting the completion of the replacement operation. When this operation is found accepted, perform a reset operation (depress RESET key on MDI & CRT panel or close external reset input ERS) , and the tool replacement request output goes off and the displayed alarm code disappears.
TOOL GROUP 1 (LIFE7890COUNT) CO CNTER 7890 TO1O1 ; T0303 ; T0606 ; T0909 ; Tllll ; T1313 ; END END END END END END
EXAMPLE
(i)
Shown below is a display example in which !! 12!! tools has expired. the life of the group
TOOL LIFE CONTROL TOOL GROUP TIMER T0404 ; T0808 ; T101O ; T1212 ; T1414; END END END END END
01234
N1234
Tool
number
A A :
RD Y
Shown below is a display example in which 12 is set as the tool replacement completion group number put and the tool replacement completion input is closed after replace ment of all tools .
in
i
G123 ;
As
shown above, consecutively specify to be used and the offthe tool numbers
set memory specified memories EXAMPLE numbers in the group to be Up to 5 offset by address p. may be -used for one tool. :
TOOL LIFE CONTROL TOOL GROUP TIMER T0404 ; T0808 ; T101O ; T1212 ; T1414 ;
01234
N1234
G122 P1
TO1ll TO1O1
; L7890
; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; L.. . ;
RD Y
(5)
Supplementary control
explanation
a. The tool lifecontrol in which multiple tool offset memories are used by a single tool is performed as follows:
)
G123 This is the display of tool lifecontrol group No. 1 of COM function on CRT screen at registration of tool information by the execution of the above program. ;
129
2.8.29
TOOL
LIFE CONTROL
01234 N1234
TOOL GROUP 1 (LIFE 7890 COUNT: o COUNTER TO1O1 : END TO1ll T0121 T0131 T0141 T0202 ; CUTTING T0212 T0222 T0232 T0242
T0192 ;-t-
Becomes T0202 command Becomes T0212 command Becomes T0222 command Becomes T0232 command Becomes T0242 command Becomes T0200 command
When tool 01 of group number 1 has been reDlaced
!
T0193 ; L
[
IU3Y
T0194
; L
by tool 02.;
i
Fig.
2.72
T0195
; L
ii)
The Use
commands
Table 2.25
Ccxnpensation Compensation registerd first. is 00. is the compen-
-1
T0190 ( ;
The display of tool life control group No. of COM function on CRT screen at execu tion of the above program is as follows:
01234 N1234
TooL GROUp I (HFE 7890cOuNT) COUNTER o TO1O1 ; TO1ll ; T0121 ; T0131 ; T0141 ; T0202 ; T0212 ; T0222 ; T0232 T0242
~ Compensation
sation memory number registered fourth. Compensation registered fifth. is the compen-
RD Y
sation memory number Fig, 2,73
Tool
life
control
in which
work
coordinate
T ...) is used.
Use of work coordinate system setting does not require to modify the program for tool information registration.
(ii) The work coordinate system setting command to be used in the part program should be as follows: G50 TOZ90
_
;
Group number ( 1 to 19)
130
There . The
are tool
following number
. The tool coordinate memory number be used for each tool is as follows: Table 2.26
Tool Coordinate Memory No. 51
IIRegistration of tool information not Note: from the part program but by the writing of settings and the presetting of the number of tools by settings are provided for However, these operspecial operations. ations should n~t be performed in principle.
Tool No. 01
(6) a.
List
of
Settings of
for group
Tool
Life
Registration
number
02 03
52 53
Setting No.
Table 2.27
I
Contents
The group number of tcol
Remarks
I
30
*86r)l
to be selected
by
T 01 * ~k command.
(iii)
When the command G50 T 3C 90 is executed in the following programs, the control operates as shown in the table below.
Tool groups are 1 to 19. The tool whose life has expired has a minus value.
ti8602
to be selected
by
T 02 * * command.
Program
for
Tool
Information
Registration
\
The group number of tcol
$8650
to be selected
by
T 50 * * command.
* * indicates
compensation
number,
b.
Registration
of
life
of
each
tool
group
Table 2.28
Setting No.
Contents
I The life of group number l. (The number of machinable pieces) I
Remarks
Part
Program
I L(
; -1-1
u+
The life of group number n6169 Operation The life of group number 1O. (Machinable hours)
is 1 to 9999 ~ (units),
9. (The
number of pieces)
I
!
machinable
01
03
C6
G50 T 5300
G 50 T 5600
c.
Tool
life
control
and
setting
The registration of tool information and the monitoring of the currently used tools are performed using below is the list life control. the setting of settings area. used Shown for tool
131
2.8.29
TOOL
LIFE CONTROL
e.
c.
Registration number
of
tool
offset
memory
and
tool
Setting
Contents
tiemarks
TG 1 CNT (*6181)
The number of pieces being machined by the currentlyusad tool of group number t. The number of machinable
TOFN 01 (X8651)
+---- -.
TOFN 02 (~8652) .!--The tool number which uses
Of fSet MemOry 02
pieces is set in
$6161 to C6179.
(T * * 02). -1
The number of pieces being machined by the currently used tool of group number 9.
t
TOFN 50 (:6700)
The use time of the currently used tool of group number 1O. The machinable hour is set in
d.
The use time of the currently used tool of group number 19. (76 199)
$6180 to ?6189.
Table
Setting
2.30 Remarks
Notes
Contents
The registration of the
TOFO 01 (2!8701)
offset designation
number in
1.
the tool lifecontrol feature. select 4-digit designation and the offset addition options. or of the the other 99 is specified the T command part program, tool life control than above
2.
The number useb in tool life control program is W to 95 91 designation is l. 92 designation is 2. 93 designation is 3. is
The registration of the TOFO 02 (~8702) offset designation number in the tool life control program of offset memory 02 (T* * 02).
When 90 through 95, in the low-order 2 digits ( 4-digit designation) in the control executes A T- command feature.
does not cause the execution of this feature and is processed as an ordinary T command. Hence, it is possible to specify the T command for tool life control and an ordinary T command in a single part program. 3. The maximum number of tool number + offset memory number pairs which can be registered in a single tool group is 16. G 122 and G 123 commands should specified on a single block basis. Between only the P: L: T: Group Life for always be
The registration of the TOFO 50 (~8750) offset designation number in the tool life control program of offset memory 50 (T* * 50).
94 designation is 4. 95 designation is 5.
4.
When
the
part
program , a, and
shown
in
subany
5.
G 122 command and G 123 command, following should be specified: number. each tool. and compensation memory
Any
addresses
cannot
be
specified.
132
6.
The tool replacement completion input is accepted also when the tool replacement request out put is not on (the usable tool is still left) if the automatic operation is in the hold state. Care should be used in the handling of this feature. Tool life control is applied mand in the part program. by the manual intervention affected by this control. only to the T comThe tool operation during run is not
Cause A value other than 1 S compensation memory number S 50 is designated for the compensation memory number. The tool information of the same group number is registered twice. It was attempted to register more than 16 pairs of tool number+ cnmpansation memory number in a single group number. An address other than P, L, and T is designated in the tool information registration
program. More than 6 pairs of companastion memory
152
7.
153
8.
The count time of the tool life control by use hour is held after the power-off. Precisely, however, the maximum of one minute of count time may be discarded between power-off and This is because the count time is power-on. held in units of a minute. At the start of the tool information registration by G122 command, the control cancels all the registered contents before starting new registration. Hence, the registration partial tool information is not allowed. Always register the entire tool information. IIG50 TLd91il to !IG50 TC~95 may be
154
150
9.
159
numbers are registered for a single tool. The tool of the specified registerad. TCIE192, TH~93, TU~94, o+ TU095is group number is not
of
155
10.
speci
155
fied for the work coordinate system setting command to set the work coordinate system added with the contents of offset memory. In this case, however, the deviation of machining start position or the like This specification should may be caused. not be performed, in principle. 11. For tool life control during use ( group No. 10 to 19) , do not use multiple tool offset memories for a single tool. (Refer to ( 5) Supplementary Explanation in 9.) if T command is given for In this case, changing tool offset values after tool life expectancy has been reached, the tool will be exchanged for a new one causing an unexpected impact on the machine. [7) List of alarms to be given by tool life control
specified but the correspond ng compensation memory number is not registered. Zero or a value greater than 20 is designated
152
in (group number) of T 90 through T 95, or T 9?3. Some registered tool in the tool group desig-
Im
nated in ~ 3 of work coordinate system setting (G 50 T ~ greater than 31. in the control and offset
Tool life control is designated 156 memory addition options. 157 The tool replacement
Table 2.32 EXAMPLE Alarm No. Cause G 121 or G 122 command is not specified on a single block basis.
The designation 151 vialed. designated. . The designation 151 vialed. designated. A value other than 1 S tool number S 50 is designated for the tool number. of life per tool L is not prois of group number P is not pro-
Setting
Tool
Semn~TOO1
150
+ E
EO L
152
133
2.8.29
TOOL
LIFE CONTROL
No. of
Executions
Block shown by $
Blcwk shown by z
Tool
No.
Offset Memory 01 02 03
Type of Cutting
110 times
11-20 times times
I GOOTOIOI
I I G 00 T0202 GOO T0303 Tool change reauest
GOO TOlOO
G 00 T0200 G 00 T 0300
TO1 T 02 T 03 T 04
Rough cutting
21-30
Programs
for
Tool
Information
0.. . ;
G122 PO1 TO1O1 T0202 T0303 G123 M30 ; ; ; L1O ; ; ; ;
life
When the machining of TO1, G02, and T03 has been completed and the tool replacement request output is turned on, input the value of compensation memory for the new tool then perform the following operations: (i) Set 1 as the number input Turn input Perform tool (see replacement (4) , d.) completion
(ii)
completion
(iii) When the above program is executed, TO1O1, T 0202, and T030-3 a~e registered as group number 1 and with the number of machin able pieces per tool being 10,
2.8.30
Part
Program
0.. . :
G code NOOO1 G50 GOO T0191 X.. ; . Z.. ;
Gill GI12 I Multiple cornering on taper portion. Multiple cornering on circular arc portion. Meaning
These
commands
enable
the
control
beveling and rounding on taper and arc portions without making complex
(;;:%:)
operations
Taper
Beveling Rounding
The typical contours for which taper multiple cornering is specified are shown in Figs. 2.8.30.1 to 2.8.30.5 on pages 102 and 103.
When the above of ~ and ~ mands: program provide is executed, the following blocks com -
134
END POINT
b.
1 ST
L
(1) Command format multiple cornering for a.
Q 2 NO STRAIGHT
LINE \ IMAGINARY CROSS POIT \! L 5 ; I 1ST STRAIGHT
.4; z
START POINT
. .. . .. .. I..
IA. .A.
..
B..
; ; ;
O. A. OCBCP. .KB. B.
Cp O.
Fig. 2.76 c. D
*X
SECONO BEVELING
2 ND STRAIGHT LINE
B u 12
ST OuNDNG
L1
1 ST STRAIGHT LINE
I ~NE
. .. . .. . .. I A B.. A.. .A. .B. . B.. ..p .p .p Q..; - Q Q. .-; .;
u.~~~
l. .. .. A.
A.. .AC.
B B.. ., B---
C. .C
D. D..
; ; ;
K. B-.
.B.
OA. ,B.
Fig. 2.77
C-DO
Fig. 2.75
135
2.8.30.
d.
1 Taper
Multiple
Cornering
(G 111) (Centd)
Address Word
Table
2.33
(Centd)
Contents
Unit first
2 ND BEvELING
Virtual intersection K
IMAGINARY CROSS POINT
between
P
I ST STRAIGHT LINE
The first rounding radius (without sign), The second rounding radius (without sign). The first beveling amount (without sign). The second beveling amount (withoul sign). ]
1 = 0.001 mm or 10.0001 in.
I Al
D
k K i A START POINT
I z
(3) a.
below:
Gill Z(W) ... A.. .C. .. B.. .C. J-D... Gill Z(W) ... A.. .C. .. B.. .C. D... Gill Z(W) ... A.. .C. .. B.. .C. .. D...
Fig. 2.78
; ; ;
A: 1:
First Straight
(Z. )
Meaning
of addresses
Line
Specify
two.
The following address words may be specified for the taper multiple cornering command. Simply specifying the contour determining address words permits the required operation.
Table Address Word X-axis (U:
Contents
Z-axis
from
start
point
C:
D:
First beveling
amount First rounding
~Specify either J
2.33 straighetiine end point Specify two. combinations not permitted: X and U Z and W Howare ever, the following move angle. X (U): [(U): coordinate
Unit
x (u)
[
Z (W):
z (w)
Z-axis
end point
Move angle of the first straight line 1 = 0,001 deg Move angle of the second straight line Virtual intersection between first and second straight lines. Xaxis distance from start point (radius value). Second Beveling or Rounding 1 = 0.001 mm or 1 = O.CQO1in.
start or j
end point)
D: Q:
Second beveling value Randius for second rounding Either D or Q should be commanded
b.
the
first
and
Table 2.35
B command
c.
The second beveling and rounding depend on the designation of second straight line as shown below: The second B and X(U). straight line is specified with
Other conditions
(i)
. ..------/
B=o = 360.000 = 360.000 Beveling in X negative direction, Z
positive direction
in X, Z posi-
tive birection
(ii)
straight
line
is specified
with
S60.003
<B,
B c 270.000
Q B
Beveling tive direction
& z ( w)
ROUNDING TOUCHING THE STRAIGHT LINE PARALLEL TO XAXIS
B = 90.000 = 270.003 Beveling in X positive, Z negative direction First straight line moves in Z negative direction.
d.
The second beveling and rounding are preformed in the direction in which the second For details, refer straight line advances. to Table 2.35.
90.000< B <180.000 B,
)
\
Beveling in X positive, Z negative direct ion
/
Beveling in X positive, Z negative direction First straight line moves in X positive direction. B = 180.000, 180.000
....
Beveling in X negative, Z negative direction First straight line moves in X negative direction.
/--------
137
2.8,30.
Table 2.35
Table 2.36
Beveling direction
B command .x i Other conditions value for second straight line move angle
Rounding direction
+x Other conditions L }Z
+-z
Beveling in X, Z posi-
Rounding
in X,
posi-
tive direction
tive direction
.)
in X negative,
X-~is
B < 270.OCKl
Second straight line is specified Rounding touching the straight iine parallel to First straight line moves in Z pa3i tive direction Rounding in X, Z positive direction ..First straight line moves in Z-axis positive direction. Z-wis with B, X (U).
B = 270.OCO 90.000
Beveling
Z positive direction
Beveling in X negative, 270.OCO < B, B <360,000 90.000 6<0 < B, Z positive directjon
/
B = 90.000 270.000
J
positive,
z (w)
command may not be used.
(
Z negative direction
Rounding B command value for second straight Iine move angle L direction Other -x -z conditions
Rounding in X positive,
90.000< B,
Rounding in X negative, Z posi First straight Iine moves ~.---6=0 = 360.000 360.000 Rounding in X, Z positive, direction in X-axis negative direction First straight line moves in X-axis tive direction B <180.000
als
x (u)
command may not be used. Rounding touching the straight Iine parallel to X axis
7---
positive direction
Table 2.36
Table 2.36
(Centd)
B command value for second straight Iim move angle B command Rounding direction +x I +-z i value for second straight line move angle
Rounding direction -x I
Other conditions -.
&.z
.
B = 180.000 180.000
....
x (u)
command may not be used. 270.OCQ < B,
B <360.000 90.000 B<O < B,
~-----
Second straight line is specified with B, Z (W). straight Iine paral Iel to X axis
Supplementary
description , and Z (W) of the second specified, the first straight one of the A, 1, and K
180.000< B,
B <270.000
(i) When
(ii) The
Second straight line is specified Rounding touching the straight line parallel to Z axis Rounding in X, Z negative direction First straight line moves in Z-axis negative B = 270.OCCI direction Rounding X negative, Z positive direction with B, X (U).
taper multiple cornering command specifies the first and second and straight lines by selecting addresses X, Z, 1, K, A, and B. Hence, unlike the other G commands, X, Z, I, K, and B do not allow the The speci omission of 0 specification. fication of O have different meaning for IIo!! should always be X, Z, I, K, and B. specified. omission of address O specification command. of
z (w)
command may not be used.
taper
multiple
cornering
= 90.000
First straight
Table 2.37
O specification may be omittechot omitted
line moves
in
Address
--
Z-axrs
positive direction
x
z
I K A B P Q c D May be omitted. (Cornering amount is O) May not be omitted
139
2.8.30.1
(CentD)
(i)
(iii) When
the second straight line is designated by X(U) and Z (hJ) commands, the second beveling and rounding are disabled. If this designation is attempted, an error is caused.
PO;N-
+--,
1 I L _ ___ 1 1 SrAf7T POINT
(iv)
The combination of the first beveling and the second rounding or the first rounding ble. and the second beveling is also availa -
(v)
When the first straight line designation addresses A, I, and K are allspecified, A is ignored. The first straight line is created by I and K commands alone. When the second straight line designation addresses B, X(U) , and Z(W) are all specified and two of the first straight line designation addresses A, 1, and K are further specified, B is ignored. The second straight line is created by X(U) and Z(W) commands.
(vi)
\\\ \\\ h
I ~i. \\ \ \ \ \\ \ \
the straight line going from start end point at angle of 45 and the line going from end point to start angle of 45.
45
\ START POINT
angles
The end point in the above diagram is the end point of the second straight line with no second beveling and rounding . 4
When Gill basis, the performed blocks . block is movement assuming executed on a single block up to the end point is the maximum of four
Specify a positive value for the counterclockwise rotational angle from Zaxis positive direction, and a negative value for the clockwise rotational angle from Z-axis positive direction. (Specification range: -360.000 S A, B ~ 360. 000)
EXAMPLE \ :
4--+*
A1350r A225 Notes 1. : G 111
Writing G 111 block in the buffer, the control unit performs all computations for the first and second straight lines and the first and second beveling and rounding. For some contours, the computation time requires more than 500 msec. If the move time in the pre ceding block is shorter than the computation time, the movement stops, sometimes causing undesirable effects on the cutting surface . To prevent the stop of movement due to the
the ? ti.
and
is
valid
only
in
computation time, ii is recommended to pro vide the buffering state (M93 command) be fore the four blocks before specifying G 111 block command.
specified
3.
If the first beveling portion to be by address C of the block specified G 111 has the contour shown below, specification is disabled:
140
6.
Some commands which assume that the 45de~ree straight line, going from start point to end point; is the fi~st line or second line may cause an error. Example
Gill
7,
1:
I-25. C5. A225, D5. ;
Alarm Code 140 Commanding specifying 140 one address of addresses B, X (U), Z (W)
Z-1OO. B180.
Commanding
Z (W) specifyhg
In addition to
z-loo
among addresses
C5
140
A, 1, K specifying first straight line. Address C specifying first beveling and address P specifying first rounding commanded.
[ 25 START POINT
3
L) 5.
+2
8180
140
Address D specifying second beveling and address Q specifying s=ond rounding commanded. Angle for angle programmingA, B by G 111out of range 380 S A, B S 380,
Ist beveling part outside the rectangle composec start and end Wints. by
141
.4225.
142
142
Ist beveling portion between 45 straight lines of start to end points and end to start points.
Example
Gill
2
1-25, C5. A225. D5. ;
143
Z-1OO. B270.
------
&
143
This command will not cause an error. z-loo D5
144 143
Ist straight line and second straight line on the same line. M, S, T commanded in G 111block.
-E
.nf
A-l-
Command values fof addresses A, 1, K swifying straight Iine are determinad as follows, and programmed shape cannot be formed. Command value for A
380,000, 180.000, 180.Cf30, 360. COO 90.OCKI, O,
first
;%
143
A 225
Address I commanded
for
27.000,
90.0CX3, 270.030
ifying first straight Iine are determined programmed shape cannot be formed.
Command value fw B
380.003, 380.o@3 270.OCKI, 90.000, 90.000, 180.000, 0,
I
Address X (U) commanded for second straight line, Address Z (W) commanded for specifying straight line. second
270.000
141
2. 8,30.1
b.
Taper
combined
rounding
- -2q
Table 2.39
Alarm Cede
I
(Centd)
Cause
I(JIJ 1, #?oo ;
143
i5R
143
P and Q specifying
radius for rounding tco large for the programmed shape. Operation cannot be made according to the command.
d50 command
broken line
shown
by ;
---- -1
P
?
14C Commanding and rounding.
b START
POINT
I
addresses
Gill w1OO.
Command
115.
KO B165. by solid
P3.
Q5.
shown K-2.
line
(G12)
X200.
; )Command shown by broken line after the command shown by solid line
EXAMPLE
-----\, !)c T
I \$ zoo, I
a.
Taper
combined
beveling
100.
I
I
.x
1
+
,50
3C
(GOI
W...
;)
d50 command
broken line B165. A90.
shown
G1ll or Gill
w-1OO. w1OO.
115. 115.
C3. C3.
D5. ;
KO B165. shown by
D5. line
Command
solid
2.8.30,2
c.
Arc
combined
rounding
START
in
facing
G 112 be able to specify the following four operations in a single block: Straight ~ line Beveling Rounding ~ Circular ~ Beveling Rounding arc
Depending on the direction of arc combined beveling /rounding or taper in turning combined beveling /rounding in facing may be executed.
(1) a.
format
G112
Z(W)
. .. K..
.Q.
..
P..
.Q.
..R.
.;;
d. 1,
CIRCULAR ARC LINE
Arc
combined
beveling
START POINT
in
facing
G112X(U)
. .. K..
.K.
. .
P..
Q.R...
STRAIGHT LINE \ c
K N
b.
Arc
combined
beveling 1
in turning
I
i
CIRCUI -AR ARc
~ ARC CENTER z
CIRCULAR
ARC
2 ND BEVELING
G112X(U)
. ..
D R
143
2.8,30.2 (2)
Circular of
Table 2.41
(Centd)
The rounding which is performed in the radius designated by P command in contact with straight line and circular arc. The beveling which is performed in the dimensions
addresses
for
circular
arc
multiple
Rounding
cornering command
are as shown
2.40
below :
(circular arc in turning) or the straight line parallel designated by Z (W) command
in the radius
Z-axis
circular =C and the straight line parallel to Z-ais by X (U) command turning) or the straight line parallel to X-axis
z (w)
for arc combined rounding in facing (W: Increment from start point)
(arc in facing).
X-axis distance from arc center start point 1 = 0.001 mm or Z-%is distance from arc center start point Circular arc radius First rounding radius (without sign) 1 = 0.0001 in, (decimal point mav be enter~d)
a;, ;CENTER OF CIRCULAR ARC CENTER OF CIRCULAR
m
CENTER OF ~
fm
(3) a.
Designation
of
contours subjectare as
The contours of the portions to be ed to circular arc multiple cornering shown below :
r-----l (-----l
R
R
~
~ POINT
STA~l POINT
Table
2,41
Straight Line
The straight line which is parallel to Z-axis in turning) or X-axis point, The point from which the arc is circulated designated point. The beveling which is performed designated straight line and circular arc. by I and K commands
(arc
Circular Arc
is
First Beveling
in the dimensions of
144
c.
To supplement the above description, the following discriminants for determination of the circular arc cutting directions in the control unit are provided:
Table 2.42
Values of I and K Commands
2.43
Result is provided.
120.
K20
120,
K<0
1. 2. 3.
1<0,
K20
CINkwise Cw) wise (CCW) (Equivalent to (Equivalent to G 02) G 03) Counterclock wise (CCW) (Equivalent to G 03) Clockwise (CW) (Equivalent to G 02)
G 112.is a nonmodal G code and is valid onlv -, for the specified block. The block specified with G112 does not allow the specificationof M, S , and T . When G 112 block is executed on a single block basis, the movement up to the end point is performed assuming the maximum four blocks.
I<o,
K<O
of
When a negative value is specified for the circular arc R, the circular arc cutting direction mentioned above may be inverted as follows:
CIRCULAR ARC ROTATIONA1 OIRECTION WITH POSITIVE VALUE SPECIFIED FOR R
4.
When G 112 is used for the finishing shape blocks G71 (stock removal cycle in turning) , G72 (Stock removal cycle in facing) , and G73 (pattern repeating) of multiple repetitive cycles the block specified with G112 is equivalent to five blocks. Do not specify other codes to the G 112block; otherwise, an error willbe caused. After wiring G 112 block to the buffer, the control unit performs allcomputations for the straight line, the circular arc, and the first and second beveling and rounding. For some contours, the computation time becomes more than 500 msec. If the move time in the preceding block is shorter than the computation undesirable effects on the cutting surface. To prevent the stop of movement due to the computation time, provide the buffering state (M93 command) before the four blocks before specifying B 112 block command.
5.
6.
CLOCKWISE I< O,K<O WHEN
-x
J--+Z
,L
d.
Address words X(U) and Z(W) are used to make discrimination between radius measur in g circular arc and front circular arc . They cannot be omitted if the end point and the start point are on the same coordinates (UO or WO should be specified) . When the address words other than X (U) and Z (W) are omitted, the following results are obtained:
7.
Cause I X(U)
I
or.Z(W)
145 14.5 -k
145
2.8, 30.2
EXAMPLE Arc
: rounding
combined
Alarm Code
50.
Both P and C specified. Both Q and D specified M, S, or T specified. Tool moves in the direction reverse to the center of circular arc from the start point.
CENTER OF CIRCULAR
145
145 144
+x
-----
z
/r--r
+-
;) Shown
line arc
by before
broken circular
146
A.&
G112
START POINT
uOI1O.
K-50.
P5.
Q5.
R30.
; line
(GOl
X-150.
;) . . .
between
b.
Arc
combined
beveling
I START POINT
. -____ Q1
100. L)l.4
L(GO1 x1OO. Z-50. ;) . Shown by line before arc D5. R30. broken circular G112 (GO1 UO11O. Z-150. K-50. ;) C5. ; line
146
Bweling formed.
specified
146
2.8.31
ABSOLUTE/lNCREMENTAL
PROGRAMMING
(G 90, G 91)
*
G91
Incramental
designation
14B
G . \
For lute
see
2.3.5, Abso-
2.8.32 (G150,
GROOVE G 151)
WIDTH
COMPENSATION
A control point is the tool nose point used in the automatic nose R function, which is indicated by 1! CT! on the right corner of the offset screen.
Groove width compensation is to shift the coordinate for the groove tool width and to change the tool nose point by the G151 command, according to the tool width and control point set This function allows groove via the offset screen. machining without considering g the tool width in the program.
When it is a diameter designation, the X-value end face groove is shifted by two times the tool width. Commanding shift on both X and Z axes can be set in the parameter to trigger an alarm. fPM6018
DO 1:
G150 G151
OFF ON
\
o:
X/Z )
Notes :
1.
The program cannot be started under the G151 status. Always cancel G151 once before starting the program, Commanding G151 without commanding the control point will cause an alarm, as the direction of the shift cannot be determined. G150, G151 are members of group 13.
2.
Contrl
point
diagram
3. The compensation point as follows. the G150 command command shifts the tool nose The compensation is canceled or by the T command. 4. by
( Example
Inner, outer diameter groove End face groove
of
groove
width
compensation
program)
L1
Set the tool width
OF S31, (Example) Offset Tool
Tool TOOI
fdo.
GOO XO: G151 ; . . . . . . Zo; X-20; GO1 Z1O; GOO XO; G150; .. . . .. Zo;
Enable
compensation
in
the
offset
numbers
from
as
follows.
4
5
OFS04X,
OFS05X, OFS06X,
Z, R, C
Z, R, C Z, R, C
Z
Z Z
No.
No. 6
147
3.2 (1)
2 GENERAL
PROGRAM
FORM
in
.
<
_F~4Q
PART PROG
M30 I
Cq ER
Punching shown in
according
to
these
codings
are
<
~,4BEE~?ALF:NL I !
%OG_~~PART
PROG
M30
to be used mixedly
L These are called EOB o, END of BLOCK character . !hls nanual ! L . TF.e~e are ~a]led E(JR Or REWIND STOP cha, acler ,n t. s manual
3.1.2
EIA/lSO
AUTO
RECOGNITION (2) Any LABEL can be written at the beginning of tape to classify easily the tapes. In label skip function the control ignores the data from LABEL to the first EOB code. Therefore, the undesignated address or function characters can be used as LABEL. Iq addition, the modified code which disregards parity is also available. EOR point code next to LABEL of tape rewinding. means the stop
The control performs automatic recognition of EIA/ISO code. It recognizes the code punched EOB code in Label on tape by reading the first Skip state, and automatically adjusts the followon data to read by the recognized code. RESET operation 1 activates Label Skip state and cancels this function, Note : The setting #6002D can specify the code when NC Internal data7is output (punched out) , and does not affect the tape reading operation.
(3)
3.2
3.2.
PROGRAMMING
(1) PROCESS SHEET ends with EOB (End-of-Block) character. EOB character is represented by CR in EIA code and LF/NL in 1S0 code. In this manual, mark ; is substituted for them to read easily this manual. A block
e
of the
LABEL
(4)
Where storing NC tape data into memory, with the label skipped, the memory stores the data between the first EOB code and the next EOR code. Therefore, EOR code at the end of tape must not be omitted. IN PROGRAMMING
PRECAUTION
The programming is performed with the process that the process sheet sheet, It is recommended to match final specifications should be made by users, considering the readily perceived form and convenience for rewriting. Fig. 3.1 shows
an example process sheet.
(2)
A part program ends with the block including M02 (End-of-Program) , M30 (End-of-Tape) or.M99 (End-of-Program) . When M02 or M30 is commanded, automatic operation2 is stopped. In most cases, the control is reset, or rewinds the tape (or memory) automatically . As the details are determined by the machine, refer to the machine tool builders manual.
(3)
I
I
PROGRAM NO
Fig.
3.1
An
Example
of
the
Process
Sheet
RESET operation means resetting the control by depressing the RESET key on the operators control station or remotely. Automatic operation means operation in TAPE , YIDI, or LMEM mode.
148
1-1
1 -Inlln
I ,-In
[u]
Iulul
ICI
Ir-1 o
Notes: 1. For the hole pattern of EIA code of the characters with an asterisk, the pattern Howshown in the table is standard. by parameters. 2. EIA cwie of character # can be desig-
* *
* * * *
149
3. 2.2
(4)
GENERAL
The character and Function programming
PROGRAM
FORM
(Centd)
3.3.2
specified on 2. 1.2 Address Characters should be used for , but others should not.
NC tape must be punched out with the er for EIA code or 1S0 code according of process sheet.
(5)
Where the tape vertical parity check (TV number of characters in a check) is made, block must be even. If odd, it should be made even by using SP character.
When punching the tape, at the beginning and the end of the tape, provide the feed holes part needed for the tape feeding . Where the punched tape is wound on the reel+ of tape reader, the feed holes part will be 70 cm in length.
(6)
The disregarded characters such as BS, Tab , SP, UC , LC and Del should be avoided from the significant data area, if unnec essary.
The maximum in a block is ters such as eluded in allowable number of characters The disregarded charac128. BS and Tab are not in Del,
3. 3.3
lock lock t
them.
of Cnaraclers
e,ec
,gr W Check
o Single
f
operation
N12 G 00 X40000Z200000 S?
~20 CHARACTEQS~ (EVEN NUMBER (Odd number causes taoe ~e,.lcal car ly error 1 mum Allowable N~mbef c, Characters lr, a Block. TTe rnax!
3.4
3.4.1
NC TAPE HANDLING
SPLICING NC TAPES
(7)
SP
(Space)
character
SP character is usually disregarded when However, in the followtape data is read in. ing cases, SP is read and its function for providing space on the CRT screen is effective. SP used in parentheses.
To splice NC tapes, stick a joining tape (O.08 mm thickness) with sprocket holes , or fully perforated joining tape on the one side of the spliced NC tape, make NC tape. Before using the spliced sure that the sprocket holes are in position. The joining part of tapes should not be extremely thick, and do not use the rigid adhesive agent without flexibility.
3.3
NC TAPE
(NBC
SPLICE
TAPE
Eight-channel paper tape for computers complyThe diing with JIS1 -6243 is used as standard. mensions are 25.4 *O. 08 mm (1 inch) width and O. 108 mm (O.0042 inch) thickness. It is recommended that the color of the tape is black or gray, but not that of high transparency. If the tape with high transparency is used, the tape reader may misread it.
Nc
J===NG
8-CHANNEL FULLY PERFORATED 1SILVEP iApE
Splicing
of NC Tape
3. 4.2
KEEPING
expectancy of NC is recommended.
When keeping NC tape, avoid moisture and oil. Do not handle the tape with oil-stained gloves.
Properly reading kept tapes will and rewinding. permit 300 times of
1 Japanese
Industrial Standard
150
>
[( > )
R--D ~-R-FI
;+
Cziz@
.,
~ n
m
~
FuNCTION
Pm
>
AOORESS
mEl[Ewl[mBl [mmal
EMEEl[El[nl[Kl PII!HI!H1 [WzE1.] [DWWEI][EIITEIIEI
n
~
Fig. 4.1 Standard NC Operators Station with 9 CRT Character Display (Keyboard on Right Side of CRT)
NC overators station with 9 CRT display (kevboar& below CRT) is also available. Operation is the same with both types. Instructions given in this manual are for operators panel with keyboard on right side of CRT.
151
ON/OFF
PUSHBUTTONS
pushbutton
operation
To turn on the power for the control: Depress the pushbutton first to turn on the controi power and depress it again to turn on the Push this button to recover the servo power. servo power after an emergency stop. POWER OFF pushbutton
of the display ~nd MDI. pushing makes it effective and light up.
f
~
t
FUNCTION
\ EIRRR
B
I
[~[%hB
Fig. 4.4
To turn off the power for the control: Depress it to turn off both the servo and control powers.
!ll~/All
,11.11
(Alarm)
key
Select this key for display of alarm and status The function becomes effective when codes. the power is turned on or an alarm occurs.
I)(;X
Fig. 4.2
(Diagnosis) key :
key status. (Parameter) key for for display of input /output
select this
signal 4. 1.2 CRT CHARACTER DISPLAY 11{11
According to each operation, this display indi data in a regular size, cates the alpha-numerical
double-size size. 13raun tube and quadruplesize of the regular
size:
9 inches of characters: 32 characters 512 characters : , .~) , (EOB) .i , ~ .:, through ~ . , ~ L Select this key of the command , ,
i]~(lj ~
Maximum
number
(Command)
key: for display or writing-in (MDI ) data for automatic operation. key: display or writing-in of a
characters ~j
through
characters code ~
(Program) for
,.., *
this key for display of various current positions. OF% I (Offset) key:
Select this key for display or writing-in of tool offset values.
Fig. 4.3
Braun
Tube
152
4. 1.4
ADDRESS
KEYS
These keys are to designate an address character when writing in various data.
~k=iJ-c==3 ---
,CAX I (Cancellation) key: For cancellation of the numeric data erroneously keyed.
value or address
~~ AOORCSS OATA
(write)
key:
For storing address data by address keys and data keys into buffer storage. ~S1lIFT (shift) key: ISHIFT key after depressing ~ Depressing key makes the display to~, ~ or ~ turn into ~ to i? , 7 , R which are
written These macro. on the upper left special characters cornerof are used the keys. in user
Elma)m[mm [Pl!!l=ml
EllEmml[mKl Emflm mmiiimllma (Fl!mf=l El[=l[mm[mal (Fl!m!!nl [q[~]cq) [EI]IEIIE][FI
Fig. 4.5
4.1.6 Note: Special characters n L (Slash) key: For an optional block skip command. ~J~ (EOB) key: For the block end command. On the CRT display, ; is displayed instead of EOB.
4.1.5 DATA KEYS
NEXT
KEY key is used for special purpose and function in display or writing data.
of additional tape in EDIT mode.
in DGN
and
function.
expanding
4+
These keys consist of 15 keys in total, such as ~~mthrough ~, U (minus) -]WI -] and can be used for writing-in of such all numeral values as tool offset value setting data, parameter data, and so on, in addition to command value.
The PAGE key is used to display the next page the previous page when CRT display is r-e garded as page. For example, when a bundle of tool offset values are displayed by OFS key, this key is pushed to display the next bundle of tool offset values, which just looks like opening the pages of a book.
or
Fig. 4.6 Notes:
r. ~
(1)
Depressing page.
~~A[~ L.4
,:0
~]
:in~) ::;,
(decimal point)
or
(2)
~ ~3G~
key:
For
(3)
Keeping the PAGE key depressed makes the page step automatically forward or backward.
153
4.1.8
CURSOR
KEYS control key is used to move the example, when a page of parameter by PRM key.
4.1.10
EDIT KEYS keys are for editing a stored part program. key: key: key: Used Used Used
for
These
ERASE
displayed
INSRT
(1) Depressing sor backward. Y9 key moves the cur-
ALTER
memory.
(2)
~ ~uRTSOR ~ .
key moves
the cur-
MEM
OATA
(3)
Keeping the cursor control key depressed makes the cursor move automatically forward or backward.
EiEE
i~~
EOIT
d
RES
I
I[E33] [Fw=kql
Fig. 4.9
4.1.11 MEM
DATA (MEMORY
DATA) KEYS
TAPE KEYs are to start the tape operation except They are effecin the automatic operation mode. tive only in the EDT mode.
Fig. 4.8
(1)
OUT
IN key This key is to start storing various data into memory through tape reader or data 1/0 interface.
ORG (ORIGIN)
KEYS
position ORG key is used to set the current of the machine tool as the Zero point of coordinate system. The origin setting can be made for each axis. The reference coordinate system means the coordinate system which is set by G92 command or system setting. the automatic coordinate
(3)
VER
key mem-
This key is to start verifying between ory data and punched tape data.
ORG
key is used
for
the
following (Position
operation. External/
Reset of current
Absolute) - Reset of operation
position
time
154
4.1.12 This
RESET KEY
key resets the control.
4.2
4. 2.1 TURNING
Check the machine before turning on power, referring to the machine tool builders manual for details. Operations after completion of inspections are as follows.
POWER ON POWER ! APPROX ! 2 SECONDS ~ ~ NRD (NC REAOY) I CONTROL POWER ON
Fig. 4.10
SERVO POWER I NRD (NC READY)
Operations
by
this
RESET
key
are:
Move
Buffer Alarm Tool
cause
is
eliminated
II READY LAMP
offset
t
cancel ON
ALARM CODE
1
j 280,1 !
I
BLANK
~ 310, I
of Turning on Operation
(1)
Depressing
the
POWER
ON
pushbutton
to
Resetting
Refer to 2.8.1,
turn on the control power. The internal timer will be read in about two seconds. Then the servo power is ready for turning on, which is shown by alarm code 310. Depress the POWER ON pushbutton again to turn on the servo power. The NRD (NC READY ) signal is sent out when the NC power is normally supplied. When the NRD signal turns on the machine power, and the MRD (MACHINE READY) signal returns back to the control, the READY lamp will be lit.
not
operating
values
of
each
axis.
. F commands . S , T and Tool data Depressing the RESET key or the reNote : mote reset pushbutton is defined as Reset operation in this manual. offset B commands values, setting data, parameter (3)
155
4.. 2.2
TURNING
OFF POWER
4.3
OPERATION
Depressing the POWER OFF pushbutton causes both the servo and control powers to be turned off simultaneously. However, for more stable operation, use the following procedure . (1) First depress the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton to cut off the servo power. The NRD (NC READY) signal is interrupted, which usually results-in turning the machine power, too. Depress the POWER OFF off the control power , Ek4ERGENcY STOP pushbutton to cut
4.3.1 CONSTANT
The following display is made on both the top and bottom on the displayed picture of CRT , irrespective of the FUNCTION key currently selected.
.... ... . .
f.+LARM
COMMAND
(2)
DIAGNOSIS Ill
POWER OFF
~
LIGHT ERROR
.
CONTROL CONTROL POWER READY { I I I I I LlALREADY IN J
=d
-ALARM
BLINKING
KEYING EDITING
: BLINKING) (IN 1
DISPLAY
READY ALARM
LAMP
I I
CODE
BL.4NK !
r330JI
\4sl
ALARM OR BATTERY FAILURE 1S DISPLAYED (BLINK IXG) ALM1 BAT .4/B [J ~IX D\t ELL, FEED DISPLAY (BLINKING) M,S, T, FAXDP DWELL [.
Fig. 4.13
Sequence
Fig. 4.15
(1)
Function message Any one of the following eight function messages corresponding to the function key is displayed at the top of CRT display, ALARM DIAGNOSIS PARAMETER SETTING COMMAND PROGRAM POSITION OFFSET
(2)
Program
No.
O and 4 digits of program No. under execution is constantly displayed at the top of CRT display irrespectively of function key.
(3)
Sequence
No ,
execu N and 4 digits of program No. under tion is constantly displayed at the top of key. CRT display irrespectively of function
156
(4)
Display of keying data Up to 32 characters of keyed in data can be displayed at one time. The data is processed by using ERASE key, INSRT key, ALTER key, etc. Display of 1/0 and editing (blinking) The following messages are flickerlingly displayed during loading of punched tape, address search or edition. INI1 ... loading tape
(9)
Display of ready state llRDyll ... indicates the system is normal and the control is operable.
( 10) Dispay
(5)
The messages shown below indicate light errors which occur in keying or searching operation. Differing from the alarm codes,
these
pres:jing
by CAN
dekey)
111 NpUT
ERROR!
IIvER! ... verifying tape oUT lIASII ... ... punching tape out
ALREADY IN !
OVER!
..
. . . . . . . . .
1~
command
PROGRAM
OVER!
S command T command
. . . Registered
number
of
is beyond 199
displayed
at
rapid
traVerse
has
not
lip},
. . .
tape
located.
(1)
. . .
of
Any One of
a. Command
on
( COMMAND)
LSK
. . .
b. Repetition
(SUB PROG.
(8)
Display
of
alarm
c. State
TROL)
of tool
(2)
The ward
above by
display
steps
forward
or
back-
depressing
PAm
or
- : PAGE ]
alarm battery
state
occuring
ltBA-pl
...
one b y one.
alarm occur
and
157
4. 3.2.1
Command
Data
Display
4. 3.2.2
Display
of Subprogram
Run Status
(SUB FROG. NESTING) The display shows the block data under execution or just prior to execution in which compensa tion calculations have been completed. The conditions of the data to be displayed is as follows. (1) The data shows the contents of the active register during an automatic operation or a feed hold. While the control is stopped at a block end, the contents of the buffer regiter are displayed. If the buffer register blank (BUF is not displayed) , the contents of the just executed block are displayed. When the program being executed is in the subprogram called by M98 (subprogram call command) the following information is displayed : CALL : The program number (O to NO) and sequence number (N to NO) specified with M98 (subprogram call command) : The program number (O to NO) and number (N to NO) of the subprogram called by M98 The remaining number of repetitions of the subprogram by L ---- (subprogram repeat command, K = L1, indicates the number of repetitions) The order in which subprogram call commands are called. of Subprogram Run multiple
(2)
START
LOOP :
r
G
CODES
OF
01
TO
14
GROUPS
NEST:
~NON-MODAL
G CODE
Example
Status Display
3-AXIS SPEED
MAX OF
SPEED 3-AXIS
DESIGNATION IN OPERATION
Fig. 4.16
Command
Display
Fig. 4.17
010000
)20000
030000
>40000
iol
10
NO130 No120
NO1OI
P2000QO11O L1O ;
M98
!0200P3000QO120M98 La ;
/
NO21OP4000QO130M98 L6 ;
M30
M99 1
,M99
M99
CRT screen displays that the subprogram has executed the 3rd level one time and entered into the execution of 3rd time of the 3rd level
158
Use Status
The following information is displayed use ) of each status (e. g. condition, tool group under the tool life control LIFE : The life of the screen Groups the tool group
TOOL LIFE CONTROL TOOL GROUP TIMER T04** ; T08$* ; TIO** ; T12** ; T14** ; T18** ; T20** ; T22** ; END END END END END END END END
01234
U1234
12 (LIFE7890MIN.) 1234 MIN. T24+*; END T28** . CUTTING T30**: T32** ; T36** ; T38** ; T40**;
displayed
1 to 9:
of
machining
Groups COUNTER/TIMER:
10 to
19:
time.
The number of machining operations /machine time the currently used tool.
T codes correspond ing to the tools registered in the group displayed on screen are all shown.
END END }
4.3.3
WRITING
IN BLOCKS
AND DISPLAYING
CONTENTS BY MDI
used 4. 3.3.1 (1) Multi-block Writing writing and Operation in MDI mode in MDI Mode
CUTTINGThe
Multi-block
1
; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; END END CUTTING T21** T26*$ T29** T31**
Depress the PROG function key. . . . PROGRAM (MDI) is displayed screen. Depress the RESET The buffer for MDI key, is emptied.
on the
01234 N1234
c.
d.
The part program is written by the use of the address key and data key. As shown below, the keyed data is written to the bottom line on CRT screen from left to right. The maximum number of characters that can be written at a time is 32. If the data is comprised of 32 characters or less, it may be keyed in over multiple words or when the 10th character blocks . However, is keyed in, the normal display at the right of this line is blanked.
Depress the WR key. The keyed data is stored in the The blanked display is restored Up to 10 lines operation may operations
f.
in d.
159
4, 3. 3.1
(3) a,
Operation in \lDI mode the CYCLE START button in Depressing MD I mode can automat ic~liyexecute thr part programs stored in the MD I buffer. When the PROG function is active, the cursor is displayed at the head of the block currently executed . \\Thenthe execution of allpart programs is completed, the part programs and the CRT displays are erased If M99 is written at the end of a part program , this program is executed repeatedly. The repetition may be stopped by depressing the FEED HOLD then RESET .
c. While a program is being run, the PROG function need not be active. Depressing POS can display the current values on the CRT.
Referred entered has, to as tithe data which (32 characters maximum) . just been
Note:
II :. II
key displays
Fig. 4.20
(2) Editing MDI data 4. 3.3.2
4
N2 N8
NI coo U-40. ;
CO1 W-20. FO. 3;
REPEATED
IN MD I
RUN
MODE.
M99:
Display
in Memory
Run Mode
(PROGRAM [MEMI ) The part program being executed in memory mode (MEM mode) may be displayed by the following operations: (1)
(2)
run
INSRT , and ALTER keys permit editing multi-block data written in. Address rword) pointed to by the cursor willbe edited. ~ CURSOR keys and i ~U~S~ The 1 move the cursor forward and backward. a. ERASE key: When this key has been depressed, the whole word designated is erased. b. INSRT key: This key inserts the data which has just been entered next to the word the cursor points to.
mode,
Depress the PROG function key. On the CRT screen, the cursor is positioned at the head of the block currently execut ed. The cursor moves to the next block when its execution is started.
c. ALTER key : This key replaces the word which the cursor points to with the data which has just been entered . d. WR key: This key appends the data which has just been entered at the end of the program displayed. In MD I mode, only one screen currently displayed may be edited. Unlike EDIT mode and MEM mode, the display and edit of multiple screens cannot be performed , When the RESET key is depressed, the stored programs are allerased.
CURSOR
160
Up to 10 lines may be displayed at a time. When execution of the ninth has been completed, the next page appears with the tenth line of the last screen appearing at the top.
(2)
Completion of search
the disappear. search is completed, AS will
a. When
(i) In
4.3.3, See 3 Display 4.6 in EDIT Mode
EDIT.
Address Search
MEM or EDIT mode, the pointer of the part program memory points to the data of block found (indicated by the cursor) . In all cases, only search will be performed but neither BUF display nor advance reading will be performed.
4. 3.3.4
Search continues until a data (character string) held on tape or in the memory which coincides with the data (character string) entered through The contents the NC operators station. of tape willbe searched in TAPE mode and those of the part program memory in MEM or EDIT mode. (1)
a. b. c, operation Select Depress Depress and the program (MEM, or EDIT EDIT mode) mode. function key.
~.
MEMORY POINTER
t
DATA FOUND
MEM, the
PROG
the RESET key. LSK appears pointer returns to the top of the number in MEM mode. in one of the following
d.
AS disappears and NOT FOUND ! appears on the CRT if the desired data is not found. This message willdisappear when you depress a key (CAN normally) of the control station.
Remarks
(3) (i) Key-in the word (an address data) to be searched. If the leading zero of the data is omitted, the search operation is still possible. (ii) Key-in only a single character without data. This permits searching the character read first. (iii)Depress the NEXT key then key in any data (less than 32 characters) to be searched. In this case, the search operation is performed exactly according to the keyed data (character string or nu meral string) , thus disabling the omission of leading zero.
a.
Commands encountered during search will be ignored even if they are modal commands.
On Cycle Start after search, the data of a
.
e.
Depress starts.
the
CURSOR .
key.
Search
f. When the NEXT key is depressed, depqess it again to cancel the pattern search func tion
161
4. a d. 4 Haaress (4)
Search
bearcn
i~ontctj
number to in
h, ERROR i. COMMAND
(2)
of program
The address search function also permits search a part program out of those stored the memory. a. b. c. d. Select Depress Depress MEM or the the EDIT mode. function key. number 10 ~ D c K . be omitted. key.
Depress
the page including any of the above . Note : Page including error pulse or command pulse willse displaye~ when SYSTEM No. switch is set at 4. 4.3.4.1 Position
(1) [EXTERNAL]
PROG RESET
The current value to be displayed in EXTERNAL is the accumulated value of the tool movement from the position reset to Oil by the ORG key. HOW to reset POSITION [EXTERNAL]
e.
Depress
the
m
1 .,
key.
(2)
The designated program number will be searched. The result of search is as de scribed in ( 2). In MEM mode, you may de press the CYCLE START button immediate y after completion of search to start automatic operation from the beginning of the program.
Display the POSITION [EXTERNAL] screen on the CRT , select the axis by the address key, and depress the ORG key. The display of the selected axis becomes O. This display reset operation is always valid even during time when the movement is being made by the automatic run of part program . Notes :
4. 3.4
CURRENT
POSITION
DISPLAY be dispro-
rhe current position of X-, or z -axis can played at any time in all modes. Operating cedure is as follows. (1) Depress POS key. will be displayed
1,
When parameter POSEXT ( #6005D5) is set to 1, the value displayed in POSITION EXTERNAL becomes the same value as dis played in POSITION ABSOLUTE . Regardless of the state of parameter POSEXT , the value displayed in the external current value display (option) is the same as displayed in POSITION [EXTERNAL] . Hence, resetting the external current value display auto matically causes the reset of POSITION EXTERNAL . The value in the current value display of the equipment described in 2.8.22, Work Coordinate Multi-Shift G50T and 5.2,3, Measured Workpiece Value Direct Input refers to this value in POSITION EXTERNAL. The display lock feature TION [ EXTERNAL]. is valid for POSI-
2. on the
COUNTER 4.
162
Fig. 4.23
4.3 (1)
4.2
Position
[ABSOLUTE]
4. 3.4.3
Position
[INCREMENT]
The current value displayed in POSITION indicates the tool position on ABSOLUTE the coordinate system provided by coordinate system settings. Coordinate system setting is performed in the following cases: The execution of G 50coordinate system setting. The operation of automatic coordinate system setting (option) . The ORG current value reset operation by the key (see (2) below) . coordinate
Displayed in this mode are: . In automatic mode, distance to the end point of the block at every moment. . In mzmaal mode, distance to the position where manual operation is to start. . The increment display in manual mode willbe cancelled in automatic operation mode.
a.
b.
c.
d.
(2)
~creen ABSOLUTE Display the POSITION on CRT , select the axis by the address key, and depress the ORG key. The display of the selected axis becomes 0. However, this display reset operation is valid only in the manual operation modes (RAPID, JOG, and STEP (or HANDLE) ). Depressing of the ORG key is invalid during operation or in the buffer full state. Note : If the display lock is on, the display of POSITION [ABSOLUTE] is not locked.
Fig. 4.24
4, 3. 4.4
(1)
Position
all positions are collectively
In POSITION,
displayed.
(2)
POSITION MACHINE displays the tool current position on the coordinate system with the reference point returned by the refer ence point return feature being O. The data on the following features are defined on this coordinate system:
163
4. 3.4.4 a.
Position
(Centd)
error compensation .
4.6
Stored
Stroke
Limit
Fig. 4.25
Display of POSITION
(3)
Clear
STORED STROKE LI.MIT displays the remaining number of PuLses in the four directions of X-axis pluslminus and Z-axis pluslminus from the tool current position to each boundary of the first,second, and third limit areas.
The
in the position screen , to display O as the external current positions. The external current pc)sitioncan be displayed as O by the following operation.
1
The setting of S~ORED STROKE the display of rem~ining number STORED STROKE LI!vIIT
. . . . Change
the X-axis value of the external current value display to O. the Zaxis value of the external current position display to O.
~ Set by ~ parameter
. . . . Change
. . . . Chance
the X and Z axes values of the external current position display to ,!O. !!
The value of X-axis plus remaining number of pulses The value of X-axis minus remaining number of pulses The value of Zaxis plus remaining number of pulses The value of Z-axis minus remaining number of pulses
The value other than the external current positions does not change. The same operation can be performed external current position screen. on the
4, 3.4.5
Program
Return
PROGRAM RETURN displays the information necessary for program restart. For details, see 6.2.6, program Restart .
164
CURRENT POSITION
FOR EXTERNAL
LIMIT AREA
aENcE
~RENCE ~
POINT . .. G .x
!~> o c. .? @ @4 FOR INTERNAL LIMIT AREA
12345
RD Y
L *
tz
4. 3.4.8
Display
(ERROR PULSE) ERROR PULSE displays the difference between the momentarily changing command position and the tool current position. The display is performed on a 1 = 1 pulse basis (the minimum move unit) .
ERROR
PULSE
04000
NOOOO
520
z
Fig. 4.28 Display of Remaining No. of Pulses in First Stored Stroke Limit
1.
027
LS K
RDY
(2)
The display shown above will correspon to 1st, 2nd, and 3rd prohibited area.
Fig. 4.30 Display of No. of Servo Lag Pulses
4.3.4,
7 Spindle
SPINDLE
COUNTER displays the number of spinindexing origin dle P G pulses from the spindle during the execution of the spindle indexing feaThe display is performed on a l = 1 pulse ture. basis.
The SMC register is set to O when the power is turned on and keeps adding command pulses until the power is turned off. When a value is set to parameter XSMCB (#6658: for X-axis) or ZSMCB (#6659: for Zaxis), the value obtained by subtracting the value set above from the content of the command pulse integrating register is displayed.
Note :
43.
4.9
Command
Register
Fig. 4.32
d. The screen of the following or preceding five pairs of tool offset amounts may be ~ . displayed by depressing
Fig. 4.31
PA(;E , r
; PAGE :
,j
key.
When the options shown below are selected , designating the corresponding offset mem r-
The tool offset amount is stored in the offset memOry in the unit. Regardless of modes, the tool offset amount may be displayed and written any : including the automatic operation time. time
ory number
~ A~E I
by depressing
~
I L_
PATG~
operation
(1)
Display of tool offset amount The display of tool offset amount and other offset memory contents is performed by the following operations :
(i)
Work coordinate system shift option: Work coordinate system shift amount.
(ii) Work measuring value direct input option: Tool coordinate data. (iii) TOO1 wear compensation option: Tool wear amount.
a. b.
function key.
Key-in a two-digit tool offset number like CURSOR ~ or O, 1, and then depress , -. I * -1 CURSOR
I+
1
* wORK COORDINATE .\c 1
The tool offset amount and the tool nose radius are displayed in five pairs including the tool offset number of the keyed value. The cursor is positioned to the designated tool offset number .
c.
,,
The preceding tool offset number may be CURSOR or designated by depressing 1 .. I CLRS~ If the operation is performed . outside the range of the tool offset numbers displayed on one screen, the following or preceding five pairs of tool offset amounts are displayed.
* TCC.
-, I
.,
~ 1 I
-rFig. 4.33
166
(2)
Writing of tool offset amount The writing of the offset amount and other offset memory contents is performed by the following operations:
Notes :
are retained
a. b.
Depress
the OFS
function key,
3.
Regardless of modes, the writing by the above operations is always possible including automatic run time. The tool offset amount rewritten in automatic run is made valid from reading of the com mand of the next block. For the tool offset amount of the currently executed block or the block stored in the prefetch buffer, the value before change is used.
By the operation of PAGE key and CURSOR key or keying in two digits designate the tool offset number to be written.
Using the address key and the data key, key in the address data to be written. In this case, the meaning depends on the address as shown below:
c.
4.
When the data shown below is rewritten, the timing in which the data value is made is as follows:
(i) Work coordinate s~stem shift amount:
Table 4.1
Axis Designation Write to X axis Write to Z axis Write to X
u
Address
The time when G56, G50T , or other coordinate system setting is performed next. ii)
Writing of an absolute value. Namely, the value is written to memory without change. Writing of an increment. Namely, 5%
x z
iii) Tool wear compensation amount: The tl,newhen T 99A A is specified next. The writing operation of the above tool coordinate data is performed when the PST INPUT button is not depressed. If this button is depressed, the data to be written is completely different from the above data. For details, see 6.2.3 Work Measuring Value Direct Input. The contents of offset memory by the following operations: (i) (ii) Depress the OFS are allerased
axis Write to Z
the current value is added to the preceding value and the result is written to memory.
6.
d.
Depress
the WR
key.
The address data keyed in is written to the tool offset memory according to the meaning of the data. e. Repeat the operations of c. and d. and b. through d. to write allnecessary tool offset amounts. f. When the options shown below are selected, if the corresponding offset memory number is designated at the operation of d. , the data may be written to memory. However, address R has no significance and therefore should not be designated.
(i) Work Work coordinate coordinate system system value data. shift shift direct option: amount. input option:
function kev. .
Key-in O - 9 9 9 9 , and depress the ORG key. The contents in offset memory are all erased,
( ii)
(iii)
compensation amount.
option:
167
4.3.6
DISPLAYING
AND WRITING
SETTING
DATA
(SETTING)
With this unit, the setting data is stored in the internal memory. According to the contents of this memory, a particular function is turned on/ off. These contents are also used for the con trol constants of functions . For details, refer to Appendix 1, List of Setting Numbers. The display and write of setting data are always enabled including the time when automatic run is being performed. The setting data is of the following two types: (1)
(2)
4. 3.6.1
Setting
Format
#6000 through #6004 have the Setting numbers II setting data of bit display format. Each number has 8-bit information of D7 through DO, each bit displaying on /off of the corresponding function. (1) Display of setting data (bit display format) Setting data is displayed by the following operations : a. Select the SET function key.
Note: When #6000 is designated, the screen dedicated to the display of on/off state of the internal toggle switch is provided. For details, see 4.3.6.2.
(2)
Writing of setting data (bit display format) The writing of the setting data of bit display format is performed by the following operations:
Depress
the SET
function key.
setting
.
number
]
and
b.
depress
~lJ~~SO~~
L CURSOR __
~ ey
#:need not be keyed in. Up to four pairs of setting data including the keyed setting number are displayed . To the right of bit display,the decimal value indicating the sum of the data on that line is shown. The cursor is positioned to the designated setting number.
c.
By the operation of PAGE key and CURSOR or keying in 4 digits, designate the setting number to be written.
key
c.
Depress the INSRT key. The cursor moves to the bit data from a setting number. Designate the data of D7. DeDress the cLRsOl<key Each time
d.
the key is depressed , the cursor moves by one bit toward DO. Locate the cursor at a desired bit position Depress the WR key, The designated bit data reverses (0 to 1 or 1 to O) . If you depress the WR key again, the bit data will reverse again Normally , ) 1 designates on state and O off state, To write data in decimal mode, locate the cursor at the right most column (decimal data)
f.
168
: data
Writing 765
in decimal
mode
Notes : 1.
43210
000000000 1111111 steps If you key by b, through the f. m the in the to write 1 255 2.
The internal toggle switch is an optional function. Hence, which internal toggle switch is available depends on the controlled machine. The display for unused tog gle switches is blank. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the machine in question.
When the machine control station is provided with the switches that turn on and off the above functions, the state of the switch on the machine control station is ORed with that of the operators panel to determine the final ON/OFF state.
Switches on Mac~iiomtrol Resultant I ONIOFF
required
keep
7 , CL RTSOR
depressed, column
r cursor screen
will auto-
has
been
written,
depress
the
Setting Data
Cursor returns to the position INSRT key. of setting number normally, this sequence of operations begins and ends both with the depression of the INSRT key.
4.3, (1)
6.2
Internal
Toggle
Switches+
When the eight basic function switches shown below are omitted from the machine operators station, each function may easily be turned onioff by the setting operation from the NC operator panel. The setting numbers are #6000D7 through D o of bit display format. By the operation of the writing of bit display format setting described above, turn on /off each function. When When 1 is set, O is set, the the function function is turned is turned on. off.
4. 3.6.3
The following setting numbers have the setting data of decimal number display format: #6160 through
?#6500 through #8600 through #6219 #6579 #8750
(2)
These setting numbers are used for the control constants of tool lifecontrol and multiple repetitive cycles.
function key.
settine number and de-
press
p:ti~
or
~~L~so~] key.
The maximum of 10 lines of setting data including the keyed setting number are displayed. The cursor is p~sitioned to the designated setting number. c. Display shows that Single Block and Display Lock are on.
Fig. 4.35 Display of Internal Toggle Switch Status
The setting number designation may be upCLJRS~R or ~ dated by key, ~CLJRTSOR E. _. I and the screen may be updated by ml . or [,x keY
169
4, 3, 6.3
Setting
Data of Decimal
Display
Format
4 :
TEST
(0)
(Centd)
Normal operation is similar to the case of 1 O1! SYSTEM. Self-diagnostics of the memory contents and checking of reference zero return point are omitted,
Notes :
1.
Setting values other than those described above will prevent correct operation. Setting can be effective only when the system number switch provided on the upper part of the unit is set at O. No. Setting (#6219)
2.
Fig. 4.36
Data
When setting #6219 is set at 11or 4, Cycle Start is prohibited or self-diagnostics are over looked, causing unexpected errors. To prevent
this, alarm status a value other than is displayed O. if
(2)
Writing of setting data (decimal display format) The writing of the setting data of decimal display format is performed by the following operations:
#6219
is
set
at
a. b.
Depress
the SET
function key.
v;
SYSTEM MESSAGE
I
NO. SETTING
(#6219 ):[11 I
I
By the operation of PAGE key and CURSOR key or keying in 4-digit value, designate the setting number to be written. Key-in the value by the data key and deThe keyed value is press the WR key. written as the data of the setting number designated by the cursor. Repeat operations of b. and c. to write the necessary setting data.
> No. setting (#6219) parameter numthe
c.
should
be
set
at
except
d,
REMARKS System
. System number can also be set by the rotary switch on the main printed circuit board. For details, refer to Maintenance Manual.
Set system
ber. value
No.
at II111 to write
4.3.7 DISPLAYING
AND WRITING
PARAMETERS
setting panel.
Setting of #6219
llO1!: SYSTEM
In this system, varying parameters are stored in the memory and they determine operating conditions such as tape code and feedrate. For details,see Appendix 2, LIST OF PARAMETER NUMBERS . The parameters may be displayed at any time even during automatic operation. The parameters (1) are of the following two types:
Writing parameters
is pre-
The parameters of bit display format. The parameters of decimal display format.
PARAMETER
170
4. 3.7.1
Parameters
of Bit Display
Format
4. 3.7.3 (1)
Displaying Operations
Parameters display
Parameter numbers #6oO5 through #6049 indicate the parameters of bit display format. Each num
The operations for parameter display are the same as those for setting display except key is depressed inthat the PRM function
stead of the see 4.3.6. SET function key. For details,
(2)
a. The parameter values are preset according to the performance of the machine and applications.Therefore, you should consult the machine tool builder if you want to change parameter settings. b. The parameters are protected with a system No. switch provided on the tape reader so that they should not be destroyed by wrong operation. Normally system No. O is selected and, at this time, the parameters cannot be rewritten by any operation. c. The operations for parameter writing are the same as those for setting display except for the following: (i) First, set the system No. switch to 1.
key instead of the PRM function the SET function key. Then, the parameter data may be written by the same
Fig. 4.37
4.3.7.2 Parameters of Decimal Display Format The following parameter numbers indicate the parameters of decimal display format: #6050 through #6160 through #6500 through #8000 through #6149 #6349 #6659 #8225
(ii) Depress
operations as those for the writing of setting data of bit display format (4. 3. 6.1, (2)) or for the writing of setting data of decimal display format (4. 3.6.3, (2)). (iii) After ation, the completion set the system of the writing operNo. switch to O.
d.
When parameters have been changed, be sure to reset the control by depressing the RESET key. Some of the parameters cannot be effective until power is turned off and then turned on again. For setting, refer to APPENDIX 2, LIST OF PARAMETERS .
171
4.3,
8 DISPLAYING
STATUS
iNPUT/OUTPUT
SIGNALS
(1)
Depress
the
ALM
key.
Depress the DGN function key, and the state of every input loutput signal willbe displayed on the CRT. This is possible at any time even dur ing automatic operation. 170rmore detailof this operation, see IIyASpJAC Lx3 Maintenance hfanu~. The state of the input /output signal is also given in the hexadecimal notation at the rightmost column for the ease of maintenance work.
Then up to four pairs of alarm code and message willbe displayed, with more serious one on a higher line. The alarm screen willappear during an Note : alarm state and, therefore, it is not needed to operate the 1AGE + key.
Fig.
4.40
Display
of Alarms
Fig. 4.39 (2) TO reset the alarm status and screen, re-
4,3.9 ALARM CODE (ALM) DISPLAY Alarm codes and other data are displayed by the following operations : (,1) Depress the ALM function key. following screens is displayed: One of the
move the cause of alarm then depress the RESET key. For the detail of alarm code, refer to Appen dix 5 List of Alarm Codes .
and the
4, 3. 9.2
Message
Display
(ALARM)
(TIMER) number.
This feature can display messages on the CRT screen by the instruction of PC when the machine sequence control option (PC system) is built in the unit. Normally, this feature is used to display the cause of the alarm detected by the
Pc .
history.
(2)
When the message display instruction (macro instruction) is executed in the PC, ALM or A /B flashes at the bottom of the CRT screen regardless of mode and function.
-1
.PAG~
key.
may
be displayed
4.3.9.1 Alarm Code Display If an alarm status has happened, ALM or AI B (on battery alarm) blinks on the bottom line of the screen regardless of working mode and function. If this happens, the detailed informa tion of the alarm status may be displayed by the following operation.
Depress the ALM function key. The message is displayed at the bottom of the screen along with the sequence error code. The message to be displayed depends on the machine. For details, refer to the instruc tion manual of the machine in question.
172
l-.._
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
AREA
Fig. 4.41
Example
of Message
Display
REMAINING
NUMBER
OF CHARACTERS MEMORY
IN PART PROGRAM
(2)
When the RESET key is depressed after removing the cause of the alarm which dis played the message, the message display and alarm state may be cleared. message 400: display SEQ
The
remaining
number
of
characters in the
in
part
lower
This screen displays only the registerNote: A program number is ed program numbers. registered by depressing the PROG function key in EDIT mode.
Program Number
4.3.9.3
(PROGRAM
Display NO.
and TABLE
Deleting ~r)
of Registered
This screen displays allregistered program numbers and the number of remaining characters in the part program memory. (1) The number of program numbers that can be registered depends on options.
.W
The program directory screen used to be displayed in the alarm functions, but is now improved to be displayed in the program functions. Therefore, the program directory screen is no longer displayed in the alarm function. In the program function, the program directly screen and program screen are displayed alternately regardless of the mode, each time the m II 1!screen is depressed. When it is under @ the edit mode, program 1/0 verification,and deletion can be made on the program directly screen.
1 No.
1 . 2 +Max Number I 1 ~ Basic i Option 1
Option 2
of Programs 99 199
Type I
999
to 19
(2)
All
program
numbers By
already
registered or may
are
depressing page
key, the
be
depress
173
4.3.9,
4 Operation
Time
Display
e.
When
1,
112,3,
~re
are
The system counts the duration of automatic operation and it may be displayed. This function permits the display of the time it has taken for a single piece of work or the total operational time of the system.
(1) Three played kinds of operation in hours, minutes, time will be disand seconds.
times
4. 3.9.5
Maintenance
History
Display
(MAINTENANCE)
This screen displays the maintenance information on the control unit. This display is independent of the control unit functions.
b .
CYCLE
START:
time
of
c. d.
FEED
Total
FEED
Fig. 4.44
4.4
AND NC DATA
Fig. 4.43
operation
Time
Display
This paragraph describes the operations for ing the following data into the corresponding ternal memory of the NC :
storin
time display
. Tool offset amount . Setting data and parameters If these data are to be stored in the form of a punched tape, enter them through the tape reader or the data input/output interface (option). For the methods of setting the input/output equipment (setting #6003) and the baud rate (parameters #6026 and #6027), refer to yASNACLX3 Maintenance Manual Date Input/Output Interface. The following description is made assuming that this option is installed .
The above operating time displays may be reset separately by the following operations. In the state where the operating time is displayed;
a.
ORG
keys. is reset. .
POWER
ON
b.
ORG
keys
is reset.
c.
CUTTING keys.
is reset.
d.
Depress
4 then ORG
INPUT
is reset.
Unless this display reset operation is performed, then operating time display is retained when the power is turned off.
174
4.4.1 (1)
g.
When the tape reader has read M02. ;, !!M30 ;,!! or I!M99 ;,11it stops and IN disappears from the CRT
been stored gram has . NOW the in memory. part pro-
Loading a part gram number. Select Depress Load the EDIT the NC
program
which
has
a pro
Notes :
a. b. c.
1.
Program number 00000 is always in the registered state, so it cannot be erased. This program number should not be used general. The be tape stored which has no program before. number However,
in
equivalent
external
2.
M30, % 1
HOLD HERE
may
as described
0/.,01234;
PROGRAM
G50, XOYO
NUMBER
d. e.
Depress
the the
RESET IN key,
key.
Depress
Then the system starts to read the tape and enlists the program number punched on the tape as the first record. The system checks for duplicator of program number as in 1. Operation ends with error if the designated program number is not found on the tape. When the tape reader has read M02 ; , IIM30; ,11 or M99; , it stops and IN disNow the part proappears from the CRT. gram has been stored in memory.
write a program number to the head of the tape, in principle. The operation of Oxxxx IN described before causes only program It does not cause the number registration. storing of information of 00000 into the part program memory. only the program number on tape is stored into the memory. Assume that a tape having no program number is stored and then all part programs are punched out by depressing O, -, 9, keys. Since this 9, 9, 9, and OUT tape contains programs with no program number, the correct restoring of all part programs may not be performed by depressing IIo 9, 9, 9, 9, and IN keys. , -,
3.
Consequently, when a tape having no program number has been stored, write the program number to the head of part program by the EDIT operation. The stop position of tape can be changed by parameter #6021Do, with parameter setting 1, program completes by M02, M30, or M99, However, with parameter setting O t, program does not stop till %. EXAMPLE N1 : G50 XO ZO ;
(2)
Loading a part gram number. Select Depress Load the EDIT the NC
program
which
has
no pro4.
a. b. c.
equivalent
external
N1 G50
XO
--
M02 I
O/. (
is in the first block, position the N and key in as follows (in EDIT modes) : ; N1 ALTER
when load!ng
(3) d. e. Depress Depress program Depress the RESET key. O key then enter the
Storing changed
a program I
with
program numbers
To register a program with a program number different from the one punched on tape, perform the following operations: a. b. Select Depress the EDIT mode. key.
f.
blinks on the CRT delete the program number, f. while the tape a. through IN blin-ks on the CRT.
to read the tape. If the numb er coincides with the number, ALREADY IN If this happens, screen. then repeat steps is being read,
the
PROG
175
PART PROGRAM
TAPE INTO
MEMORY
The tape reader stops each time it has read M02 ;, M30 ;, or M99 ;. f Depress the IN key again.
NC
tape
to the
tape
reader
or
the
external equivalent equipment. The tape reader resumes to read the tape, Repeat this operation until allprograms are loaded. %,01234 G50, XOY0 \
I
M 30
1 HOLD
?(O
(5)
with program
numbers
PROGHAM
NuMBE7
HERE
d. e. f.
Depress Key in
the O the
RESET and IN
key. NUMBER.
When O key is depressed and program number is keyed in before depressing IN key in proas described in (4) above, the keyed
gram number the program is registered in preference to number punched on the NC tape
PROGRAM key.
Depress
The program number entered from the key is registered in preference to the program number punched on the tape. At this time, the program number on the tape is written to the part program memory simply as a label. and the stor M02 ;, M30 ; or M99 ; is read ing operation is completed.
(6)
Loading
programs
continuously
l?rograms existing on a tape as shown in (4) may be loaded continuously without inter ruption. For this purpose, depress O,
I,_ ,,
,,9, ,,
,19,
,,
,Ig,ll
4. 4.2 Note : If a program is stored with a changed program number as described above, the program number punched on the tape is stored in the part Consequently, program memory without change, to avoid the confusion in the later handling, re place the program number in the part program memory with changed program number by the EDIT operation.
MAKING
ADDITION
TO A PART PROGRAM
Perform
part a. b. c.
mode. PRGG O key key then enter the designated data to the the part C[KSOI{ program tape pro
(4) a. b. c.
from
a tape
d. Load
reader. reader or an
the
tape
of
adding
e. 1.,01000, $
The tape to Iravel
Depress
M02 0200 ,
M30, 0500 1
T1e .aoe stops to t,a.e here
M99,O/. I \
! slops
here
f. Depress order.
The data will be read from the tape into the memory. Notes :
You cannot add data to the middle of a pro1. If necessary, delete the last part of the gram. program by editing operation and add the data.
d. e.
Depress Depress
the the
RESET IN key.
key.
Then the system starts and enlists the program on the tape as the first tem checks for duplication ber as described in (2)
2. Continuous storing operation of NEXT IN needs reset key operation every time.
and
176
4.4,3
LOADING
PART PROGRAMS
4.4.4
INPUTTING
TOOL
OFFSET
DATA INTO
MEMORY
Normally, the tool offset data is written to the tool offset memory by MDI operation. This data may also be entered in the form of a punched tape.
(1)
mode.
The
PROG RESET
as shown
The designated program number will be regIf this number already exists, istered. IN!I blinks and, in this case, it flALREADy
is required to delete the registered program number. e. Write the part program by operating the address key and the data key. As shown in the figure below, the keyed in data is displayed on the bottom line from left to right sequentially. The maximum number of characters that can be written at a time is 32. Within this limit,data may be keyed in over multiple words or blocks. However, when the 10th character is keyed in, the normal display shown to the right of the line is blanked. f. Depress the INSRT key.
(2)
The storing is performed Select Depress Set the reader. Depress Depress EDIT OFS tool
of the data by the above tape by the following operations: mode. key. offset data tape onto the tape
a. b. c.
d. e.
the the
RESET IN key.
key.
The keyed in data is stored in the part program memory. g. Repeat the operations of e. and f. above to The program edit write the part program. oDeration is enabled bv the use of ERASE,
IfiSRT, and gram storing ALTER k~ys operation. during this pro-
The tape reader starts to read the tape. !!lN 1! blinks on the CRT while the data are f, The read.
tape reader stops when it has read NIN II disappears from the % (or ER). CRT . Now the tool offset data has been read into memory.
(3)
Remarks G1O: In the case of the tool offset data tape of the format by tool offset data designation, performing the cycle start in TAPE mode causes to store the data into the tool offset memory.
Fig. 4.45
h.
Key in M02 ; , M30 ; , or M99 ; and depress This completes the storing of INSRT key. the part program.
177
4. 4.5 DATA
INPUTTING
SETTING
4.5
TAPE VERIFYING
Through setting data and parameter data are input in their memories by MDI operation normally, they may also be entered by means of paper tape, Setting data and parameter data may be input tape. from a single (1)
The tape format is as follows.
The punched tape of the data shown below may be compared to the contents of the NC internal memory to check if they match. ~ Part program . Tool offset data . Setting data and parameter The punched tape is entered through the NC tape reader or the data input/output interface (option). For the methods of setting the input / output equipment (setting #6003) and the baud rate (parameters #6o26 through #6029) , refer to YASNAC1LX3 Maintenance Manual. The following description is made assuming that this
option is installed .
I %
~
I
4. 5.1 VERIFYING
N8750 X O;
(1)
-. J
Verifying a part gram number Select Depress Set the the EDIT
a.
(2)
a. b. c. d. e.
The Set
input the
operation No.
is as follows switch at 1.
b. c. d.
Depress Depress
key. key.
e.
RESET key.
The tape reader starts to read the tape. IN blinks on the CRT while the data are being read. The tape reader stops when it has read % (or ER) . !!lN!! disappears from the CRT . Now the setting lparameter data have been read into memory. f. g. Return Turn the the system off No. then switch on. to O. (2)
started to compare the con The tape is tents of the part program memory to the During contents of the part program tape. IIVER )! keeps flashing. If this operation, a mismatch is found , INPUT ERROR is displayed flashing . When a match is found and this operation is completed, the tape reader stops, upon which VER display is erased. By the operation of RESET , VER, Note: the verifying feature verifies the data from the tape head to % code.
power
program
tape
having
no
The NC operation by the newly stored setting data and parameter may be performed.
At the end of operation e. , the op erations on the NC operat~]rs panel are all the power must be Hence, invalidated. turned on again.
Note:
a. b. c. d. e+
mode. function to the key. an[{ key in program key. tape reader
key
178
f.
Depress
VER
key.
4. 5.2
VERIFYING
TOOL
OFFSET
VALUE TAPE
The tape starts to compare the contents of the part program memory to the contents of the part program tape. During this operation, !!VERI!keeps flashing. If a mismatch is ERORII is displayed flashing. found, lllNpUT
When a match is found and this operation is completed, the tape reader stops, upon which !!VER!! display is erased. If the keyed-in program number is not found in the !!NOT FOUND! u is displayed flashing. case, depress the operation of d. Notes :
1. The gram ber is operations number punched processed on in number by the on . when in. the the operation information program a tape no program of OXXXX as the VEf7 in for different the The tape verification from are to keyedin the the the with same a pronumas those number
the tool offset value tape are contents of the offset memory operations: EDIT mode.
(2)
Depress
the
OFS offset
function value
key.
tape to the tape
(3)
CAN
key
and
start
(4) (5)
Depress Depress
the the
RESET VER
key. key.
program
of (2) above.
program
program
preference
punched
2,
punched verifying
keyed-in
number. should
containing number
The tape starts to compare the contents of the tape to the contents of the tool offset During this operation , VER memory . keeps flashing. If a mismatch is found, INPUT ERROR is displayed flashing. When a match is found and this operation is completed, the tape reader stops, upon which IVER display is erased.
numbers,
(3)
Verifying programs
a tape
containing
multiple
part
4. 5.3
VERIFYING
SETTING
AND PARAMETER
TAPES
the
EDIT
The setting data tape or the parameter tape is compared to the respective contents of the memory. It is possible to punch the setting data and parameter on a single tape and store them at a time by the following operations: (1) (2) Select Depress the EDIT PRM mode. function key.
the part
PROG program
the
d. Depress e. Depress
the the
RESET VEX
For the tape punched only with depressing the SET key causes effect. Set the setting data
When M02, M30, or M99 is read, reader does not stop but all the grams are continuously verified code. When the verification the tape reader stops at the code.
to the tape
(4) (5) Depress Depress the the
is completed, position of %
The tape starts to compare the con tents of the tape of the contents of setting or parameter. During this operation, VER If a mismatch is found, keeps flashing. INPUT ERROR is displayed flashing. When a match is found and this operations completed, the tape reader stops, upon which VER display is erased. is
1 7s
4.6
EDIT
REGISTERED PART PROGRAM
(5)
Depress
the
CURSOR .
key.
part programs, make confirmation 13efore editing of the registered program numbers and the re maining number of characters in the part pro gram memory by the following operations: (1) (2) Depress Depress the PROG the function key. or :_~J1{,sO1l
NO. number (6)
The designated program number is searched. One screen of data (for 10 lines) from the head of the searched program is displayed If the program number has on the CRT. is displayed not been found , NOT FOUND flashing. This display may be reset by depressing CAN key in general. The preceding or following screen may be displayed on the CRT by depressing the -. = I.k(;E key. I.%(;E r -
_ ~.R~cjR
(PROGRAM program
(7) is depressed,
preceding
The above operations make the word (address and data) designated by the cursor ready for such edit operations as modification, insertion, and deletion. The search for a program number may be Note : performed also in the MEM mode. But the cursor IPAGE or key is movement by the PAGE disabled.
4,6.3 MODIFYING
tJUMBER OF REMAINING PROGRAM CHARACTERS NUMBER REGISTERED
PART PROGRAM
BLOCKS
This screen only displays information but also deletes program No, and therefore cannot be used to register program numbers.
Fig. 4.46
Modification of part programs is all performed in the EDIT mode and the PROG function by the operations which follow the operations described in the preceding paragraph 4. 6.2 Displaying And (1) C~ecking
Depress the page key and the cursor key to designate the word to be modified. Depress the address key and the data key to enter the word to be modified. As shown in the figure below, the keyedin data is displayed in the bottom line on the CRT screen from ieft to right sequentially. The maximum number of characters that may be written at a time is 32. Within this limit, data may be keyed-in over multiple words or blocks . Depress the ALTER key.
4, 6.2
DISPLAYING
AND CHECKING
STORED
PART (2)
PROGRAMS
may be displayed on the Stored part programs CRT screen to check their contents by the following operations:
(1) (2)
PROG
(3)
(4)
Depress
Key-in
the RESET
O PROGRAM
key.
NUMBER.
The word designated by the cursor is deleted and the newly keyed-in data is displayed in that place. After modification, the altered word is in the designated state.
180
(4)
(3) to
4. 6.4
ADDING
PROGRAM
(EDIT)
00003
NOO03
A part program is added in the EDIT the PROG function by the operations which follow the operations of 4. 6.2 And Checking Stored Part Programs.
03; N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6
(1) Depress
G50 X1OO. ZIOO. ; GOO TO1O1; G96 S150 M03; X20.3 21.5; 20.5: z-10.5 F5;
the page key and the designate the word immediately portion to be added.
cursor before
key to the
(2)
Depress the address key and data key to key in the word to be added. Within the limit of 32 characters, the data may extend over multiple words or blocks. Depress the INSRT key.
*Keylin
PROGRAM (EDIT)
11
G01Z0,5F20 1
(3)
The keyed-in data is added to the portion immediately after the word designated by the cursor. After the addition, the added word is in the designated state. (4) Repeat to ~dd the any operations n-umber of of (1) words. through (3)
I
I
L
I
03; N1 N2 N3 ~5 N6
050 X1OO, Z1OO,; GOO TO1O1; G96 S150 M03; GO1 ZO.5 F20; Z-10.5 F5;
I
IS K
~.
Fig. 4.47
RDY
L1
After !nsertlon
I
Fig. 4.48
181
(Before deleting)
Perform the operations the operations of 4.6.2 Checking a. Depress designate Depress Stored Part
follow And
the page key and the cursor the word to be deleted. the ERASE key.
key
to
b.
The word designated by the cursor is deleted. After the deletion, the word subsequent to the deleted word is in the designated state. c. Repeat the any number operations of words. of a. and b. to delete
EOB ERASE
1 1
(2)
a.
Depress the page key to position the cursor block to be deleted. then block
key the
b.
Depress
EOB
Note : If the cursor is of the block to be deleted the key are depressed, position to ; code are also deleted, the words ed in the next block.
positioned to the middle and EOB key and ERASE data from the cursor deleted. Since 1; is left undeleted are includ-
(3)
The data from the word where the cursor is located, to the block pointed by the sequence number specified by ~**** can be erased as follows.
a. Enter address .N followed by the destination sequence number, in the program screen.
b. Then,
depress the
MS=
The cursor will be to hi**** are erased. displayed at the head of the block next to the erased block. When N**** is at the end of the program, the cursor will be displayed at the last address of the block immediately before the erased block. If N**** cannot be found, a !INOT FOI.JND1l alarm will appear on the original screen.
182
(4)
Deleting A program
program number
4. 7.1
OUTPUTTING
PART PROGRAM
TO PAPER TAPE
(1)
of
b. Display
PROG
Connect the external equipment the tape puncher to the NC via input /output interface. the operation. external equipment
the PROG
Power
The keyedin program number and the corresponding part program are deleted.
(5)
d. e.
the PROG
if the
numbers
are deleted by the
f. Check
ready.
to see
a. Select b. Depress
function c. Keyin
the
EDIT
g.
Depress
the
RESET
key.
h. Depress
the key. PROG
number
i. Depress
O, -9999.
d.
Depress
the
ERASE
key.
All registered program numbers and part programs are deleted. However, only proregistered with gram number O is newly EOB not deleted.
The part program of the keyed-in program number is output to the external equipment. If it is a tape puncher, tape punch is perWhen the output of the part proformed. gram is completed, the tape puncher stops automatically. During the output of data, !! OUT is flashing.
j. To discontinue the punch out operation, depress the RESET key. However, the discontinued operation cannot be resumed. Go back to f. and repeat the operations all over again.
Note :
When
RESET,
OUT
are
operated
without
keying in the program number, the of the currently displayed program outputted.
(2)
Punch
out
of
all part
programs
part programs may be output equipment by the above O-9999 mustbe operations except that keyed in the operation of h. AH part programs stored in the memory are output (punched out, etc. ) consecutively.
183
4. 7.1
OUTPUTTING
A PART PROGRAM
TO PAPER
4.7.3 OUTPUTTING
PAPER TAPE
SETTING/PARAMETER
DATA TO
TAPE (Centd) j~~te : The contents of program number are outputted only when #6231D 3 = 1.
00000
be punched
out by
47, 2 OUTPUTTING
TOOL
OFFSETS
TO PAPER TAPE
Connect the external equipment such as the tape puncher to the NC via the data inputl output interface. Make the external equipment operation. Power on the NC . mode. ready for
(2)
Connect the external equipment such as the tape puncher to the NC via the data input/ output interface. Make the external equipment operation. Power on the NC. mode. ready for
(2)
{ 3) (4) ( 5) (6)
Depress the PRM function key if the output of both setting data and parameter is de sired. If the output of only setting data is desired, depress the SET function key. Check to see if the external equipment ready. Depress Depress the RESET the OUT key. key . is
(6)
~Jepress the OF S function key. (7) Check to see if the external equipment ready. Depress Depress the RESET the OUT key. key. is (8)
(7) (8)
All contents of the offset memory such as tool offsets and tool coordinate data are outputted to the external equipment. If the external equipment is a tape puncher, tape punch out is performed. When the output of the data is completed, the external equipment stops automatically.
(9)
All setting data and parameters are output to the external equipment, If it is a tape puncher, tape punch out operation is performed. When the output oi the data is completed, the external equipment stops automatically.
To discontinue the punch out operation, depress the RESET key. However, the discontinued operation cannot be resued. Go back to (6) and repeat the operations all over again. The format of the punched out tape is the same as that of the tape described
in-4.4.4, (l).
184
(9)
To discontinue the punch out operation, depress the RESET key. However, the discontinued Go back
to (6)
operation and
cannot repeat
again. The format of the punched is the same as that of the tape in 4.4.5, (1),
a
OUT ( -.
KEY 3 FEET J FEED HOLES ----% H 01 X TOOL OFFSET DATA FEED HOLES P --------- 3 FEET
(SETTING
ANDIOR
PARAMETER
DATA)
O/., O 01234,
G92
XO
Y
OUT
Note
3 FEET
FEED HOLES p-------[ DEPRESS WHICH THE CAN KEY BEGINS WITH O/. AND THE PAPER TAPE PUNCH SIGNIFICANT DATA IMMEDIATELY BEGIN TO PUNCH DEPRESS PUNCH THE CAN KEY STOPS TO PUNCH /.0100 M02, SP 0200 M 30 SP 0500, M 30,
h ----------
185
4.8
SUMMARY
System I
0p3fation
I I%k
panel
0 i ae: Switch I ~1 + 1 /
Procadure
NC operatms )(*2)
keyboard
CU_R~R
Data -, .WR
Matchingwith
tape
( * 1 )
II
panel keyboard ~
I
I
1. ,Stcf!ngfrcm NC oparatws
,? ~ Stcring from @e
]
I ~
Matching
with tape I ,/
F ~ Stcring
from tape
f EDIT
~----Punch Oti !
~
I I I
I
r
---T-TL OFF I ~ ~ ~ Program number ~ ~. ~dditim of addr=~ data4! L Repeat of edit opeatico
r%tK F+--:
All pert Wcgrams m tape Addition to registewd part prcgram Designated pat Wogrsm
i i P(mch oti
OFF
@@r
E--5999
J!k
-A--,
~ ~ ----
with m
:,s~t=-l---ETpRmRm s--m r
~ numbar O(*4) Ali pert wograms on tape ~. ,~ -. ,.-4,
.V_Efl
OFF
,.y.
Add of address data ( * 5 ) Edit ~ OFF
.-
CURSO~ (Set to address data to bs modified) -. Address ~ _______ data - A1-~lER_; ~. .. .. - CURSOR (Set to address data just before addition) ~ - Address data _ ~R_T,
_..
Delete of one address
data
t -+ii i OFF ,
,, ~
I
L ~UEJ
(Set to
I ~OFF!
I
Operation
Edit Lcck
~ ode
Func tion
I ;
Procedure CURSO~ -
Address
1
OFF I 1
MEM EDIT
I
ALM
address
to be cleared
LERASE ~
9999S data to
ERASE
be
-
~U~S-ORl ..
~RAS~
MEM EDIT
Addres
searched
+ -
program 9999-
number
to be searched
OFF
,
Lx!@
Notes.
*1
*2
it is also stored
and
*5
at the same
data and the change to one address data are permitted, a parameter tape, turn the *6 When the cursor following to the address position data in the middle of a
block and EOB and ERASE the cursor out at the same time.
the data
*3 *4
Setting
Storing of a part program having a program number different from ~ogram number O on tape is performed by the same operation as for tape without Wogram number J.
5. MACHINE
5.1 SWITCHING STATION UNITS ON THE CONTROL
CONTROL
(3)
STATION
: To with automatically NC tape. control the NC
TAPE sY5tem
Fig. 5.1 shows a typical layout on the machine control station. fer to the machine tool builders
units re-
(4)
the block of data through MDI : To enter the DATA keyboard and control the system automatically with the data. control MEM : To automatically with the stored part program. the part program EDT : To store .ory and edit the part progra-m. the system
(5) 5. 1.1 MODE This switch system and DLE, TAPE, (1) SELECT SWITCH (6)
selects operation mode of the NC consists of 6 positions (JOG, HAN MDI, MEM, EDT) . by by
into
mem-
CYCLE
FEED HOLE 7. D= L
!-!
To feed the tool continuously JOG: Feedrate is set manual operation. FEEDRATE OVERRIDE switch.
START
(2)
To feed the tool by opera HANDLE/STEP: ting the manual pulse generatorf. Where the control is not provided with a manual pulse generator, the tool is fed by step manually operating the JOG PUSHBUTTON (S),
la
MDI
MEM EDT
@)
0
HANDLEI STEP
JOG
RAPID
187
( Centd )
CYCLE START
FEED HOLD o
MODE
SELECT
SINGLE BLOCK g
133~
DISpLAY
G50
POINT
OcK@&N(~RN
X-AXIS MANUAL ABSOLUTE EOIT LOCK OvERRIOE CANCEL @@l PROGRAM RESTART MIRROR lMAGEt Q@ OFF
OFF
OFF
DI
o
0
EMERGENCY STOP RESET o
HANDLE AXISt
100 c~
POIN1
o
0
G
SPINOLE
SPEED
OVERRIDEt 90 50 @
G
120 0,6
ml
+2
POSITION STOREt
ma
z
m o % 200
Fig. 5, 1
5. 1.2 CYCLE START PUSHBUll_ON AND LAMP Depress this pushbutton to start the system in the automatic operation mode (TAPE, MDI and MEM) The CYCLE START indicating lamp lights when automatic operation starts. Depress it again to start the operation after temporary stop by operating FEED HOLD pushbutton or MODE SELECT switch.
When the FEED HOLD pushbutton is depressed during feed operation, the feedrate is de creased immediately and the motion is stopped. Feedhold is not active during threadcutting by G32, G92, or G76 or dwell by G04. Rapid thread pull-up and retracting motion at G 92 and G 76 commands cannot be interrupted. However, when the NC is provided with a THREADING FEED HOLD (option) , the tool feed can be stopped temporarily even during thread cutting by the G 92 or G76 command. If it is depressed while M-, S-, tion without move command is being the FEED HOLD lamp will light, but tions will be executed continuously. tion of the function, the lamp chine operation is stopped. goes or T-funcexecuted, these funcOn compleoff and ma-
AND LAMP
Depress this pushbutton to temporarily stop autoSTART lamp goes matic operation. The CYCLE off and the FEED HOLD lamp remains illuminated during temporary stop .
Depress the CYCLE START pushbutton to restart the operation after temporary stop by operating FEED HOLD pushbutton.
188
5,1.4
EMERGENCY
STOP
PUSHBU~ON
5.1.6
Depress this pushbutton to emergency-stop the machine. The servo power is turned off and the machine is stopped immediately by dynamic brake. The RDY indication will disappear NC ALARM lamp lights and alarm code 330 is displayed. To restart the system after take the following procedure. (1) Turn the clockwise emergency stop,
5.1.7
This (1)
(2)
(3)
Turn on the servo power again by depressing POWER ON pushbutton. NC ALARM LAMP is extinguished and READY lamp lights up.
Table of
The operation is effective in the reverse order of steps (2) and (3) . Use this switch also for turning off the system.
EMERGENCY STOP RESET
The tool move distance per graduation of the HANDLE dial for the manual pulse generator is determined by the MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch (Table 6.1) . This switch is effective on all the three axes, Set the mode select switch to HANDLE, turn the HANDLE dials for the desired in the positive or negative direction. and axes
5. I. 5 HANDLE DIAL+ (MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR) The dial used as a manual pulse generator to feed the tool manually with the MODE SELECT HANDLE operation switch set to the HANDLE. is effective for an axis. Procedure of HANDLE operation is as follows:
(1)
(2)
Set the
DLE .
MODE
SELECT
switch
to the
HAN-
(2)
Select AXIS
with
HANDLE
(3)
move amount per graduation of the setting MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY (See Table 6.1. ) the dial to move the selected axis.
. Q
HANDLEt
HANDLE AXISt
1000 x 10.000
x 100000
(4)
Turning it clockwise causes the axis to move The axis moves in the in the plus direc~ion. minus direction by turning it counterclock wise.
189
1,
,s HANDLE
DIALS
FOR
SIMULTANEOUS
CONTROL
Handle General
Interpolation
Function
Table
5. I
>1
xl
x 0.01
Inch
When the handle interpolation mode is commanded while executing the program under memory mode, tape mode, or MD I mode, the handle can be turned to the plus direction to control the cutting speed of the GO1, G02, or G03 commands.
0.0001
in.lgraduation
mmfgraduation
0.001
in./graduation
Operation
x x
x x
100
1000 Icooo Icclooo
Select the handle interpolation mode. The mode can be set by the setting parameter or 1/0 input. Setting #6001 D4: 1 = Enable handIe interpolation mode O = Disable handle interpolation mode
1 = Enable handle
0.1 mmtgraduation
0.01 in.igraduation
Table
of Move
Amount
Mode
Inch
\\
xl
1/0
0.0001 in.jstep 0.001 in.lstep
signal
#13066:
x 103O
(2)
10000
------~ x ICOOOO
--
(3)
100.0 mmfstep
10.0 in.lstep
Z HANDLEt
X HANDLE+
Turn the handle to the plus side, to perform cutting interpolation for as long as the handle The F command is overridden in is turned, proportion to the handle rotation speed. The relation between the handle rotation speed and the override is set in parameter #6349.
(Example) Jihen the relation between the rotation speed of the handle and the override is 1 rotation/second = 100% , the rate becomes as follows. Parameter #6349 = 100 (pulses/second) 1 rotationlsecond or more 0.5 rotations/second
0.01 Less (5) rotations/second
xl
4$)
.
100%
50% 1%
Parameter #6009 D4 can permit setting any multiplication factor when MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch is set at X1OO. Multiplication factor is set by parameter #6223.
stop
When 50 is set for #6223, Xl, X1O, Example: x50, can be set.
(6)
The move stops when the nandle is stopped or when turned to the minus side. Turn off the handle interpolation mode the cutting ends. when
Notes :
1.
The move has no disconnection if the handle is turned faster than O.2 rotationlsecond, out the move is disconnected if the handle is turned slower than O.2 rotationlsecond.
190
2,
When the handle interpolation off during handle interpolation, move distance is executed by
3.
When there are two handles (2-handle specification) , the 1st handle alone is enabled. Handle cutting. There handle interpolation is disabled during thread
4.
5,
is no need interpolation.
to
select
the
handle
axis
for
MDI) , this switch is used to adjust the feedrate by 10% from O to 200% of the programmed feedrate specified with an F function at whatever position the switch may be set. Feed during tapping by G 32, G92, and G76 follows F command. Where OVERRIDE CANCEL switch is set on, the tool will be moved at the programmed feedrate by F code regardless of switch setting. The JOG FEEDRATE switch is used to select the of Up to 32 steps jog feedrate in the JOG mode. feedrate can be specified. Jog feedrate depends For definite values, refer on the machine tool. See Table to the machine tool builders manual. 5.1.10. The JOG feedrate can be preset by parameters #6233 to 6264.
FEEDRATE
6.
The handle interpolation during automatic mode The override is normally regardless of the setting selection switch.
7.
override
8.
During
dry r<n according selection feedrate.
dry run,
the override changes by the Thus, -the override varies speed. to the setting on the feed override switch and the setting of the rapid
With any of pushbuttons +X, -X, +Z, or -Z with RAPID button depressed, the axis can be moved rapidly until the button is released. These pushbuttons speed set by JOG JOG mode. move the FEEDRATE tool at the switch in the
o
& JOG FEEDRATE
OVERRIDE
0
?3
(2)
(3)
Each time the pushbutton is depressed in the STEP mode, the tool is moved by the value per step set by MANUAL PULSE MULMaximum feedrate per TIPLY select switch. step is determined by parameter # 6222.
axes
simultane-
RAPID
2.
Parameter #6009 D 3 can provide JOG command instead of RAPID command until reference point return for each axis is completed after the power is turned on. In the reference point return mode, usual RAPID operation is executed in both negative and positive directions.
191
5.1.10 JOG FEEDRATE SWITCH AND FEEDRATE OVERIRIDE SWITCH ( Centd ) Tab Ie 5.3 Jog Speed and Feedrate Override Feedrate
Override Jcg Feedrate . -. mm\min Parameter No. , 1 0 =6233
5.1.11RAPID TRAVERSE RATE OVERRIDE SWITCH This switch is used to adjust the traverse rate by FO, 25, 50 and 100%. 100% Rate is the rapid traverse rate set by parameter #6280 and #6281. The switch is effective both in automatic operation including G 00 command and in manual operation (RAPID m~de) . FO is set by parameter #6231.
RAPID TRAvERSE ~ATE OVERRIDE
Step
0/0
t 1
2
--1
3 4 5 6 7
. t t + +
I I I
: 60/0
3=
20%
300/o
10/0
fi6234
i __
1 2
_
?6235
g6236
---,7:
40%
+6237
50%
::+&
Parameter #6018 D2 can provide six steps of traverse rates of 1OO%, 50%, 25%, 10%, 5%, and FO.
z i~--100%
5.1.12
:*
+ 11
12
I
26243
25
Turning switch
+
i
110/0
120/0 130% =+= 140% 62M+...= =6245 x6246 + 40 50 ---
t
150/0
D6247
116248 ~--
~
~
60
al -
+
17 18 -+ 19 t
20 + 21 ; I
1601. 170%
1 &lo/o
36249 J;*
~
ICX3 1~ 150
5.1.13
~ t ; ~
x6251
190/0 :~ 200%
22 33
24 $ 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
---200 =6252 -~ -- 250 ?6253 +.-. 36254 300 ;. -...___ 400 z6255 ! ~. . z 6256 500 :6257 600 26258 800 . . .. 1000 12C0 1500 2000 2500 3000 ..
With this switch, the current spindle speed can be changed to an override speed which is set at 10% intervals between 50 and 120% of the current spindle speed.
SPINDLE SPEED
OVERRIDEt
w
50
@
Is
12[1 ,,
Parameter #6018 D1 can provide override function in increments of 10% between 10% and 200%.
0%
5.1.14 MANUAL
REFERENCE
POINT
RETURN
SWITCH
This switch is for bringing the tool back to the reference point manually. For its operation method, refer to 6.2.1 Return To Reference Point. Manual
Note: JOG feedrate depends on the machine tool For definite values, refer to the machine tool builders manual.
5.1.15
REFERENCE POINT
LAMPS
These lamps indicate that the tool is positioned They light when the tool on the reference point. is brought to the reference point through the manual or automatic return to reference point ( G28) , or by the reference point return check (G 27) , and goes out as the tool moves away from the reference point by a subsequent operation.
2. With the control provided with the optional block skip B function~, 8 independent blocks can be skipped with the switching of the switches corresponding to /2 through /9.
5.1.18 DRY RUN SWITCH Turning on the DRY RUN switch in the TAPE, MDI or MEM mode causes the tool to move at the speed selected by the JOG FEED RATE switch, ignoring all programmed Ffunctions. F commands can be displayed as they are programmed. This switch may be used to check the program.
Rapid traverse can be set by ( GOO) setting rate for dry run operation parameter # 6006D2.
REFERENCE
POINT
@
oFF
Parameter
Rapid
Traverse
at
5.1.16
#6006 O
Dz
I
With this switch turned on, individual block-byblock operation is obtained. A block of data is executed each time the CYCLE START pushbut In the automatic operation ton is activated. mode, the machine stops by turping on this switch after finishing the current block.
Notes : 1. Switching the matic operation current block. becomes DRY RUN switch during autobecomes effective on the Switching it in mm/rev mode effective on the next block. is kept effec-
SINGLE BLOCK
2.
This
switch
selects a /
whether
the or
data not.
in blocks
RUN
including (1)
is disregarded
OFF
While the switch is on, all the commands in a block programmed after a / are neglected. However, block data appearing before the / remains effective. While this switch is off, blocks including a / are executed along with other blocks. This switch is ineffective on the block under execution and blocks stored in the advance When this switch is turned reading buffer. on during an automatic operation cycle, it works on the block read after the switching on has occured.
5.1.19
DISPLAY LOCKIMACHINE
LOCK SWITCH
(2)
This switch functions to stop updating the position EXTERNAL display, or to stop move command pulses to the servos . Stop the machine to operate the switch.
OFF Usual operation is made at OFF position in both manual and automatic operation. The machine and position EXTERNAL display operate according to the command by CYCLE START operation or manual operation .
DISPLAY
OFF
LOCK
Notes :
This position is used to exclude the tool movement value from the display. Universal display is not updated, though the machine moves.
193
5.1.19
LOCK
SWITCH
( Centd
MACHINE
When the command of the next block is GOO or GO1, the tool moves automatically to the coordinate specified by the program. Then the operation is performed to block of data. according
With the switch at MACHINE LOCK, axis movement including Zero Return is inhibited. The position display is updated. M-, S-, and TThis position is selectfunctions are executed. ed to preset the display or to check the tape data.
OFF
DISPLAY LOCK
/@l
e
MACHINE LOCK
When the command of the next block is G02 or G 03 (circular interpolation) , the interpolation is performed in parallel with program command. The tool automatically returns to the target coordinate when GOO or GO1 is commanded after the interpolation.
REST OF TRAVEL COMMAND ACTUAL MOVEMENT
5.1.20
(1)
Fig. 5.2
with MANUAL
Switch On
(2)
When After
MANUAL the
ABSOLUTE operation
switch
is off
O-FF
automatic
is interrupted
(2)
The following the switch is MOO, MO1, Both its are sent
are
executed
even
if
by manual operation, the coordinate system is shifted. Therefore the tool performs the reset of the travel command and continues OperatiOn in parallel with program command,
a.
M02,
REST OF
ACTJAL /
MOVEMENT
its
BCD
codes
TRAVEL cOMMAND
TAPE COMMAND
b.
processing out.
M code)
;::&@yfl=RGOICOAMA.D
is not
(3)
Turning on the M-FUNCTION during automatic operation tive on the block after the the current block. This switch does gramming (option) not . affect
CIRGJLAR STOP
1.. INTERPOLATION
(4)
S 4-digit
pro-
Fig. 5.3 5.1.21 (1) MANUAL When ABSOLUTE SWITCH switch is on.
with MANUAL
Switch Off
MANUAL
ABSOLUTE
5.1.22
When automatic operation is restarted after interrupted by manual operation, the tool performs the rest of the command in the interrupted block from the end point of The tool moves in paralmanual operation. lel with the path specified by the program. When
operations
)! EDIT
(1) (2)
LOCKII blinks,
ERASE, Storing INSERT, of NC tape AND ALTER keys
194
5.1.23
INTERLOCK
INPUT
(INTERLOCK)
5.1.27
This
X-AXIS switch is
MIRROR for
IMAGE
SWITCH on the
+ MIRROR IMAGE
INTERLOCK INPUT is used for stopping the axis Turning movement during automatic operation. on the interlock (closed) during axis movement in automatic operation mode stops the axis with automatic operation activation lamp ( STL ) lightTurning off the interlock resumes the axis ing. motion. The interlock input does not affect the movement by manual operation.
turning
function with respect to the Z axis. When this switch is turned on, the sign of allthe Xcoor dinate command values is reversed. The mirror
image function is effective on all the Xcoordinate values including those by G50. This switch is effective ordv , while the offset function is can celled on Xcoordinate values. .x
YASiVA C LX3
B (ORIGINAL A \,------\
PROGRAMMED
POINT)
c+=--5, 1.24 G 50 POINT RETURN SWITCH + This switch is for returning the tool to the coordinate system setup point (where G50 has been Droerammed) manuallv. For its usage, refer to
~.2.~, G50 Point Return .
>
B (WHEN
S IS IN INCREMENTAL
VALUE)
\ \ \
I I
\\\
\.
MOVEMENT ON AT A
1) w
(WHEN ABSOLUTE
B IS IN VALUE)
OFF
Fig. 5.4
Turned on at Point A
5.1.28
G50
RETURN
OFF
This is a switch for enabling tool motion through the use of manual pulse generator. For the usage, refer to Paragraph, 5.2.7, Auto Mode Handle Offset.
AUTO OFF MODE SETt Q oFF
HANDLE
5, 1.25
This switch is for manually returning the tool to where the NC was switched over from the AUTO mode to the MANUAL mode in order to make intervention with manual control. For the usage, refer to 5.2.5, Manual Interruption Point Return .
5.1.29
OVERRIDE
SWITCH+
CPRN
Q
OFF
This switch is for effective cutting depth override on the specified depth of cut command D in outside rough turning cycle (G71) and face rough turning cycle (G72) between 10 and 200% at 10% increments. However, to make this switch effective, Parameter #6023D 2 should be set to 1 in advance.
5.1.26
This from refer
PRS1
OFF
195
5.1.30
(2)
FSCE
(#12184)
. . . End
of FS memory
alteration This button switch is for directly inputting measured workpiece values. When this button is pushed, the current tool values (position or external display values) are stored temporarily in the register ,the MEASURED WORKPIECE VALUE DIRECT INPUT mode is turned on, and the LED of the OF S function key flickers. At the same time, the CRT displays the tool offset value diagram. For detailed procedure, refer to 5.2.3, Measured Workpiece Value Direct Inputt . This signal closes when the FSCH closes and the data are reflected in the NC part program, and opens ag~in when the FSCH opens. (3) FSCLRE (#12233) ... End of FS data clear
This signal closes when the FSCLR closes and the stored FS data are cleared, and opens again when the FSCLR opens.
5.1.31.3 Functions Rough FS data can be programmed in the NC part program, to allow optimization of the feed override and spindle override after actual cutting. The optimization data and position in the actual cutting program can be stored in the internal memory of the NC, and reflected in the part program by closing the FS memory alteration input.
5.1.31 FS
5.1 .31.1
AUTOMATIC General
EDITING
FUNCTION
The
speed during automatic operation are stored and feed back to the NC part program to create the The feedrate (F code) and optimized program. spindle speed (S code) will hereafter be referred to as FS.
Procedure
ready
(2)
(3)
5.1.31.2.1 (1)
FSCM Close store
Input
(#13134) . . . FS editing mode to prepare memory. to
(4)
Check that FSMD is output, and start the memory operation . Change the feedrate and spindle speed for optimization, Close FSMEM completed. Repeat when the optimization is
(5) (6)
(2)
FSMEM
operation, or spindle
internal memory
(3)
FSCH
(#13136)
. . . FS
The execution value stored by FSMEM is stored in the part program. opens.
Close this signal while holding automatic to reflect the data called up during operation, automatic operation in the NC part program.
. . . FSCE . . . The
(4)
FSCLR
(#13126)
. . . FS
data
clear
This signal indicates that FSCM is closed, and it is ready for FS storage and FS memory editing. When this signal is switched from closed to open , the feeclrateand spindle speed data are canceled.
196
5.1 ,31.5
Timing
Chart
(b)
(After
editing)
FSCM (PC-NC) \N FSMD IN C-PC) / i FSMEM (PC-NC) 11 + 200ms n H Cancel Internal data
or
more
FSCH (PC-NC) A
01000; N1 G28 UO WO; N2 G50 TS1OO; N3 TO1O3; N4 G40 G97 G99 S1500 M08; N5 GOO X43.236 Z1O. M03; N6 Z1. ; N7 GO1 X39.216 Z-6.5 F.12 S1650; -F override 80%, S override 110% N8 X38.864; N9 G03 X18. Z-20,142 R19.85 F.09 -F override 60%, S override 100% N1O GO1 Z-20.5; Nll X12. Z-22.232 F,08 S1200; -F override 50%, S override 80% N12 G40 X1O, F1. ;
S1500;
(NC-PC)
Change
NC
part
program
(2)
FSCLR (PC-NC) FSCLRE (NC-PC) Clear data ,,,, /A
Edit
F and S backward
(#6008 D6 = 1)
The F and S are edited back to the block where the FSMEM closed the last time. (a) (Before editing)
01000; N1 G28 UO WO; N2 G50 TS1OO; N3 TO1O3; N4 G40 G97 G99 S1500 M08; N5 GOO X43.236 Z1O. M03; N6 Z1.; N7 GO1 X39.216 Z-6.5 F. 15;
5.1 .31.6
Example
of
FS
Editing
The following two editing pat ems are available, by switching parameter #6008 D6 . (1) (a) Edit F and S each time (Before editing)
01000; N1 G28 UO WO; N2 G50 TS1OO; N3 TO1O3: N4 G40 G97 G99 S1500 M08; N5 GOO X43.236 Z1O. M03; N6 Z1. ; N7 GO1 X39.216 Z-6.5 F.15; -F override 80%, S override 110% FSMEM closed N8 X38,864; N9 G03 X18. Z-20.142 R19.85; -F override 60%, S override 100% FSMEM closed N1O GO1 Z-20.5; Nll X12. Z-22.232; -F override 50%, S override 80% FSMEM closed N12 G40 X1 O. F1. ;
#6008 D6 = o)
-F override 80%, S override 110% FSMEM closed N8 X38.864; N9 G03 X18. Z-20.142 R19.85; -F override 60%, S override 100% FSMEM closed N1O GO1 Z-20.5; Nll X12. Z-22.232; -F override 50%, S override 80% FSMEM closed N12 G40 X1O. F1. ;
(b)
(After editing)
01000; N1 G28 UO WO; N2 G50 TS100; N3 TO1O3; N4 G40 G97 G99 S1200 M08; -S override 80% is reflected
Z1O. M03;
N8 X38.864; N9 G03 X18. Z-20.142 R19.85; N1O GO1 Z-20.5; Nll X12. Z-22.232; N12 G40 X1O. F1. ;
197
5.1
31.7
Conditions
of the Specifications
to Perform
11.
FS Editing (1)
Warning occurs if editing is performed with the FSMD closed, after the FS editing is completed.
Conditions for the FS data to be stored in the internal memory 5.2 FSMD is being output is
5. 2.1
(a) (b)
OPERATION
MANUAL
PROCEDURE
TO REFERENCE
RETURN
POINr
(c)
The execution values of the feedrate and spindle speed are stored at the rise of the FSMEM. All the data stored in (3) are canceled at the fallof the FSCM. The maximum count of storage (count of the FSMEM) is 128 times. Conditions for the FS data to be reflected in the part program FSMD is being output. (Label
With this function, the tool is returned to the reference point manually. The procedure is as follows.
(1) (2) Set
(cl)
the mode
move
or JOG.
some
(e)
Manually
(2)
distance away from the reference point. When the tool is within the range A shown below, it can be brought back to the reference point in the normal way, as described below.
(a) (b)
(3)
POINT
RETURN
When the FSCH turns open + close under the above conditions, the FS data are inserted in each block, according to the stored data.
(4)
Keep the JOG button for the return direction depressed. The tool starts to move as in the normal manual control, but the speed is decelerated at the deceleration point, and the motion ence point. stops automatically at the refer-
Notes :
1.
When the FSMEM is closed two or more times in a single block, the newer feedrate and spindle speed become effective. The FSMEM count is not counted up. When the FSMEM is closed in the subprogram, the FS data are inserted in the subprogram itself. This needs special attention, as the subprogram may also be called from other programs. The FS editing of the multiple repetitive cycle can be performed in the outer form rough cutting cycle alone. When the FSMEM is closed during constant surface speed control, the F of the closed block is changed but not the S. The cycle start button is disabled while the FSCH is closed.
(5)
POINT
(6) 2.
After the second reference point return, the operation will be the same as positioning. Parameter #601 O (M ZRNHS) permits the same operation as that when the power was first turned on.
3.
DECELERATION I
POINT
4.
5.
-i
6.
The F and S data are stored if the FSMEM closed during cutting. The S data are stored if the FSMEM during rapid feed.
is
---APEA A
IJl
i I ARE4 B
ZERO
PO IN
SIGN
7.
is closed
8.
Warning is given if the FSMEM is closed for No more data are stored 128 times or more. by closing the FSMEM. Closing the FSCM during automatic operation does n-etclose the F S MD-. Cycle start cannot be enabled while the FSMEh4 is closed.
9.
10,
198
Notes :
5.2.2
1,
As long as the power is turned on, either the manual or the automatic return to reference point can be initiated, regardless of the tool position, but the tool will not return to the reference point accurately if the tool is Be sure started from a point in the area B. to bring the tool into the area A before initiating a manual or automatic return mo tion. Once the tool is returned to the reference point, the point C is stored, and if the reference return motion is initiated from a point in as an error. the area B , this is regarded Start the reference return motion from a position in the area A. once the tool is returni?d to the reference point, it can not be further moved in the same direction unless the REFERENCE POINT RETURN switch is turned off. While the reference MACHINE LOCK switch is on, the point return function is ineffective.
With this function, a new coordinate system is set up automatically upon the return of the tool to the reference point by the manual reference point return function. The coordinates of the new origin are preset eters. The coordinate function is equivalent with the following param system set up by this to the ones set up by G 50.
2.
(1)
Parameters
for
metric
system
3.
= (2)
Parameters for inch system
4.
5.
Do not return the tool to the reference point by the manual reference point return function, while the buffer is loaded with blocks read in advance of execution, because the stored motion data will be erased by the reference point return motion. (3) Axis both
Parameter #6630
#6631
X-axis
Z-~is
~.
by parameter systems.
#6015
for
c . u % m
h
JOG f \
RAPID TRAVERSE
5,2,3 (1)
SPEED SEOUENCE
WORKPIECE tool
VALUE
DIRECT
INPUT+
POSITIONING
coordinate
memory
REFERENCE
POINT
Xz c2tY u
REFERENCE RETuRN a. POINT
With this function, coordinate data for the respective tools required for setting G50T work coordinate systems can be written into the TOOL COORDINATE MEMORY by The required processes simple processes. are Bring as follows. the tool slide to the START point.
Q OFF
b. Set
the current coordinate displayed values as (O, O). The current coordinate displayed values as meant here are values displayed as POSIon the CRT. To reset TION EXTERNAL these values, push the address key for the desired axes, and then, push the ORG key, while the data are being displayed on the With this keying, the coordinate CRT. values become (O, O) .
199
5.2.3
MEASURED
WORKPIECE
VALUE
DIRECT
INPUT
(Cont$d) c.
In the example shown above, the -x value is temporarily stored in the register , h. Measure
workpiece the outer diamter of and read the value the turned xm.
Push
the OFS
function key.
i.
the desired tool coordinate memory Select No. (one among offset Nos. 51 through 80) . For example, if the tool coordinate memory No. 51 is desired, key-in 5 , 1 and depress the CURSOR ~ keY. Then, proceed to key-in x , measure value (xm) and WR. -- The NC makes the calculation to obtain the tool coordinate data expressed by the following equation, and stores them into the specified tool coordinate memory X-axis. The writing of the required Xaxis data has been completed.
j.
The tool offset values will be displayed as shown above. However, the POSITION values in the lower part of EXTERNAL the CRT will have been changed to O for both axes, by the keying under the operation shown in b. d.
e.
1[
.
--- Equation A Repeat the same processes on the Z-axis by test turning the end face (surface B) of the workpiece with the tool.
.JOG mode. k.
coordinate data
to be
written
f. Start
the spindle, and test-turn piece circumference (surface A) tool in the MANUAL mode. the CURRENT VALUE
SURFACE
g. Push
STORE
button
(PST input) on the machine control station first, and then, retract the tool and stop the spindle. --- When the CURRENT VALUE STORE button is pushed, the displayed POSITION values are temporarily stored EXTERNAL in the register, and at the same time, the LED for t-he OFS function key starts to INPUT mode is flicker, and the DIRECT turned on.
TOOL wHEN POSITION CURRENT m 10, 0) Fig.
RP,C-ION
POSITION
-Y
5.7
[D
TEST CUTTING x nl f -1 z
b-l--+
WORK~lECE
VALUE STORE button L, Push the CURRENT again, and then, retract the tool and stop the spindle. --- The current values at the time of the button pushing are stored again in the reeister temDorarilv.
Fig. 5.6
200
m.
Measure the distance Zm between the desired work coordinate origin to the test cut surface (surface B).
Key-in Z , measured value (Zm), and WR in this sequence. - The NC performs the same calculation as before with respect to Z-axis, and stores the results in the Z-axis of the tool coordinate memory.
3.
n.
When Parameter #6020D2 is O, tool offset memory (offset Nos. 01 through 50) can be When written in the same way as above. II1, u the fOllowing cal parameter #6020D is culation equation is used only for tool offset memory (offset Nos. 01 through 50).
[S:y]
[ Current
stored
value in the
temporarily register )
-x
-(
Keyed-in value
Ztn
TOOL SLIOE < - ~;z OCCURED POSITION 91SPLAYED z Zm /- ~ Xm Xtn2 CURRENT o, SPLAy AT (O O) BY POSITION
As
can
be
seen, that
versed 4. When
from
parameters
used,
RENT VALUE STORE button is pushed, data are always calculated by Equation writing into the TOOL COORDINATE (51 - 81) and the WORK COORDINATE TEM SHIFT MEMORY (00) . 5.
+Z
MEMORY SYS-
wORK
COORDINATE
i
Fig. 5.8
EROpONT t-With the above processes, one tool has been written ordinate memory. 0. all the data into the tool for co (2)
When the CURRENT VALUE STORE button is pushed, the OF S function is automatically turned on, its LED blinks, and the tool offset value is displayed.
Automatic
writing
into
tool
offset
memory
Repeat the processes e. through the tools to write their data into coordinate memory. After writing all the RESET key to cancel mode. tool the
o. the
P.
When Parameter #6020D 2 is set to 1, tool offset values are automatically written into the tool offset memory by the following processes. The tool offset values written in this case are distance between the position of the reference tool and the tool under consideration. Bring the reference +x reference point by tool to any desired manual control.
With the above processes, Xtn and Ztn values for all the tools as shown below are stored in the tool coordinate memory. The reason for this is that the calculations have been performed. Xtn=Xm-(-x)=Xm+x Ztn=Zm-(-z)-Zm+z following
Notes : 1. The above example The method using known dimensions is based on test cutting. a gauge or a workpiece of is also convenient. cutting of contact area, key-in the
=t!z
REFERENCE TOOL REFERENCE POINT +Z
2.
When tool positions for test are on the minus coordinate measured values in negative.
201
+x
--- The displayed POSITION values in the lower area of been changed to (O, O) .
the
k
Fig, 5.10
r7-
REFERENCE TOOL
d.
e.
offset
value
should
written
f.
Bring the selected tool manually to the reference point, push the CURRENT VALUE STORE button, and retract the tool. --The pushing ister. current values are temporarily at the stored time of button in the reg-
Wc \ i-J
Push the position, CURRENT and then, VALUE retract STORE button the tool. keying, in place at that Then, make the following ones given in g. above. of the
g.
Select a itool offset No, for writing among 01 through 50) . For example, to write into tool offset I1oz,!! key-in O , 2 , and CURSOR Then, x, Z , go on keying O, and WR WR as follows. . . . (for tion . . . (for tion
(one No, ~ .
El
~,
measured ~ measured
value value
(Xm) (Zm )
, ,
m m
h.
0 , and
where Xmt and Zm are distances with signs from the 1st reference point to the 2nd reference point. In the example shown above, these values have minus signs. With the above processes, the distances between the reference tool and a tool having different point direction are stored in the specified tool offset memory.
--Now, the control performs the following calculation separately for X and Z axes, and stores the results to the specified tool off set memory.
5.2.3,1
Tool Setter
Function
coordinate the tactile the tactile memory sensor sensor
[S:gd]
Current
values
temporarily~
in register
writing into the tool simply by equipping the tool nose touch operation.
-[
work
when
shift
However, since no value is keyed in the above process, the current values tempo rarily stored in register only are stored as tool offset values . i. By repeating the processes i. through g.
function various
with all the tools, their tool offset values can be automatically written. After com pleting the processes, push the RESET key. The values written by the above processes are all differential distances between the reference tool and the actual tools in consideration. For tools with which tool nose directions are different from that of the reference tool, pre pare a 2nd reference point as shown below, and bring the tool to that point manually. Notes :
202
5.2.3,2
Parameters
function, automatic parameters operation.
(3)
Move
the
presetter
down.
When using the tool setter must be set in the NC for Set the distance sensor from the (1) #661[1 #6619 #6620 Setting ,.. .. . ... of each projected
The tool coordinate memory number corresponding to the currently selected number is automatically selected and displayed. Note that automatic if parameter #6020 (4) Select the tool selec~ion cannot D3 is IO. II measured. be
tool
made
parameters Position where contact point XP + turns on. (diameter value ) Position where contact point XP - turns on (diameter value) Position where contact point ZP + turns on. ZP-! with sign. Set the distance from 11 Position where contact point ZP- turns on. Set O so that this point becomes the of the tactile temporary Z 01 point sensor. mm (metric in. (inch input) input) to be If the tool coordinate memory number is not automatically selected, move the cursor to the desired tool coordinate memory number using the cursor key and page key.
#662;.
,..
Note : When parameter #6020 D3 is 1 and the tool coordinate memory number is automatically selected, manual memory number selection using the cursor key and page key is prohibited. (5) Contact the tool nose on XP+
manual operation.
or
II XP11
by
Itl!!
,: 0.001 0.0001
WORK SYSTEM
MAFGIN . vk~NEzERO
The fesd stops and the buzzer sounds when the tool nose touches the sensor, to automatically write the value operated by the following expression into the tool coordinate IIx!! where the cursor iS Set. memory [Tool #6618 value coordinate or #66191 when the memory value ] = [Parameter - [POSITION (MACHINE) tactile sensor turned ON]
Xp +
-gill
+ zP WORK COORDINATE SETTING SYSTEM xP AMOUNT x 46618 $6620 U6619 1+ 0 PROJECTED ZERO POINT =
The value of the offset memory X1! of coordinate memory number 50 is then O. 1 This occurs only when both D3 and D6 of parameter #6020 are 1.
Note : When the sensor touches the tool nose, axis interlock is applied on the corresponding direction, to prohibit the move.
(6)
t)
(PARAMETER
86621
O)
PROGRAM POINT
ZERO
Contact manual
nose
on
! ZP+l!
or
I!zp-11 by
Fig.
5.
10A
Tool
setter
As in (4) , the value operated by the following expression is automatically written into the tool coordinate memory 1! Z!J where the cursor is set,
Coordinate
5,2.3.3 Memory
Automatic
Writing
into
the
Tool
The setting amount of the work coordinate system is automatically written into the tool coordinate memcmy, by the following operation, (1) Perform POSITION (MACHINE) (2) Turn It to on manual zero point return.
The value of the offset memory Zif of coordinate memory number 50 is then !!O. 1! This occurs only when both D3 and D6 of parameter #6020 are 1.!
(ABSOLUTE) , POSITION becomes O. the measurement switches m O,S a lamp, mode to to the blink. ~tch. ~ n function,
(7) (8)
Perform
(4) ,
(5) , and
(6)
on
all
tools to the
used. zero
presetter
(9)
measurement of the ~ n
mode lamp
switch. stops.
blinking
203
5.2.3.4
Automatic
Writing
into
the
Work
Coordinate
(6)
Depress
the PST
switch.
The Z-axis work coordinate system shift amount can automatically be written by the following operation. This operation is to be performed after writing into the tool coordinate memory is completed. (1) Turn The on the measurement m ~ lamp blinks, n mode switch. (7) (8) When doing this immediately after writing into the tool coordinate memory, perform the following process, after Par. 4.2. 3.3 (3) to (8).
(2)
The buzzer sounds, and the value operated by the following expression is automatically written in the work coordinate system shift memory Z. [Work coordinate system shift amount t Z ] = -[value of tool coordinate memory Z selected by the cursor] - [Value of POSITION (MACHINE) when PSTr is depressed] Release the tool. Turn
The
mode .
switch.
blinking
Check that the offset screen displays the OFFSET (WORK - SHIFT) screen.
Select cutting the tool on the that can workpiece. perform end face
Performing work coordinate system setting B by the above operation sets coordinate system where the end face of the workpiece is the zero point. Shifting the program zero point from the end face of the workpiece can be performed as follows. Rewrite the value of Z in the work coordinate system shift memory, using 11 w. 11 Enter the distance from the program zero point to be shifted to the end face of the workpiece (margin) with sign, following W. The entered numeral is added to the work The sign is coordinate system shift memory. determined by #6018 D6. When #6018 D6 = O Workpiece sign) =1 Workpiece sign)
(3)
When manual cursor selection (parameter #6020 D3 = 01 ) is selected, move the cursor to the tool coordinate memory number corresponding to the selected tool. ~ ~ After setting the cursor, depress the n function key once more. The offset screen will display the OFFSET (WORK - SHIFT) screen.
Note :
The
OFFSET
(WORK
- SHIFT)
position 00
shift - Margin
(W with
I
OFFSET
Cursor
(WEAR)
The value of the work coordinate system shift Iu 1! in the same x!! is rewritten by memory !!
manner. position SHIFT) position 51 01 When #6018 D6 = O Workpiece sign) =1 Workpiece sign) shift + Margin (U with
I
OFFSET
Cursor
(TOOL Cursor
shift
Margin
(U
with
The
above.
This function cannot be used when the tool setter writing mode is selected in the automatic cursor selection specification.
(4) (5) Chuck the workpiece of to be the machined, a little by
workpiece
WHEN
#601 O DO = 1 I
WHEN x+ $6018
#6010
DO = O
x #6018 D6 REVERSED 1: I , +U
for
the
work
D6 REVERSED
work
coordinate
1
u +U I
, u
I+ u 11
Ut-. +U
performed,
G50
T K _U
-A-
#6018 D6 O 1 U MARGIN ~-~ w ~ w REvERSED
Offset amounts of Nos. 41 to 50 are used for the work coordinate system offset, but the offset can be made by Nos. 01 to 50.
R&HO DO X-axis
zero
point return
direction
1 : Negative O : Positive
5.2.3.8
Offset Screen
Display
Fig.
5.10
B Example system
writing
into
the
work
The offset screens as shown in Figs. 5. 10C, 5. 10D and 5. 10E are displayed by adding the tool setter function,
coordinate
5.2.3.5
Coordinate
System Setting (G 50 X
.)
Parameter setting can be made to determine whether to add the work coordinate system shift when setting the coordinate system by G50.
When;#6018 D7 = O The work added, D7 = 1 The work not added.
coordinate
system
shift
is
When#6018
coordinate
system
shift
is
588-355
5.2.3.6
Position (EXTERNAL)
(EXTERNAL) manual zero POWer #6005
O Settin9
can point be set return to O after
(work
coordinate
system
shift
screen )
the
parameter
D4 to
used
this by in
The O setting is also performed :functi,~n. commanding M53 for G51 return point setting Always command M53 alone. the program.
5.2.3.7
(1)
Work Coordinate
Command G50 TCICI XX; T T
System
Setting B
588-356
Fig.
5.10 )
D 2nd
screen
(tool
offset
shift
memory
display
system
offset
screen
L
The system following by
system
setting
the
coordinate
giving
command.
[Coordinate system setting value] = [POSITION (MACHINE) value] + [Tool coordinate memory value] + [Work coordinate system offset value] [Work coordinate system shift amount] Offset memory number .. ... .. .. ... ..
+
588-357
(tool
coordinate
system
memory
205
5.2.3.9 5.2.3.10
The
Function
However, this function is effective only when parameter #6020 D3 is 1. When the tool coordinate memory is automatically selected, memory number selection using the cursor or page key is prohibited.
When the tool coordinate memory automatically selected, move the tool coordinate memory number, cursor key and page key. (5) (6) is not cursor to using the
offsets and work coordinate system shifts can also be written automatically into the memory in machines without the tactilesensor, by manual operation. function allows easy preparatory upon tool exchange.
This
operation
the
In this function, the contents of the tool coordinate memory and the work coordinate system shift differ from those of the conventional I!tool setter function with tactilesensor. The contents of the conventional tool coordinate memory are changed from the differentialdistance from the tactilesensor to the selected tool nose, to the differentialdistance from the workpiece end face to the tool nose. The work coordinate system shift amount is changed from the shift from the projected zero point to the shift from the workpiece end face. However, the theory This not changed. setter function. of the function coordinate is called system has the Inew tool
of
the
the spindle, do nothing while releasing only the the above of the diameter setting tool of is the not
(7) (8)
If the
K
T (9) Then
**
coordinate
memory
El
II ,
operation, diameter
! M workpiece
enter
II ~~ a
coordinate memory 5,2,3.11 Writing into the Tool Coordinate Memory calculation.
(Tool coordinate
The amount in the tool coordinate memory can be written by the following manual operation, with or without the measuring tool for the in-machine setter. The tool coordinate
memory amount written is the differential distance from end face to the tool nose. on the this
memory
X ) =
(Workpiece ! X IIvalue)
once. with the Xaxis.
10)
11)
Cut
the
end
face
of
the
workpiece
occasion, workpiece
12)
enter
EEmto memory
5.2,3.12 (1)
(2) ( 3)
Writing
automatically T! z f! by the
Perform manual
Mount the
(Tool coordinate memory machine ! Z!f value) ( 13) Perform the above the X and Z axes
(Position
Set 1 in the tool coordinate memory writing mode setting (6001 D6) . This enables the The screen then automatically writing mode. ~ switches to the o~s function OFFSET a (TOOL cause the the SHIFT) B screen ~~ lamp (Fig. to blink 5.1 OF) , to .
( 14)
Set 101 in the tool coordinate memory writing mode setting (#6001 D6) . The writing mode ~,s ~nc;l;d, to end the blinking of the amp ,
0!=s
a Note : writing return The setting mode is not is performed of the tool coordinate memory effective if no zero point after the power is supplied.
(4)
Select
cutting tool.
The tool coordinate memory corresponding to the currently selected tool post number (tool post number entered in #1317) is automatically selected.
206
5,2.3,13
Writing
the Z-axis
Work Coordinate
System
(8)
a.
Shift Amount 5.2.3.14 (1) (2) (3) Writing Procedure zero point return.
coordinate system
When the program zero point needs further shifting (for example, when there is clearance from the workpiece end face), the work coordinate system shift memory of both the X and Z axes can be rewritten by MDI operation. Calculate the shift amount,
depress the
K
u
or
K
W
key,
and
mode) . It automatically switches to TOO of the IIoFFSET (WORK - SHIFT) screen of the
~~ B key I B function, ,, lamp to to cause blink the function
input the numeral, to add the entered value to the currently displayed value. The sign for the addition is determined by #6018 D6. When #6018 D6 = O Workpiece sign ) #6018 D6 = 1 Workpiece
sign) The value of the is work coordinate by system shift the
shift + Margin
(W with
When
shift - Margin
(W with
rewritten
u
U Margin
in
When
#6018
shift
+ Margin
(U
with
shift
(U
with
588 355
system the
shift
display once.
screen
b. The
wR
numeral
keys
are
recaps
Z-axis,
while
releasing
normally effective. Fine adjustment of the margin can adding or subtracting with the ,!
(6) (7)
margin
of
the
workpiece.
n
w
be u
made or
by
enter
agin
K
the
with
argin
E system shift
(#6C101 D5) (turn off the measurement 2 key in conversational mode) , to cancel the writing mode and to end the blinking of the ~ m
(lo)
lamp.
Perform manual zero point return after changing the work coordinate system shift memory, to automatically set the work coordinate system. Note that the work coordinate setting by manual zero point return is not performed when parameter #6011 DO = 1. (When the tool coordinate memory number follows the lower order two digits of T**$$, refer to the <Instruction manual for coordinate system setting>.)
207
52.3.14
Writing
Procedure
(Centd )
Note: The work coordinate system shift memory value writing mode setting is invalid if a single zero point return is not performed after power
SU@Y .
automatic emergency
cycle
by
(2)
Z-AXIS SHIFT WORK SYSTEM AMOUNT Z-AXIS TOOL MEMORY -i 1 I I COORDINATE COORDINATE VALUE
Turn
Retract
on the MANUAL
(3)
control.
(4) Eliminate the cause of the machining proand make the machine cess interruption, and workpiece ready for operation.
D-
1
l
(5) (6)
X-AXIS TOOL COORDINATE AMOUNT / MEMORY
Turn
Turn
RETURN
JOG
switch on.
mode.
(7)
Push one or two JOG keys that correspond to the required return motion direction among the four (+X, -X, +Z, Z) . The tool moves at a preset speed towards the G 50 point, and stops at the G 50) point.
Turn off the G50 point RETURN switch.
Fig.
5.1OG
Coordinate
system
(8)
With this function, the tool can be brought back to the start point of the program (where coor dinate system was set up) , from any position along the automatic operation tool locus. This is convenient when an automatic machining cycle is interrupted due to tool breakage, etc. and, after replacing the tool, etc ., the automatic machining cycle is to be started from the begin :nin g.
Turn on the AUTO mode, RESET key on the MDI (In the TAPE mode, reset leading end. ) push the automatic
( 10)
to restart
the
Notes : 1. When the tool is at the G50 point, control is not effective unless the RETURN switch is turned off. JOG motion G50 POINT
2.
The point where a coordinate system setup process has been executed latest is regarded as the G50 point. Therefore, in the following cases, the tool will not return to the start point of the machining cycle by this function.
a.
Fig. 5.11
OF FAULT (EMERGENCY STOP1
b. When the ORG key is pushed after the interruption of the automatic cycles.
c. When a coordinate automatically . system has been set up
208
5.2.5
MANUAL Interruption
pOINTRETLJRN+
Notes : 1 When the tool is at the interruption point, the JOG keys are ineffective, unless the MANUAL INTERRUPTION POINT RETURN switch is turned off. When the RESET key on the MDI & CRT panel is pushed or an external reset input is received after the switching from the AUTO to MANUAL Mode, the MANUAL INTERRUPTION POINT RETURN function becomes ineffective thereafter. When the tool has been manually retracted after a switching from the AUTO to MANUAL mode, then, the switch is returned to AUTO again, and thereafter, the switch is set again to MANUAL for manual tool motion, the point where the mode switch has been switched from AUTO to MANUAL last is regarded as the INTERRUPTION point.
With this function, automatic machining cycles can be interrupted and the tools can be retract ed for workpiece measurement, chip removal, etc. , and then, the tools can be brought back to the interruption point.
RETURN MOTION TO
2,
INTERRuPTION
POINT
L
3.
L, \ ~--
~
AUTO-MANUAL SWITCH
MANUAL P RETRACTION
POINT
The (1)
procedure
for
this
function
is
as follows. cycle by
5. 2.6
PROGRAM RESTART+
Interrupt the automatic machining i~ny of the following methods. Turning Pushing Turn Retract Measure perform on on the the the the the any SINGLE HOLD mode. manual control. BLOCK key
switch
FEED
With this function, when automatic machining cycles are interrupted due to tool breakage, chip entanglement, etc. , by the EMERGENCY STOP button, the automatic machining cycles can be restarted, not from the beginning of the program, but (1) or a. from the beginning of the interrupted block.
MANUAL tool by
OPERATION
PROCEDURE cycle by
Interrupt the automatic machining one of the following two functions. Emergency Resetting stop
the mode is switched from AUTO the spindle conditions, etc. For these details, refer to manual of the machine the machine builder. INTERRUPTION tool
(i) (ii)
POINT b,
When the machine has been stopped by the emergency stop function, turn on the servo power supply and reset the ALARM code to make further machine motion possible. Turn tool . on the MANUAL mode and retract the
(6) (7)
JOG
mode. c.
l?ush the relevant one or two of the JOG keys (+X, -X, +Z, -Z) . The tool moves ~owards the interruption point at the pre Set speed, and stops upon arrival at the interruption point. Turn off the MANUAL INTERRUPTION I?OINT RETURN switch. Turn the AUTO mode, START key to restart ing cycle. and push the CYCLE the automatic machin-
Replace the broken tool, remove chips, etc. to prepare the machine for further operation. When the may have tool is replaced, to be corrected. the offset values
d. (8)
Move the tool by manual to the start point of the However, with a program
it
(9)
K H 3 K is used, the tool need not be returned to the start point, and may be left at the position where chip removal, etc. has been made.
209
5. 2.6
e.
PROGRAM RESTART + (Centd) on the AUTOMATIC on the PROGRAM mode. RESTART switch. &
(iii)
Turn Turn
f.
.g.
Display of allthe M codes and the number of M code commands programmed between the leading end of the restart program to the block specified by Q -22 . However, if there are more than 28 M codes , those 28 M codes immediately next Q T] .. L . in to the block specified by the program are displayed. Display of the last programmed T command and the one before preceding the block ,. specified by Q _ _ _ .. Display of the last programmed up to the block specified by S command Q [~--;;
in the last
h . Where the automatic operation is under the control of a tape, set the leading end of the tape to the tape reader.
i.
(iv)
& MDI
(v)
Note : M and
programmed displayed ly before one the
T commands are displayed sequence. Therefore, the is the block one programmed by specified
immediate-
Q cl c [~ ~
Turn
off
the
PROGRAM
RESTART
switch.
The NC starts the preparation from the starting end of the program to the block specifi~d by Q . Up~n ~he completion of the preparation, the CRT display changes to
~:he-PROGRAM RETURN -page function to display the program of the POS restart data.
k.
Command required M, S, and T obtained them from the displayed program restart data as follows. Turn on the MDI mode. key on the the required CRT M,
(i) (ii)
Push the PROG function & MDI panel, and input S and T commands. Push the CYCLE the M, S and T Push the POS
(iii)
and
execute
(iv)
function
on the
CRT pro-
&
MDI panel to revert the CRT to the gram restart data display . Check the conditions of the machine
again.
1. m.
Fig. 5.12
Turn
on the
AUTOMATIC
mode
again.
Display of program
(i)
restart data
(ABSOLUTE) position
Push the CYCLE START key. The tool moves to the PROGRAM RESTART position displayed in the (INCREMENT) column, by moving at JOG speed first along the X -axis, and then along the Z-axis, and then, re start the machining cycle from the block immediately following the block specified by nmmr 7-QLJLJLI .. .
Supplementary
(ii)
explanation
No. as for the block _ C is used several input the command
(INCREMENT) : Display of the distance from the current tool position to the end -= . point of the block specified by Q L L,[..
If the same
210
Notes : 1. Before letting the tool move to the PROGRAM RESTART position by motion along the X and Z axes in succession, be sure to check the tc,ol for freedom from interference with the workpiece. If there is a possibility of ference with the workpiece,
3.
While the NC is making the preparation for PROGRAM RESTART after the keying of
Q,~.3C, CURSOR ~ , do not push the FEED HOLD key, turn the MODE switch, or make other manipulations, If these manipulations are made, make the PROGRAM RESTART data display keying again.
When the tool offset values tool, is, are changed to
tc,ol in the MANUAL mode to a position from where it can move without interference, be fen-e bringing the tool to the PROGRAM RESTART position in the AUTOMATIC MODE.
accordingly.
If the PROGRAM RESTART switch is on, the CYCLE START key is ineffective. In principle, do not move the machine with the MACHINE LOCK switch turned on, before and after pushing the PROGRAM RESTART switch. If the block SOR ~ is displayed, specified by Q, K K 3 K , CURnot found, alarm code 120 is
6.
7.
turn on the
MAN-
UAL ABSOLUTE switch. If this switch is not turned on, the PROGRAM RESTART position will be shifted by the distance covered by the For the manual motion remanual motion. on the workpiece auired to avoid tool coflision - described above, the following proced~re as is recommended. (i) ( ii) Turn Push tool (iii) Check on the the along the SINGLE BLOCK key switch.
to move
Only those M and T commands which are output to the outside are displayed as PROGRAM RESTART data. Those M commands (M90 - M109) and T commands which are internally processed are not displayed. Although not common with lathe operation, sometimes the power supply is turned off after interrupting the automatic cycle, and is turned on again before restarting the In this case, be sure to automatic cycle. return the tool to the reference point once, before starting the PROGRAM RESTART process. In this case, be sure to start the PROGRAM RESTART process even with those programs in which work coordinate system is used. During the time after the display of the PROGRAM RESTART data till the start of the return motion to the PROGRAM RESTART position, the machine cannot be moved in the If the machine is returned to the MDI mode. reference position, alarm code 124 will be displayed. Blocks finish
Q,[~rTl~,
9,
CYCLE the
START
the
X-axis.
position. key
to move
(iv) Push the CYCLE START tool along the Y-axis. (v)
Check the RESTART tool position position.
the 10.
for
the
PROGRAM
(vi) Turn
off the SINGLE BLOCK push the CYCLE START key the machining cycle.
to
? . .
If a reset process is executed after the display of the PROGRAM RESTART data by the keying of Q, u rlZ ~ , CURSOR ~ the data is cancelled. When this happens, make the PROGRAM RESTART data display keying ag ain.
11.
programs by
for
12,
When the block in tool nose radius compensation is specified by Q, four digits, and key, the machine cannot be CURSOR moved in the MDI mode after the display of the PROGRAM START data, restart from the block before In this case, making tool radius compensation.
211
5,2. 7 AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET With this function, the handwheel for the manual pulse generator can be turned during an automatic operation cycle under the control of a tape,
LMD1 or memory, to superimpose certain feed distances to the programmed feed distances , With workpiece mounting errors , etc . this function, can be compensated. For this function, ations are as follows . the required manual oper-
5.
lne Au Lu kluu~ H4iLvuLk uh kbk,l morlon - along the respective axes can be made in effective by parameter settings .
... --.,
------
., ---------
X-axis
~6022 Do
(HOFSX)
1
0
-------x6022 D,
(HOFSZ)
I 1
(1)
MODE
HANDLE
OFFSET
Z-axis
o-
(2)
Select the axis along which motion is desired by the HANDLE AXIS SELECT switch. --- If the control is provided with the SIMULTANEOUS 2 AXES CONTROL MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR , the manual motion can be made along the two axes simultaneously. Select the movement distance per graduation of the handwheel with the MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch. With this switch, the move distance per graduation can be select ed among 1, 10 and 100 pulses. When the handwheel is turned, the tool mo tion along the axis selected in process (2) is superimposed on the programmed feed distance .
(3)
When parameter #6022D7 (HOFSMV) is set to 1, the motion by the AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET function is limited to the interpolation motion in automatic operation or temporary stop of interpolation .
(4)
. (o [a
Turning Turning CW: CCW:
HAN DLEt HANDLE x AXISt (0 y
MANUAL MULTIPLY ?, I(JL x !111)0 x 10 xl @ x lU 000 Y 10{1Uoo AUTO MODE HANDLE OFF SETt t? oFF
PULSE
Fig. 5 13
Notes 1.
: During traverse, motion during the time the the AUTO tml is moving in rapid MODE HANDLE OFFSET It is effective only motion. MODE HANDLE
is ineffective. interpolation
2.
3.
While an interrupt input (STLK) is on, the AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET motion is ineffective . The move distance by the HANDLE OFFSET function the display of POSITION POSITION ABSOLUTE. AUTO MODE is superimposed EXTERNAL
4.
on and
6. OPERATION
6.1 INSPECTION BEFORE TURNING ON POWER
PROCEDURE
6.3 MANUAL OPERATION1
on the machine JOG, STEP can be oper-
Make sure that the front and rear doors of the control are firmly closed. The control employs a totally-enclosed, dustproof enclosure to shut out If the door is open, lock it by surrounding air. turning two door locks. In addition, inspect the machme manual. referring to the machine tool builders
When the MODE SELECT switch control station is set to RAPID, or HANDLE position, ated manually. Operation (1) (2) Set in RAPID MODE the machine
SELECT
6.2
(1)
TURNING ON POWER
Check to see that for the control. Depress the main power is supplied (3)
range:
100% - 50% -
25% - FO
(2)
the POWER ON pushbutton on the power is operators panel ~ and the control supplied and then the cooling fans will start running. Make sure that air blows out from the exhaust ports of the upper side of the control. Depress turn on machine lights . the POWER ON pushbutton again to the servo power supply. When the is ready to op~rate, READY lamp
Push JOG button to select the axis and direction of movement. The machine moves
button
1 Manual operation is defined as the operation in RAPID, JOG, STEP, or HANDLE. Operations in JOG (1) (2) Set MODE Mode switch to JOG.
(3)
SELECT
(4)
If READY lamp does not light, detect and eliminate the cause according to the alarm Refer to 4. 3.9 DISPLAYcode displayed. ING ALARM CODE.
Adjust the feedrate to the desired setting with JOG FEEDRATE switch (Up to 32 steps) . Push JOG button to select the axis and direcThe machine moves at the tion of movement. specified speed while the JOG button de pressed. Mode
switch amount per MULTIPLY setting range) to STEP. step using switch.
(3)
Operation in STEP
(1) (2)
Set
MODE
SELECT
~.ool-o.
100.0
ol-o.l
mm/step
- 1.0-
lo.ol.o-
Inch:
0.0001-
0.1-
(3)
Depress JOG button to select the axis and direction of movement. The machine moves by the move amount per step each time the button is depressed.
213
6.3
Parameter
#6006D 1, D 0
Operation
The control with HANDLE operation described below. (1) (2) (3) Set MODE the SELECT axis with
switch
Select
HANDLE
the control is equipped with leadscrew compensation function or the stored limit function, set this parameter to !ll .11 With the parameter #6006Dl, DO set to !11 II a return to the reference point is required before starting cycles, alarm codes ( 001 - 002 reference point return incomplete ) are displayed, if the CYCLE START key is pushed without making a reference point return immediately after turning on the Be sure to perform the manpower supply. ual operation for return to reference point.
MANUAL
0.001(mm per
0,01-
0.1
graduation)
Inch:
0.0001(inch per
0.001 - 0.01
graduation) IIXI()()()O1! is regarded as
FOR AUTOMATIC
Note :
MX1OOOJ! or
X1 OO.
(4) Rotate HANDLE dial
positive
direction.
To start to operate the machine in the automatic mode, the machine must be brought to the start point, after the application of the power supply. The panel operation required for this varies with programs as shown below. For details, refer to the operation manual of the machine tool builder. (1) When G28 RETURN) (AUTOMATIC is used REFERENCE POINT
direc-
6.4 PREPARATION FOR STORED LEADSCREW ERROR COMPENSATION AND STORED STROKE LIMITt (1)
Return to Reference Point
Where G 28 is written in the beginning of the program, move the tool manually to a point a short distance away from the reference point. If the start point is on the side of the reference point from the traverse speed reducing point, CYCLE EXAMPLE EOR NOO1 NO02 (2) When POINT ; G28 G50 UO X.. WO Z.. ; . ; TO REFERENCE the NC START : causes overtravel key is pushed. when the
With an NC equipped with the stored leadscrew error compensation or the stored either of the following stroke limit functions, two reference point return motions must be performed after switching on the power supply and before starting automatic opera tion. a. b. Manual Execute return G28 to reference UO WO ; point in the (See MDI 5.2.1) mode.
MANUAL function
RETURN is used
This procedure is to teach the reference since doing so is nec point to the control, essary because both leadscrew error com pensation and stored stroke check are performed with reference to the reference point
Where G28 is not programmed, and the coordinate set up point is the reference point, bring the tool manually to the reference point before starting the automatic cycle operation. Refer to 5.2.1, Manual Return to Reference Point. EXAMPLE EOR NOO1 ; G50 X.. . 2.. . ; :
214
(3)
to refer
6.6
(1)
programmed
coordinate
system with workpiece as a basis without using the reference point, proceed as follows : a. Select the workpiece. Position (reference reference tool and set the test (2)
the
Z-axis surface)
(3)
switches on the control to the proper positions. SELECT BLOCK TRAVERSE switch toggle switch
station
of
c,
RATE
OVERRIDE
d.
Position the X-axis at the outer surface the workpiece by manual operation. Then the control executes cutting outer surface if necessary.
of
switch MANUAL OPTIONAL OPTIONAL DRY RUN ABSOLUTE BLOCK STOP toggle toggle SKIP (MO1) switch & JOG FEEDRATE switch switch switch
toggle toggle
e.
Turn on MACHINE LOCK and set the dimensions of the work outer surface as the current position display of the Xaxis. Then the center is determined as X-axis coordinate point. Turn off MACHINE LOCK. (4)
FEEDRATE switch
OVERRIDE
f. g.
Set the punched tape onto the tape In MEM mode, this operation is not Depress RESET key on the Then LSK will be illuminated will be rewound.
reader. required.
(5)
(6)
Depress CYCLE START button Cycle Start to the system. When chine FEED
to
give
(7)
the Feed Hold is required for during the system operation, HOLD button.
the madepress
(8)
If the unexpected event occurs in the system, immediately depress EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton.
215
AUTO-
6.8
(1)
AUTOMATIC
Set Write tion, Refer Depress
OPERATION
SELECT
IN M131MODE
,
MODE
switch to MD I operation
Stop the automatic operation temporarily by depressing FEED HOLD pushbutton or by setting SINGLE BLOCK switch to ON position. Record the current positions of each axis on a paper using the current position dis play operation. Set MODE SELECT switch to manual opera tion mode (HANDLE, JOG or RAPID) , and the machine can be manually operated. Return the machine ed positions. manually to the record-
(2)
(2)
(3)
and auto in MD I
(3)
INTERRUPTING
AUTOMATIC
(4)
(5)
Set MODE SELECT switch to the interrupted automatic-mode (TAPE, MD I or MEM) . Depress machine CYCLE START pushbutton , and the will resume the automatic operation.
To modify the block data after interrupting oP eration in TAPE or MEM mode, the following operation should be done after interrupting the operation.
(1) Turn
(6)
on
SINGLE
BLOCK
switch,
and
the
Notes : 1. Where MODE SELECT out depressing FEED switch is changed withHOLD pushbutton. (2)
operation is interrupted after the completion of the block being executed. At the same time, the next blocks of data may be read in advance, Display the data on CRT DISPLAY ing to 4. 3.3 WRITING IN BLOCKS DISPLAYING CONTENTS BY MDI it, accord AND and check
the automatic-mode (TAPE, MDI or is changed to the manual-mode (HANJOG or RAPID) , the machine rapidly down and stops . the
(3)
b . When the automatic-modes are changed machine is stopped at the block end. 2.
Write the data referring to 4.3.3.1 Multiblock Writing and Operation in MDI Mode. the CYCLE Execute the data by depressing START button. Set back MODE rupted automatic Return tion. SINGLE SELECT switch to the intermode (TAPE or MEM) . BLOCK switch to OFF posi-
Where the machine is restarted by depressing CYCLE START button , the tool path shifted due to manual operation willbe changed by ON-OFF operation of MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch. Refer to 6.1.21 MANUAL ABSOLUTE In manual operation mode, when SWITCH. the CYCLE START button is depressed after writing F, M, S, T or B+ code by use of the same procedure as that of ,MDI operation, the command becomes effective and is executed as soon as written. T his procedure is used to add new data to an active buffer , How ever, MOO, MO1, M02, M30 and M90 to M99 cannot be written.
(4)
(5)
(6)
TAPE
Notes : 1. Writing data by MDI cannot be tool radius compensation modes because 2. two-three blocks are executed in ( G41 - G44) read ahead.
Writing data by MDI cannot be performed in canned cycle modes (G70 - G76) . The ma chine may not operate properly. Excepting in tool radius compensation and canned cycle modes, MDI opeation is possible.
3.
216
6.10
(1)
OFF POWER
is at standby extinguished.
(2)
Check to see that NC If alarm ed on CRT. the causes of displayed Refer eliminate them. DISPLAY. Inspect the tool builders
ALARM is not indicatis displayed, detect alarm code and to 4.3.9, ALARM CODE
(3)
to the
machine
6.11 TURNING
(1) Depress turn off
OFF POWER
EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton the servo power supply. to
(2)
Depress POWER OFF pushbutton on the operators panel to turn off the control power supply . Cut trol. off the main power supply from the con-
(3)
217
6.11 TURNING
OFF POWER
(Centd )
door
q ,<, .,
1.
! : ;loNDGEL~EBL;;~K I tc
on
r
F
I
$-
Check
of READY
lamp
on
START
on
+-----,
. lvlanual
on
RETURN
TO
CE J
REFEREii
operation or G28
f-
- - .
i
I
L
;<, +-
SINGLE
BLOCK
on
INTERVENTION MDI
.
J
OF
NC
tape setting
1
STORING AND ] EDITING NC ! TAPE, PROGRAMI !NO. SEARCH i
CYCLE
START
on
+-
Check
if NC
ALARM
is indicated.
I TION OFFSET
REk
~
~
.
and
.
:p::E~TART
off
Nc alarm Off
t
POWER OFF SUPPLY
_l
. EIvIERGENCY STOP
then
on
POWER
OFF on
Fig. 6.1
Operating
Procedure
218
NUMBERS
Parameter following
classified
in
the
Parameter
numbers
I Parameter Parameter
=L4v!=ELoN I
Toggle switch on mschi ne
I
1
OFF
OFF
ON
I
1
ON
:a=m
#6220 to #6344
#6600 to #6643
Parameter
I _
D7
D6 ~
. ___L
#8000 to #8255
BUZON
1:
D7
De
D5
~ Da
D3
D>
, D, 1
~ m O:
PSTMD1
1:
.
o:
AFLT 1:
o:
o:
ABST 1:
Turns Turns
o:
With PST2 mode designation No PST2 mode is designation : D4 handle handle interpolation interpolation function. function.
o:
DRNT
1:
Turns Turns
o:
Enable Disable D3
o:
BDTT
Turns Turns
o:
SLT
Enable Disable 3: D2
CMOS CMOS
spare spare
area area
check check
function. function.
1:
o:
DLKT 1:
Turns Turns
on off
Block Block
Delete Delete
function function.
1:
o:
Effective Ineffective
on
the third Stored Stroke Limit. on the third Stored Stroke Limit. by G38
D2 Turns Turns on Display off Display D1 Turns Turns on Machine off Machine Do Turns Turns on Single off Single Block Block function function. . Lock Lock function. function Lock Lock function. function.
The value of limit automatically changes or G39 command in part program. SLT 1: 2: D1
o:
MLKT 1:
o:
.
Effective Ineffective
on the second Stored Stroke Limit, on the second Stored Stroke Limit. by G36
o:
SBKT 1:
The value of limit automatically changes or G37 command in part program. INCHMM 1: Do inch input increment. metric input increment.
o:
o:
Selects Selects
Notes: 1. settings These switches. When each are for setting internal toggle
2.
switch
setting
A1
NUMBERS
(Centd)
COV21 Covll 0 1 . .. 0 Cut Depth Override
06
D5
D1 ._
-l
code. code.
COV 16 I
COV 8 I ~ COV41
ISOEIA
D7 out tape out tape code code with with 1S0 EIA
0100 ~o o o
.----0,0 o *O
0 0
1 00%
1 o%
I
~
1: Punches
0: Punches D6
1
I o
TVCHK 1:
0
0
0 -...
Oit
1
00
o:
01 + L..
L.
check.
u0101
-
...
l~o
Ill
4
.2
UM09000E 1:
o:
Effective Ineffective D4
--+
01 0 +
0 0
1
UMO18000E 1:
t
L
.-L.
- -~
1;1
0!0
Oil
--
o:
Effective Ineffective
on
in
08000s in 08000s.
011101
o
140%
.
~eoo3
150%
[-D, DO -L-..
.-...
D5
Dd
1600/0 170/0
1>5, D4 ODvCE ODVCD 1 Selects RS232C O 1/0 interface. interface for output port.
1
1800/0
o~o_J11 -.
Oil is O.
0--
190% . 200%
Dz
RS232C
Input/Output Port
No. Baud
UM08000 1:
D2
opera8000 to opera
I
~
0:
Inhibits editing and display and punchout tions of the part program of program NO. 8999. Permits editing and display and punchout tions. D1
0,
UMSBK 1:
:{04 icEE&-DmEE
COV161(D7), COV11(D3) COV81(D6), : of cut depth for Stock Removal and Stock Removal in Facing COV41(D5)> COV21(D4), Sets the override in Turning (G71) (G72) cycles.
O:
Makes Single Block Stop effective for the programs in user macro when single block input is on. Does not permit Single Block Stop for the user macro blocks commanding operation and control. Do the next not given of block block when the skip before completion of including Skip Function
SKIPIN 1:
(G31) or if the touch switch does not trip beyond the limit position in the direction of motion for tool set error compensation (G35).
o:
Alarm
087
is
displayed.
:6161
I
L I
TG 1 LF
1
I
!
~6181
I L
TG 1 CNT
TG 2 LF
.-J
TG 3 LF J #6164
I +6182 . A \
TG 2 CNT
I
I
I I
TG 4 LF #6199 TG 5 LF I
TG18CNT
#6165
TG 19 CNT
I
are in1 to 19. setting.
TG 6 LF
TGICNT I No.
to
of times
operating
times
/J6167
TG 7 LF
dicated
Note:
P6166 I TG 8 LF Ez G71OFL: : tools in groups Setting Setting life control)
-.
1
z6169
TG9LF
E_-
G71 OFL
TGILF
to TG9LF
in
value after completion of each Stock Removal in Turning (G71) O - 65536 input increment
#6203 r
TG 10 LF
G 72 OFL
G720FL
: value after completion of in Stock Removal in Facing : 0 - 65536 input increment each (G72)
r-;=LF
I
I
TG12LF TG13LF
d
I
TG 14LF
EEIEl
I 1
G740FL : value (6)
G 74 OFL
TG15LF
I
7
in Peck
Drilling
in
TG16LF
TG 17 LF
I
I I
TG1OLF Individual 10 to Setting Setting to TG19LF life :
TG 18 LF
I
I
I
b6205 r G750FL:
G 75 OFL
TG19LF
Sets (G75)
value
(6)
n Grooving
in Xaxis
expectancy by part
tools
in
groups
Setting Setting:
19 is set
life
control)
A3
NUMBERS r
(Centd)
_ ._ XSL 2 M
;
~ G 76 OFL v6502
~6206
i -
G763FL Sets; cut :
~-
ZSL 2 M
XSL2M, ZSL2M: Sets the boundary area in minus direction Stored Stroke Limit second prohibit area axis and Zaxis, range: Least respectively. o to f99999999 output increment
of on
X-
When the tape without program no. program no. is set for the tape.
is
stored,
36504
i ~ :
Setting:
o:
Sets the boundary area in positive Stored Stroke Limit third prohibit and Zaxis, respectively. Setting Setting: range: Least O to *99999999 output increment
direction area on
of
Xaxis
~
PARAMETER this position, the
;6507 1 XSL3M, L_ ZSL3M: ____ _-
?6506
T
IL
, --:
The usual operation is similar to case of SYSTEM . Self-diagnostics of the memory contents and checking of reference zero return point are omitted. Notes 1. :
area third
in minus prohibit
direction area on
of X-axis
Setting Setting:
range: Least
Setting the values other than described cannot permit the correct operation. Setting can be effective number switch provided the unit is set at 11O. 1
above
2.
, . ,
x6512 x651 1
:6501
ZSL 2 P s6513
XSL2P,
:6514
Sets the boundary area n positive Stored Stroke Limit secor d prohibit axis and Zaxis, respectively. Setting Setting range: : Least
=6515
s6516
T 3 XSLP
A--4
~6517
$6543 I %544
I I
-1
-. L.... -
S6518
$6545
I
.,
L [
___ .._
T 10 ZSLP
~6546
TIOXSLM
T 10 ZSLM
r1 i6548
$3549 I
-1 1
;~ I _________ xsLp_ T 1lZSLP [ T 11XSLM 1 ___ T 11ZSLM L:: - T 12 XSLP ~=z__ T12ZSLP --; ---.__.
#6550
I
._l
~6553
T6554 ~ $6555
L ] -L~.. L ~ I T 13 ZSLP .__ ___ ._. .= ___ T 12 ZSLM ______ T 13 XSLP _-! I T 12 XSLM
L I
-d -
~6556
I , ~ !_ !.
T 13 XSLM __ ~ T 13 ZSLM
T 14 XSLP L.
T
-1
14 ZSLP
T 14 XSLM
T 14 ZSLM
,
1
8 XSLM
..~ .,
T8 ZSLM
I
L --
T9
XSLP
T 9 ZSLP
.,
T9 XSLM
A5
NUMBERS
(Centd)
of
Stores
Stroke
Limit
from
O to output
Least
[E??] ..-.-
IndlCateS signal is X-axis detected. coordinate
XSKIP
Part program sets tool number using offset of offset memory numbers 01 to 50 orderly. Setting range: O to (Tool life control) 50
value
when
the
skip
a8701
. .1
~. ~..
1. __ ----
TOFO 01 ___
EE02__ \ ____ __
J8702 T ~
Indicates signal is
Z-axis detected.
coordinate
value
when
the
skip
$8749 l
I
L-
---
__.
~F~4g TOF050
__-
TGPNO1 .n~ ;
TGPN 02
TOFOO1
to
TOF050:
Part program sets the order of using offset values in offset memories 01 to 50, l sequentially. Setting range : 0 to 5
I
TGPNO1 to IGPN50:
TGPN 50
( TOOI life
control)
Part program determines including tools (number Setting range: O to (Tool life control) 20
of
groups
%.1>
o
1 1 1 0
I
I
Ill
D5
Plus
:7
1: o:
<mo5 J
.mD~:-~
D7 special G code I as G code*. standard G code as G code. D6 G code G code of of 01 group 01 group as GO1 when
o:
ten the
times least
increment.
D4 if the spindle speed is off upon transition block to a cutting on the spindle match from feed block. speed match
RSTGO1 1: o:
o:
Radius designation. Diameter designation. D2 Dry Run command. dry Run commana. D1 in in response response to to the the rapid rapid
POSEXT 1: O:
Presets position external display coordinate system. Does not preset position external setting coordinate system.
display
o:
EXTSET 1: o:
D4
ZZRNILK
Resets the value at POSITION EXTERNAL display to O. 1 Does not reset the value at POSITION EXTERNAL display to O. Dl
1: Causes
o:
an alarm ( 002) upon Cycle Start when Reference Point Return on Zaxis is not made manually after power is applied. Causes no alarm. DO
XZRNILK PONG04 1: o: 1: Sets the power is Sets the power is DI) in the in the 03 group 03 Erouw to G91 when to G90 when G code applied. G code applied. in in the the 05 group 05 group to G99 when to G98 when o:
Causes an alarm ( 001) upon Cycle Start when Reference Point Return on X-axis is not made manually after power is applied. Causes no alarm. Set II111when Stored Lead Screw Error
Note : PONG03 1: o:
Sets the G code power is applied. Sets the G code power is applied.
ED TSTLK
D7
1: Does
o:
$W06
Uses Uses
O:
not cause an alarm upon Cycle Start without reset operation after part program edit operation. Causes an alarm 005. D6 Effective on Cycle Start when signal l changes to O. Effective on Cycle Start when changes to 1. 11011 signal cycle cycle start start
Lq-
m
D7 , D6
STUD 1:
SD ASGN2,
SD ASGN1:
o:
A7
NUMBERS
D3
(Centd)
o:
1. ..
RWDOUT
:1:
D4
o:
0:
Provides Rewinding Activate Signal when NC program is rewound by RESET & REWIND signal. Provides no Rewinding Activate Signal when NC program is rewound by RESET & REWIND signal.
M30RWDl 1:
o:
OUTPUT
1: Sets
D3
CVSAVE the least output increment increment at O. 0001 inch
o:
at O. 001 mm.
~:
0:
Does
user
macro
command
variable #100
SC:R.SOV
1: o:
Makes the Spindle tapping. Does not make the during tapping. D]
override Spindle
#100 thru #149 by reset. Clears user macro common variables thru #140 by reset operation . D()
ZRNOFS
~:
Cancels reference
the commanded block when the second point by G 30 is commanded during Offset blocks or Tool iNose the Radius Com
SLT31O 1: O:
Establishes the prohibited area of the Stroke Limit 3 outside the boundary. Establishes the prohibited area of the Stroke Limit 3 inside the boundary. Do
Stored Stored
0:
following
commanded
SLr 210
1:
O:
Establishes the prohibited area of the Stroke Limit 2 outside the boundary. Establishes the prohibited area of the Stroke Limit 2 inside the boundary.
1:
o:
OF SOCLR: 1: o: D7 OFSOO X, Z by X, Z by O-9999 O-9999 ORG. ORG.
matically, alarm 001 will be caused. iloes not cause alarm in the same condition shown above. D6
YQ.JOVILD 1:
FSA40DCH: 1: o:
D6 FS editing. FS editing.
o:
After turning on power, if move command except by G28 is ~xecuted without returning X-axis to reference point manually or automatically, alarm 001 will be caused. Does not cause alarm .
PONM97 1: o:
OTALILK M97 command (calculation of intersection) selected at power-on. M96 command (circular arc) is selected power-on. is at
D5
FEEDCUT:
1:
D4
0:
With feed when upon tape output from the NC. Without feed when upon tape output from the NC.
Sets the value set by #6223 when MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch is set at x1OO. Regards multiplication factor as x 100 when MANUAL PULSE MULTIPLY switch is set at x1OO.
A--8
ZRNRPD 1:
D3
[
I F6011
L-~~
I I
. I
.T-..
ID61D,
j .L
D4
D,
D,--] D:~
1.. .1
o:
Provides JOG command instead of RAPID command until reference point return for each axis is completed after the power is In the reference point return turned on. mode, usual RAPID operation is executed in both negative and positive directions. Provides usual RAPID TRAVERSE rate. D2 multiple multiple D1 cut margin when (multiple repetitive there is cycle) offset offset function. function.
S4SF: 1: o:
D6 Output the SF signal is given. Does not output the command is given, D5 in in system system variable variable when SF S4digit when command S4-digit
signal
NSRCHG: 1: o:
G711KUW: 1:
Look-ahead is enabled #looo to #3001. Look-ahead is disabled #looo to #3001. D4 3rd stored function. 3rd stored function.
SLT3S: 1: o:
o:
U, W are not the rough cut margin when there is no K in G71 to G73 (multiple repetitive cycle) rough cutting.
stroke stroke
limit limit
Z-axis Z-axis
barrier barrier
Enable Disable
high-speed high-speed
signal signal
function. function,
NOTGCAN: ~: o:
Control the number in all tool groups in tool life management. Does not control the number in all tool groups in tool life management. D6
Enable automatic nose R function and cancel tool coordinate system setting function. Disable automatic nose R function and tool coordinate system setting function cancellation D1 G42 cycle. G42 cycle.
TLERR: 1: o:
G71LVL: ~: o:
Alarm occurs when the life of a single tool has expired in tool life management. Alarm does not occur when the life of a single tool has expired in tool life management. D5 the first reference point return
Enable T code command and G41, commands in the multiple repetitive Disable T code command and G41, commands in the multiple repetitive DO
AZRNHS 1:
TCOMEM: 1: o:
Executes
(deceleration limit switch) and the subsequent automatic reference point returns in the same way when power is applied. o: Executes (position D4 return and point re is applied. return. high-speed at reference reference point). point return
The tool coordinate memory numbers are lower 2 digits of the T**$$ command. The tool coordinate memory numbers are higher 2 digits of the T**$$ command. ._r.
~ D, ~_ .,__ 6 IDS .._ bti
the the
.
I
#6014 .
MZRNHS 1:
Executes the first reference point the subsequent automatic reference turns in the same way when power Executes highspeed Dl~ reference DO
PCMEM:
Stores PC parameter)
o:
point
ZRNDRX
SVMEM Compensa-
D6
unit
malfunction
(Lfaintenance
ACGCMEM: 1:
D5
A9
NUMBERS ~
(Co~fd) . . .
D2, DID0
,6,15; ~r
_ . . . . .
Dl, AT SUPZ, ATSUPX
~
DO
~~
-L..
I). ,
1:
:6018 G50WST
jD7D6D5DdD3 ,. __ __
Automatic on the Z-
o:
Does not add workpiece shift value at G50 coordinate system setting or resetting by ORG key. Adds workpiece shift value at G50 coordinate system setting or resetting by ORG key.
WSSGN 1:
is
Note : The Automatic Coordinate System established with the following parameters: Inch system: Metric system: #6631, #6637, #6630 #6636
o:
Reverses U and W input code for work coordinate system shift value. Does not reverse U and W input code for work coordinate system shift value.
OFSCYC 1:
.
Z 6016 D711 ,. . I
D2 D,
~
I L.
o:
-.
Displays cyclicallyby pressing offset function. Does not display cyclicallyby pressing offset function.
DPR.lNT: 1:
D7
the higher O in the
G32ALM 1: o: Activates alarm due to too short cutting time of 1 block for continuous ihreadcutting. Executes without waiting for cycle start if cutting time is too short for continuous threadcutiing.
Output the leading O also when are order digits of the variable DPRINT function.
nothing variable D2 check. check,
0:
Output of the
MAX UW
NO SEFF: 1:
1: o:
o:
Warning if U or w input exceeds parameter #6626 Regards U or W input to offset data as usual input.
MRVDRN: 1: o:
Enable switching to dry run during under the MM/REV mode. Disable switching to dry run during under the MM IREV mode.
move move
RPDOV 1: o: Provides six steps of rapid over~ide (FO, 25, 50, 100%) Provides four steps of rapid override (FO, 25, 50, 100%)
~ Do
. .
SPDOV 1: Sets 200% Sets 120% spindle speed override range of 10 to (10% increments) spindle speed override range of 50 to (10% override increments) . DO axes simultaneous shift causes alarm in G151 groove width shift. axes simultaneous shift does not cause in G150, G151 groove width shift.
Specify whether or not a hole is to be made on channels 8-1, respectively, in a code correspond# (used with user macro) in the ing to symbol EIA code. 1: o: Hole N o hole EIA#B7-Bo with holes 01001001 7, 4, and 1 is
o:
on channels
considered equivalent to symbol #i in the EIA code . No code for use by the unit can be set. Note : The specification of EIA#B7-BO = 00000000 assumes that symbol # is not used in the EIA code.
A--1O
m
G92FHP
1:
FOVAB
D7 D5 D4 Da Dz
D5 with with D4
Effective Effective
O. 1.
SSTPAB 1: Analog
o:
Stops at the position B where Threading-up is completed. Returns to start point A and stops after Threading-up is completed.
o:
output zero with spindle S command zero input signal SSTP O: Analog output zero with spindle S command zero input signal SSTP 1.
AU TSET:
D3
m
TOOL PATH DURING CUTTING THREAD INTERRuPT ~---- - ----
TEMPORARY
1:
A
o:
Automatically set the tool coordinate memory by external input. Does not automatically set the tool coordinate memory by external input. D2
Q.,
t
[Gw, (;76)
PSTSGN
Shown in the calculationformula of storing data during MDI of measured work point into tool offset memories 01 to 50.
FEED HOLD
SCRDRN 1: O:
D5
(;:;:::)
SKPFED
~s~~~~
~~~~~~ementj
1: Employs
o:
the feedrate set in parameter #6232 (G31F) for the Skip Function command (G31). Employs the F code command as the feedrate for the Skip Function command (G31) .
D3
0:
(:~:i::::) ~~~~~ement~
(=)~~~
ESPRST
1:
o:
Does not turn on RST output with ESP input ON. Turns on RST output with ESP input ON.
OESG96
G31SKP
1:
DI
D2
1:
o:
Inputs the specified value to macro system variables #5001, 5002 during G31 execution. Inputs the current value to macro system variables #5001, 5002 during G31 execution.
0:
Specifies the surface speed calculated by the X-axis coordinate value modified by tool position offset value in Constant Surface Speed Control. Specifies the surface speed calculated by the programmed Xaxis coordinate value in Con~tant Surface Speed Control.
POSG96 OFSDSP D7 1: 0:
DO
1:
o:
Displays programmed position in current position display (POSITION ABSOLUTE). Displays programmed position modified with tool position offset in current position dis play (POSITION ABsoLuTE).
D6
Surface Speed Control functions on the block including Rapid Traverse (GOO) . Surface Speed Control functions on the block including Rapid Traverse (GOO) , if programmed before the Cutting Feed block.
OFSZRO:
1:
o:
Automatically clear the tool wear offset by external input. Does not automatically clear the tool wear offset by external input.
AII
NUMBERS
(Centd) .- -
:6021
_D_7
1 D,
Ds
DA ~ Da
UM09000 1:
D7
Inhibits editing and display and punchout tions of the part program of program No. to 9999. Permits editing tions. Dt5 program is already ALARM. with a new stored. and display and punchout
0:
Enables the movement of automatic dle offset during cutting feed by Enables the movement of automatic dle offset except during execution traverse. TLCC D6 Effective amount Effective amount D5 on the next changed. on the next is changed. T code
MERSIN 1: O:
one
1:
when when
offset offset
is
0:
block
RSC)NOF 1: ():
TRDFH Sets on and off character. Keeps RS signal finished. D4 DR. recognize D3 00 when tape is punched 9 keyed in and ~Tkey with O, depressed. -, RS on (RS232C until signal) by. is % 1: reading-in
o:
CHKDR 1: O: O 1: Recognizes Does not 9999o Punches 9, 9, 9,
Executes the block next to the block specifying thread, and stops at single block oper ation or feedhold during thread cutting. Stops on completion of the block specifying thread at single block operation or feedhold during thread cutting. D4
DR.
MABIN 1:
o:
Ignores manual absolute function for incremental command by U and W. Does not ignore manual absolute function incremental command by U and W. D3
for
o:
Does not punch 00 when tape is punched with o, -, 9, 9, 9, and 9 keyed in and != key depressed. D2
ISOPO 1. L.
PO:NON 1:
o:
Does not clear program No. on power application. (Program number is stored at power supply shut off.) Clears program No. on power application. D1
0:
Does not output parity bit (8th bit)when putting 1S0 codes from NC by operating key (in the EDIT mode) . Outputs parity bit.
outOUT
ISOPI 1:
PRGNO 1:
0:
Employs the value following address O or N as the program number (specifiable in one block) . Employs the value following address O as the program number. DO
o:
Ignores parity bit ( 8th bit) 1S0 codes by operating IN mode) and when reading-in the TAPE mode. Performs parity check. D~, DO
HOFSX
handle
offset
M02M99 1:
o:
Considers M02, M30 and M99 as the program end when part program is stored into memory. At punchout with O-9999 depressed, add EOB in front of O number. Does not consider M02, M30 and M99 as the program end when part program is stored At punchout with O-9999 into memory. depressed, do not add EOB in front of O number.
o:
handle handle
offset offset
movemove-
mode
A-12
Determines interface 1: o:
stop bit for RS232C the input No. 1 as two bits or one bit. stop stop bit bit as two as one bits. bit.
Determines D et ermines
PERST
1:
Regards % code as M30, if % is commanded before M02 or M30 in TAPE or MEM mode operaiton. Ignores M3 O in IT %(1 code TAPE D5 if commanded before M02 or
Baud Rate 50
I SIFI BID
SIFI BIC
SIFI BIB
I SIF1 BIA
o:
o 0
0 0 0 0 -.
0 0
0 1 1 1
010 1
1 o~o 0 1 Ill -} 1 0
or MEM mode
operation.
Imloooll
MCI-IMST
1:
1101
150 -200 300 600--} 1200101 2400 \ l----
o
1
o:
Lights feedhold lamp and stores M, S, and T commands when manual operation mode is selected during automatic operation. Does not light feedhold lamp and M, S, and T commands operation operation. are forced to reset when manual mode is selected during automatic
1 1
0 0 0
0 011 110
lo
ONOCHG
1: o:
D3
4800 9600
I
I
Changes No. O by pressing O, program number, and ALT keys. Does not change No. O by pressing O, program number, and ALT keys.
D2 Sets cut override depth input value override with cut depth in Stroke Removal in Turning
COVP 1:
0:
(G71) and stock removal in facing (G72) . Sets cut depth value override with setting #6004. D1
SIF2CI
CLNO
1:
o:
oilby inputting t :11 and OUtplltS outputs It 11 in 1S0 code. : by inputting 110, Does not perform the conversion above.
Do speed at high in highspeed in
Determines whether output RS232C No. 2 interface is 1: o: Does not send Sends control D4 output two bits control code.
HSRWD
1:
o:
Automatically starts at high speed rewinding. Does not start automatically high-speed rewinding.
stop bit for or one bit. bit bit D3 rate as two as one Do
RS232C
interface
1: Determines
o: Determines
stop stop
bits. bit.
Input
for
RS232C
No.1
SIF2BID-SIF2B1A
-- =6026
SIFICI
~~D.
D5
~D,
the input given or
~ D,
D,
Do
baud
for
RS232C
interface
control not.
code
for
control code.
code.
A13
NUMBERS
for RS232
(Centd)
C No. 2
Baud
SlF2BlC,
SlF2Bl
BISl
F2BlA
50100
Im
010
I
. s6029 i
v . i . D, D.
D3
110 150
4
I
o~o 0 o
~ -:..+:
D2
D,
DO
Oil,
SIF2C0
D5
200
300 -+
0; O-l+
I
po
0
+--
o 1
Determines whether output control code for RS232C interface No. 2is sent or not,
1: o: Does not send Sends control D4 stop bit for or one bit. bit bit D3 as two as one Do interface. RS232C interface control code. code.
110
Output
for RS232C
No. 1
stop stop
bits. bit.
SIF2BOD-SIF2BOA
;IF2BOD
SIF2BOC
SIF2
BOB
SIF2
BOA
Determines whether output control code for current loop and RS232C interface is sent or not.
0 0 0 0
1
0
0 0 0
1
0 i o
1
1:
o:
Does
SIFI. SO
200
Determines output stop bit for current loop and RS232C interface as two bits or one bit, 1:
o:
300 600
0 0
0 1 0 1 . . 0
Determines
Determines
stop
bits. bit.
.
SIFIBOD-SIFIBOA
D3 - DO
Sets output baud rate for current loop and RS23ZC interface,
9600
SIFI
BCC
SIF1
BOB:
SIFI
BOA
A14
XPSET
r
I
I
=
IF~
r:
F
I
I
#6057
#6058
I
I
ZPSET
SPSET
XPERML,
XPSET
, ZPSET , SPSET :
X-, Z-axis and
Outputs the result of the preset compensation value multiplied by the multiplication factor the error compensation value. Setting (Setting range: O will ~
XSVER I
as
compensation.
Setting range:
Setting: Least
O - 255
output increment
I
I #6063 I
1..-~ ,..
BSX
~..
I I
1
L
r
ZSVER
~
BS Z BSS
I
r-
SSVER
! I
1.
.1
XSVER,
ZSVER,
Sets servo error limit for X-, Z-axis, spindle. Position deviation exceeding value activates an alarm 134A. 11 Setting range: O - 255 Standard setting: 16 1/16 x (D/A saturation Setting:
value)
#6062 #6063
#6064 4 5
Bit
Max No. of
Error Pulses
ZiE!zl r
Rapid threading cutting Setting Setting: pull-out range: O - 255 O. 1 lead
CUPRD
width
during
thread-
6 7
8
I I
I
14 bit 15 bit
8191
16383
16 bit
32765 SIDSER E1
Max
No.
of
Error Pulses
Spindle stop check timer at spindle index start. Setting range: O - 225 Setting: l=8ms
NUMBERS .
(Centd)
~6120
.
x6122
.
I
,.
16123
x6124
,z6113 :6125 I
UM;EIAS :
Specify the punching pattern in EIA for special characters employed in user macro; [ , ] , *, =, (, ), used in turn, beginning with #6108. Setting range: O - 255 Se~ting: Sets the punching pattern using the decimal value converted from the binary value which defines the pattern. 0 is set for each character, Note: men punching pattern willbe as listed below.
I ,_ , . , ~6127 i
~6126
09001
G codes to range
09004,
:
Setting
0- 255
UMM
*_.J._i --)
,. . ..
..
-.
UMM 2
UMM3
UMM4
:6114
NBUFM
UMMI,
2
UMM2,
UMM3,
:6115
NBUFM
Sets M codes for calling No. 09001 to 09004. Setting =6134 UMT range: O - 255
UMT
:6118
NBUFM
1. 1.
=6119 NBUFM 6
0:
Note: user
Regards T-code command as macro mand calling the macro of program Regards T-code command as basic This macro selection option. is effective only
iNBIJFMl,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6:
advance read
Sets up to 6 M codes for stopping ing function (buffering) . Setting range: O - 255
/4-16
EEEIL
MDO to holding Setting , i L : G74 range: groove O to MD7 High-speed is set. range: O to
MD O-MD7 1
ti6213
IL
G71
OVR 1
M function
decode
output
255
~L-# 6208
b==
L , canned 65535 unit cycle retract amount. G74DWL: G74/G75 Setting Unit:
r---
L-. .
G 74 DWL
-.__ . . . .._..___ ,
..
bottom range: l
of
hole
dwell
time.
1! 11! = 1 input
O to
65535
= 1 ms
1!
~ ~
G750FI
p=q ~
MSTF
,
.
G75 range:
groove O to
cycle
retract
amount.
MSTF: Sets the interval are transmitted are transmitted. from the time M, until the time MF, S, and T codes SF, and TF
Setting Unit:
1 = 1 input
1 i_
#6210
I
L
G74CLR
.-- ..
Setting
range:
O - 65536
msec
G74CLR: Set the G74 range: groove O to canned 65535 unit cycle clearance amount.
m
L
-1
----L._.. - -
1
HPMAX .-
J
is
Setting Unit:
HPMAX: Specifies the maximum handle feedrate, commom to the all axes. This parameter setting is in multiples
G 75CLR
111 = 1 input
which of 8.
s6211
..
ir-j L.-
G75 range: groove o to
Setting
m
HPMUL : Setting:
E11111 = x 1 time
HPMUL
..
PULSE
J
MULTIPLY
Setting Unit:
!!11 = 1 input
.-
$6212
-,
...
cycle
G745FED
I -J
m~
SAGRT :
S,4GRT~
the spindle
range: I!lll
O to
Specifies the delay time for checking speed reaching signal (SAGR) . Setting range: O - 65536 msec
= 100% (is
A17
NUMBERS
corner AX S S arc
(Centd)
setting is ignored when:
L I .
KPX
The
#6226 KPX,
KPZ
~_
KPZ: gain respectively. of command units for
<
-. I
AY
Standard Xand
Setting:
Standard
set:
1024
KPS :
Set the P-loop The relations fo]lows :
Max. Set Of # 6227 4096 2048 1024 512 256 #8084 4 5 6 7 8 i No. of Bit 12 13 14 15 16 I No. of Max. offset pulse 2047 4095 8191 16383 32765
as
L..
FO
:::
._..!!!vF~..
speed for Rapid
623 I
ROVFO Specifies Override. Setting Setting :
---Traverse
the
range: I
= 125 pulses/see
Ea
[:-:
=-
----::
[ --;=
. G98MAX :
G 98 MAX .=
G31F: Specifies Setting Setting: This setting the range: III!! = 1000 pulses/rein is effective = 1. when parameter #6019D 4 feedrate in the skip function ( G31) .
Specifies the maximum feedrate at G 98 command ( feed per minute) common to all axes. Setting Setting: range: 1 = 1000 puLses/min
(SKPFED)
3
NEGNR :
When a circular path is drawn in Tool Radius Compensation o,utside a corner approaching 180, the movement follows describing a very small circular This parameter is used to set the critical arc. arc value, if this arc movement is considered to affect the workpiece surface machining.
~q
JOG O-JOG
JOG 31 ----,
Specify the feedrates for the respective positions on the jog feedrate select switch. Setting range: Setting: !! l!!= (). 5 mm /rein (metric OUtpUt) Ill!! = 0.05 im/min (inch output)
A--18
Switch Position o ? 2 .. 3 4
~ Feedrate ~ v~~~de 0 10 20 30 40
Continuous :,;;Feerate 0 1 2 4 6
MACGR1-MACGR4 Sets spindle speed and 4 orderly. Setting When range: the setting
O - 6000 is
at O, the
5 6 7170
880 9i90 10 11 ! ~
50 60
8 10
12 15 20 25 I 30 40 50 60 ,: 120 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 800 1OCO i [ [ ~ ~ ~
8 10
12 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 ,: 120 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 800 1OCX3 : i
+6270
7[
GRSREV
L-.
GRSREV
: motor
100 110
Sets the speed command output to spindle when gear shift input (GRS) is given.
12
13
I
~
120
130_
Setting value:
--
-+..140
16 17 18 . 19 20 2122 I 170 180 190 200 0 0 i o : 26
IQ
__*_
Analog
k+ +:{
23
27~
28
29
30 31
1200
1500
1200
1500
1.
E m c
~6271
I
F
GR IREV
GR2REV . - GR3REV ~
-1
z6266 -116267 ~---- ---------~6268 l.------- ~ ~6269 MACGFI 3 ::7 M,4CGR 4
r-
R4REV
.J
l---.
_____
_ *3..
MACGR 2
3
--A
GRIREV-GR4REV: Specify tively, the maximum speed of the spindle, respecfor gears 1, 2, 3 and 4 each selected by Set the spindle speed applicaan input signal. ble when the speed command voltage is 10 V. Setting ~
GSCREV
range:
O - 6000
(r/rein)
L.-
e
G SC REV
E : the spindle motor speed in effect operation ( GSC ) input is entered. range: O - 6000 (r/rein) when
I
I
36276
1
I
I
MICGR1 I
1 1
MICGR2
I
I
MICGR 3
MICGR4
A19
NUMBERS
\
(Centd)
ACCX 1 _ ACCZ 1 I
_..
L--__ ~
Setting range:
SPIN(ILE MOTOR SPEED COMMANO
O - 6000 [r/rein)
ACCX1>
ACCZ1:
..
Set the time constant for Linear Accel /Decel for X- and Z-axis, respectively. Setting range: Setting: l = 125/8 x 103 p/see Z (P: least output increment) ~XREFP L. (r{tin) ~ 6271 (GRIREW
#6266 (MACGR1) L d 6276 (MICGR1) # 6277 (M ICGR21 $6272 (GR 2 REV) * 6267 [MACGR21 L # 6278 (MICGR 3) # # 6273 (GR 3REV) 6268 (MACGR 3) # 6274 (GR 4 REVI # 6269 (MACGR4) # 6279 (MICGR41
v j/J/J~q
i, ,, Ii lli ,, II ,,
I
?6304 ~
. ZREFP
#6305 E .
XREFP
, ZREFP
---.1
t6280 $6281 :1
-
RPDX RPDZ
= 1 pulse
RPDX
, RPDZ
#6306
I
L.
SCRXACC
J
r-7 $6307
1
1
SC RZACC
125 pulses/see
O -
3200
SCRXACG, SCRZACC: time constant at threadcutting on
--:!28d c_:Lp
s6283 . _ .., ~ c: XBLP, ZBLP:
. . . . .
--..~
Setting: Always
(ins) #6315.
#6308
I . ~
SCRX AS
Sets amount
Setting range: P:
s6309
L
SCRZBAS:
SCRZBAS
,
Note :
Setting
Setting: Always
1 = 500 pulses/s
[
[:4
*631O
-~ ~
::..
ZREFV2:
XREFV 2
ZREFV 2
ZREFV1: the approach respectively, range: O speed 1 for Reference on the X- and Z-axes. 200 Point
Point
= 125 pdses/sec
DECELERATION POINT
RATIO TRAvERSE
RATE
Sets accel/decel
threadcutting
time on X-,
WIDTH 1
,: ----
OECEL LS SIGN
Setting: Always
131,070/time constant
#6314,
AREAA
/ ;
AREA B
point
return
direction:
(ZRNDRX,
ZRNDRZ)
CUTZBAS
*L
RPDX 2 .
$6319
RPDZ2 1 r... .. ..
CUTXBAS,
CUTZBAS:
RPDX2,
Sets accelldecel bias at usual threadcutting on X, and Z-axis. Setting: 1 = 500 p/s
RPDZ2:
Set change speed for linear accel/decel of X- and Z-axis, respectively. Setting: l = 125 pulses/s , ACCX 2 - ., Z 2 r 1 I
Notes for Setting Accel/Decel Time Constant and Bias at Normal Threadcutting (#6306 - #6309, #6312 - #6315) 1. Set the same values for X- and Z-axis as a rule to ensure motion path accuracy. When accel/decel time constant or bias is set under the different conditions between threadcutting and normal threadcutting, direct changing these two types cutting may influence speed factor at selected point. Be sure to program dwell or positioning code between these two types.
-~ ,- ;6320 .. J L. ~ L.:!z
2.
A21
NUMBERS
(Ccmtd)
X 103 p/S2 Sets the spindle range : speed 0 for spindle indexing.
Parameter setting for linear 2nd step Note : accel/decel must be set under the following conditions:
c2nd step accel/ decel change speed .#6318/#6319 If the above the positioning = Rapid decel accel/ constant x N
Setting Setting:
1 = 500 pulse
J 1[
#6286 /#6287
satisfied, correctly,
Sets Setting
the
indexing O 32767
creep
speed.
Setting
zfi323 ! ZPERED
= 5(IO pulse
per
second
XPERED,
ZPERED:
# 6347
$6348
BSBON
X (X-AXIS)
of the end point for Leadscrew Specify the number respectively, on the X- and Error Compensation, Z-axes. Setting range: O - 255
BSBON
Y (Y-AXIS)
Setting time from ESP to SVOFF Z-AXIS in order: 1 = 8 ms (unit) O - 32767 (setting unit)
in X-AXIS
and
XPERED,
ZPERED:
HINTPP: Set the handle interpolation reference pulse count.
Spec:ify the number of the start point for Leadscrew Error Compensation, respectively, on X and Zaxes.
Sett:.ng range: O - 255
Setting range:
O - 65535
m=
.,
~_.
..
--
____
XSLIP, Specify the compensation, a.xes. reference point respectively, for Leadscrew Error on the X and Z-
ZSLIP:
Specify the plus direction boundary value for Stored Stroke Limit 1, respectively, on the X-, and Zaxes. Setting range : 0 - 99999999
Setting: 1 = 1 pulse
Setting range:
O - 255
Sets the reference point for spindle indexing. Setting range: Setting: O - 4095
A22
;66061 i___ , -~ +6607 ] ZSL 1 M
--I
~_
__
XSLI M
-~j
EiEIiIl E
DFSX2 : for X-,
DFSX 2
ZSLIM: the minus direction boundary Stroke Limit 1, respectively, value on the
Workpiece measurement value direct parameter (2) Set the distance from the reference position to the X2 contact surface. Setting range: t!l!! -99999999 command -
99999999 increment
range:
O - 99999999
Unit:
= Least
, I m6612 . i _.. ,. P6613 [ ---.: XZP2L, Specify second Z-axes. Setting Setting:
ml
DFSZ1: and the on the X-,
DFSZ1
Workpiece measurement value direct parameter (3) Set the distance from the reference position to the Z1 contact surface. Setting range: -99999999 -
99999999
Unit:
increment
I
range:
-99999999-
99999999
1 = 1 pulse
Ez!EIcl E
DFSZ2:
DFSZ2 A
WKSHTX
ml WKSHTX: Set the X-axis range: workpiece -99999999 command shift offset.
Workpiece measurement value direct parameter (4) Set the distance from the reference position to the Z2 contact surface. Setting range: -99999999 command -
Setting Unit:
99999999 increment
II11! = Least
11111 = Least
[m WKSHTW :
I
shift range: -99999999 command II111 = Least
WKSHTW
EE!!m
DFSXC: tool Workpiece measurement parameter (5) Set the X dimension of Setting Unit: range: the -99999999
DFSXC
amount
measurement
value
direct gauge
input workpiece.
99999999 increment
99999999 increment
11111 = Least
command
ml
DFSX1:
DFSX 1
m
DFSZC: input tool nose Setting Unit: ill!!
E.
the range: -99999999 command
DFSZC
7 J
input workpiece.
Workpiece measurement value direct parameter (1) Set the distance from the reference position to the Xl contact surface. Setting Unit: range: -99999999 command -
value
direct gauge
99999999 increment
99999999 increment
11111 = Least
= Least
A23
NUMBERS
(Centd)
~. ,
.
__
MAXDUW
to 1 , the
XSETI ..
XSETI, Specify
HSDM 3
Lu!f-1 L
HSDM3: Set 1. the high-speed M
System Setting at the time of inch input, respectively, on the X-, and Z-axes. A desired value should be set in inches for the distance between the first reference point and the reference point of the coordinate system to be established. Setting Setting: range: l . f16636
1 a6637 .4
function
decode
output
reset
99999999
! # 6647 -d HSDM4:
HSDM4 !.
~ ~
;T:::T---- L___
Set 2.
the
high-speed
function
decode
output
reset
, ZSETM
EEEEcl ~
reDIVERR: Set for the instruction division error. point value code
.
segment
the value for Automatic Coordinate Setting at the time of metric input,
A desired on the X-, and Zaxes, spectively, value should be set in millimeters for the distance between the first reference point and the reference point of the coordinate system to be established. Setting Setting ~.
!
value
*8000 - A
_ r_
PEMN O
::.
\ - .7
z8255 -J1 L - PEMN 255 -. I ---
-1
XPEINT
-]
; 6642
I
PEMNO-PEMN255:
1
,w3643
ZPEINT ,
~i
values
of
Leadscrew
XPEINT
, ZPEINT
designation) designation)
Specify the compensation inverval Errc, r Compensation, respectively, Z-axes . Setting Setting: range: l -99999999= 1 pulse
selected
by
99999999 Axis for compensation is specified #6322, 6323, 6328, and 6329. by parameters
A,24
ERROR COMPENSATION
COMPENSATION
5 =
X-AXIS
<
Compensation Minimum
compensation
Compensation
multiplication factor:
15 pulses max.
Table 3.1
1.
Regardless of absolute/incremental the difference between neighboring sation values should be ( 15 pulses sation multiplication) and below. set value in case of is f127 pulses . Compensation is taken on this value.
~xis
x z
Parameter s
36642 (XPEINT) ~6642 (ZPEINT) q6023 D, (PERIAB) $6334 (XPEROR) $6335 (ZPEROR) $6322 (XpERED)
Functions
2. Maximum
3.
be
Compensation
COMPENSATION QEFERENCE ~OINT 6000 PULSES A ! fimrr; INTERVAL
Max Point
$6323
(ZPERED) $6328 (XPERST) $6329 (ZPERST)
,U:E:
1 [)
/
(10
()
-1+1-1.1. ()
z.2-
1 1)
I
i)
+1 i
(1
-1 !
II
4
4
111
A25
lNPUT/OUTPUT
SIGNALS
Notes: 1. Monitor signals are used to check nal condition of the control. The functions - #1157 of signals #1000 the inter-
2.
Diagnostic Number MOOO-k1096 PI lCK1-fH 157 Display I Input signals from machine I Output signals to machine Output signals to machine interface (PC)
#1096,
#1100
Refer D7
to machine D6 D5 D4
tool D3
builders D2 D1
manual. DO
*---
(PC)
Signals
A2!6
Table
4 1 List of Standard
Input/Output
Signals
Input Signals
D7 #1300 EDT EDIT D6 MEtd MEMORY
15-L+I%+I-+--+ MDI
TAPE
HANDLEJ STEP
MANUAL JOG
MANUAL RAPID
-#1301 MP 1 ROV 2 Rovl~~Fv8 FEEDRATE : FV4 FV2 i Fvl ~ RAPID SPEED OVERRIDE OVERRIDEJMANUAL JOG SPEED
#1302 HZ
MANUAL
+Z, x+x
AXIS
HX
SELECT
;1
MP 4
MP2
PG AXIS
MANUAL TRAVERSE
DIRECTION SELECT
M303
AFL M. S, T LOCK
--- .-.
#1304 ZRN RETURN TO REFERENCE CDZ THREAD CUT UP ~ ~RWD~ ERROR DETECT HIGH-SPEED REWIND PST SRN ---- POSITION SET UP POINT SET RETURN *SP FEED HOLD ST CYCLE START ~
H30L:R*..@_l..RwD
E~AL INPUT ERROR lNTERRUPT REWIND
I Op
END OF PROGRAM
RD
MACHINE READY
-T
I HINTP HANDLE I NT E RPOLAri ON MODE *DCZ DEC~lNpUT REFERENCE I
-1-
.
I *LZ FOR
ti1306
SAGR
.
*DCX
+LZ
L___
G +LX .
~~E~ AGREEMENT
pOINT
?1307
GRS
SSTP SCOMMAND O
GR4
._
GR3 ~
GR2
GRI
A27
Table
Input Signals
4-1
List of Standard
Input/Output
Signals
(Cent d)
Dd
D3 T
D2 SAT
D, SMN
sCOMMAND AUTO
%MMAND MANUAL
= BDT 6 AD~lTtONAL
._.
~ BDT5 L. . _~ BLOCK DELETE
.
BDT4 BDT 3 BDT 2 ~
$1310
rwN16 ;
.wi7..
.
WN 4
.
WN 2 SEARCH
WN1 r=
~ SPB SPA I
EXTERNAL
WORK
NUMBER
SPINDLE OVERRIDE
Ovc
TOOL WEAR-OUT ADJUST INPUT CUTTING INTERRUPT POINT RETURN AUTO MODE HANDLE OFFSET X AXIS MIRROR IMAGE PROGRAM RESTART OVERRIDE CANCEL
--#1312 I SETREO COORDI NATE SYSTEM SETTING REQUEST INPUT #1313 FSCLR
I FS DATA CLEAR
-
COV16 i
.-
COV8 I COV 4
Cov 2 Cov 1 I
FSMEM FS MEMORY
--
1 c
x1316 SID 8
SID7
--1
I SID6 . .
I ,
SID 5
~ .-.=4
L:-XS7J SET -
SID~ ._
SPINDLE
INDEX POSITION
r
#13,7 ~
Tpfj
..
.
~ TP 2 1. TP 1 . .
SID12 . ..~..
,
I SID 11 . SID1O SID9 I -!
. ___
TP4
Input Signals
D7 :1318 D6 i_~T& TOOL SKIP
D3 D2 D, Do
SIDXI
TOOL RESET
~1319
ROV 4
SPD
TLA 21
TLA 18 CHANGE
TLA 14
TLA12
TLAII
RAPID OVERRIDE
IWO L--
-.
:1323 ~E)~D~ EXTERNAL
6) ~ RI 6(SDI 5~S~
~1324
FDI~(SDL__
(SDI 12) ~
(SDI 11)
.~ -
=1325
~KLIczETx4
!3
2
NO. 1
Z;l:- J
.
Table
4-1
List of Standard
Input/Output
Signals
(Centd)
Input
Signals
D, ..
~-
;;8 .
__~
M 327 ED 7 ED6
. ..
/
L
. ___
ED 4 ED3
__
I
d.
ED5
ED2
EDI
~ 1
ED()
EXTERNAL
-
#1328 i L ED15 ED14 . ~ ED13 . r ED12 _ ~EDii No. 2 EDIO~ ED9 . ED8 i EXT~A~T~lNPUT
$1329
EDCL
EDS2 . ..3...
EDSD -~.
EDSC
EDSB
lEDSA ,___
DATA tiPUT
Output Signals D3 ::2-., I MFUNCTION :; M18 BCD OUTPUT M14 ~M12 Mll 1 Dp D, DO
D, #1200 M 28
D6 M 24
$1201
1~
I
..
M38
T-
M34
M 32
M 31
~
M 01 DECODE OUTPUT
M 00 DECODE OUTPUT
#1202
ESPS
~T RESET OUTPUT
J!!2Lc
ALARM OUTPUT
#1203
OP FEEDING
#1204
S28
S24
s 22
S21 S-FUNCTION
S 18 BCD OUTPUT
S14
S12
Sll
#1205 ~ 28 .__Z-E.
I TX
T- FUNCTION
-
#1208 ~Z 2 ZP~ Z= Z AXIS Z AXIS X AXIS NO. 2 REFERENCE POSITION
- ZPX X AXIS
REFERENCE POSITION
#1216
R iXo7 ~ .
(SDD6)
Ro4 (SDD 3)
EXTERNAL
FOR S-COMMAND
A31
Table
4-1
List of Standard
Input/Output
Signals
(Centd)
Output Signals
M217
D5 D13 D4 D3 D2 D, DO 7 - (SDD 12) Ro12 (SD*II (SDDIO) RO 1O(SDD9) ~ 9(sDD8) (SDD15 (SDD 14) @DD 13) . i_ . . EXTERNAL OUTPUT FOR S-6 MMAND (S 4 DIGIT) NO. 2
D7
:.
tF1218
I
FSCE FSMn
L -. -
END OF
FS MEMORY ALTERATION
UNDER
EDITING MODE
FS
41219
~-
EREN~ ESEND .. EXTERNAL EXTERNAL DATA DATA SEARCH INPUT COMPLECOMPLETION TION
.
~SETEND L. END OF I
TLCH TOOL
I -
SIDXO SPINDLE
7 TPSA s. 5.
SIDXA SPINDLE
COORDI NATE
SYSTEM
s ETT I N G OUTPUT
INDEX EXECUTING
INDEX
END
,dlzzl
Uo 15
~=
..
~ UO12
.
!
~
Uoll
--J.
,
U08 .
_!
,..
Uo 14
UO13
Uolo
IJO 9
__ _
OUTPUT
~rl
~1222
~ __
._
.
2-
I
. A
t1224
MD7
MD6
,,
MD5
MD4
M
MD3
FUNCTIONS
MD2
MD1
MDO
HIGH-SPEED
Output Signsls
D7 #1260
D6
D5
D4 Sswo :
D3
D~
DI
Do
SSW3
i I SSW2
Sswl
SYSTEM
NUMBER
SWITCH
#1281
0,
OFFPB
ONPB
OLD
SVAM
ESP
OHT
1
POWER ON PB.
OVERLOAD
SERVO
ALARM
OVERHEAT
#1282
1HP7
1HP6
1HP5
1HP4
1HP3
1HP2 MONITOR
lHPI
lHPO
ND. 1 MANUAL
PULSE GENERATOR
#1283
I !
,
I SET3 SET2 SETTING SET1 #6219 MONITOR SETO
#1284
SVMX
#1265
00
CONSTANT 1
010
41286
0!010]0 CONSTANT
o~o O
00
1 1
#1287
Pcs PHASE PG
PAS PHASE A
1~
MONITOR
SPINDLE-AXIS
A33
4-1
List of Standard
Input/Output
Signals
(Centd)
A;
X-AXIS TGON PHASE PG MONITOR C
i P;
PHASE FOR B
~ :X
PHASE A X-AXIS
:*3 I-e-?k
ALX MONITOR FOR SERVO UNIT OF X-AXIS
1 TGONZ
I
Pcz PHASE C
I
,
PAZ
I
* ALZ A MONITOR
*OLZ
FUZ
SRDZ
Z-AXIS
TGON PG
PHASE
MONITOR
Z-AXIS
~12w b2Y2
COMMAND
#1291
SCOM48
SCOM44
1 SCOM42
SCOM41
SCOM38
SCOM34
SCOM32
SCOM31
spl NDLE
COMMAND
MONITOR
123picb
#1294
ALM28
ALM24
ALM22
MONITOR
ALM21
FOR
ALM18
ALARM
ALM14
CODE
T ALM12
ALM1l
W295
~]v~~
, ~ ALM38
MONITOR
ALM34 FOR
ALM32 ALARM
ALM31 CODE
A:34
Causes
(128CH)
BUFFER
CAPACITY
OVERFLOW
IN
A BLOCK
(128 CHARACTERS).
001
ZR UNREADY POINT
013
PROG
ERROR
(NO ADDRESS)
REFERENCE
ADDRESS PLUS NO DATA AND NEXT ADDRESS COMMAND. OR NO AD DRESS PLUS DATA.
002
014
PROG -,
ERROR SND .
( -,
) USED
SIGN
NOT CORRECTLY
003
015
PROG
ERROR
(U NUSABIECH) IN
004
016
005
RESET
UNREADY
(AFTER
EDITING)
PROG DATA
ERROR
DEPRESSING
RESET
OVERFLOW
006
018
007
019
008
020
009
021
PROG
ERROR
(G)
010
TH
ERROR
022
TAPE
HORIZONTAL
PARITY
ERROR
011
TV
ERROR
023
TAPE
VERTICAL
PARITY
ERROR.
(Centd)
Causes
036
PROG
ERROR
IP-G1O) WHEN
025
037
PROG
ERROR
026
PROG
ERROR
(G41-44)
038
IN NOSE RADIUS
COMPENSATION
027
PROG
ERROR
(G41-44)
039
ERROR DURING NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION CANCELLATION. (ERROR IN CIRCULAR NTERPOLATION MODE;.
-.
028 040 PROG ERROR M98, G65/66)
P NOT PROGRAMMED IN G65/66 BLOCK. POR QNOT PROGRAMMED IN M98 BLOCK. -. 029 041 NO PROG PROGRAM NO. (SEQUENCE NO ) NOT FOUND WHEN PROGRAM IS CALLED BY M98, M99, G65, G66, G, M, ANDT.
030
PROG
ERROR
~F!Ej
042 COMMAND
?ROG
ERROR
NO
SUBPROGRAM FIVE-NESTED.
(M98)OR
LflAC RO CALL
(G65/66)
031 PROG ERROR (R=O) 043 ?ROG ERROR k1911 IN M91 BLOCK
O COMMANDED
IN CIRCU -
P NOT SPECIFIED
032 044 TOOL DATA ERROR iR AN DC) IN THE THE OFFSET THE NOSE R AMOUNT IS WRITIEN NUMBER CO MM AND5D BY:.:: OF COMMAND T ** ;.::.; 033 045
034
PROG
ERROR
;G02/03;
046
MACRO
ERROR
NOSE
R)
CIRCULAR
ARC
R DESIGNATION
ERROR
DURING TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION, VARIABLES LIKE #5041 AN D#5042WHl CH CANNOT BE READ IN ADVANCE.
035
TOO
PROG
ERROR
(T OF S)
047
PROG IN TERFERE
ERROR
IG41-LL) ERROR
LARGE NO. OF T OFS CODE FOR TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION AND TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION.
NC E CHECK
LEAD lNCREASE/DECREASE VALUE MAXIMUM PROGRAMMABLE VALUE VARIABLE LEA D THREAD CUTTING, MI NUSVALU EOF LEAD COMMANDED. 061 PROG ERROR (Gil/G12
049
PROG
ERROR
IN THREAD) IN THREAD
COMMANDED
050 PROG ERROR (Gil/12) COMMANDED FOR BEVEVALUES OF 1, K, RTOO 1, K, R NOT CORRECTLY LING AND ROUNDING. LARGE.
062
PROG
ERROR
051
063
PROG
ERROR
(G92/G78/G2l)
RAP ID THREAD PULL-UP VALUE IN X-AXIS DIRECTION IN THREAD CUTTING WITH BEVELING SMALLER THAN BEVELING VALUE SET BY PARAMETER. I 064 PROG ERROP (G92/G781G21) IN Z-AXIS WITH BEVELING
052
PROG
ERROR
053
PROG
ERROR
(G50T/G92T)
065
VALUES OF TOOL COORDINATE MEMORY OUT OF THE RANGE BETWEEN 51 T0801N WORK Coordinate SYSTEM SETTING BY G7JOT
054
G51 POS-EXT
ERROR VALUE)
066
CA NNOT
CO NT IN UOUS THREAD OF
055
?ROG
ERROR
056
PROG
ERROR
(AXIS)
--L- I 06f3 !
068
AXIS COMMAND IN G20, G21 BLOCKS. AXIS-NOT CORRECTLY COMMANDED IN G04, G36-G38. 1 057 070
ERROR
+
058
MIRROR IMAGE
071
IMAGE
MODE I
059
ZR UNREADY COMPLETED ON THE AXIS WHICH HAS G29 COMMANDER REFERENCE POINT RETURN NOT CO MPLETEDON THE AXIS WHICH HASG30 COMMAND.
072
PROG ERROR
(G50TIG50XZ)
G28 NOT
G50TOR G50XZ IS COMMANDED WHEN THE COORDINATE SYSTEM IS SE TBY THE TCODE. G68 IS COMMANDED BY MIRROR IMAGE GRADE UP SPECIFICATIONS (46019D1 = 1).
{Centd)
Causes
CM PERROR
MULTIPLICATION FACTOR SET BY PARAMETER EXCEEDING 11 FOR EXTERNAL TOO LCOMPENSA TION.
074
086
075
087
PROG
ERROR
(G31~G35)
TOUCH SWITCH NOTON WHEN MOTION REACHES END POINT BY SKIP OR TOOL SET ERROR COMPENSATION COMMANDS
076
088
077
RS232C
ERROR
(OVER-RUN)
PROG
ERROR
(G90/G92/G94) IN
10 CHARACTERS MORE HAVE AFTER STOP CODE HAS BEEN THROUGH RS232C INTERFACE
078
090 P,Q
PROG
ERROR
NOT COMMANDED
079
091
PROG
ERROR
(G70-76/G72-78)
NO. NO SPECIFIED INCLUDING BY P,Q IN G70 IN
BLOCK
.
080 TOO LSETCMP ERROR G98 092 PROG ERROR (G70-76/G72-78) NO. OF BLOCKS INCLUDING FINISHED SHAPE PROGRAM SPECIFIED BY ~,0 IN G70, G71, G72 AND G73, OVER 46.
081
TOO LSETCMP
ERROR
PROG
ERROR
(G70-76/G72-78)
ERROR ERROR
OF PARAMETER COMPENSATION
SETTING (X)
UNABLE G-AND M-CODE IN FINISHED SHAPE PROGRAM SPECIFIED BY P,Q IN G70, G71, G72, AND G73.
082
TOOL
SET CMP
ERROR
PROG
ERROR
IG70-76/G72-78)
ERROR ERROR
OF PARAMETER COMPENSATION
SETTING (Z).
BEVELING AND ROUNDING CO MM AN DS AS LAST MOVE COMMAND FOR FINISHED SHAPE PROGRAM SPECIFIED BY P,O IN G70, G71, G72, AND G73. 095
083
TOOL
WEAR
CMP
ERROR
PROG
ERROR
!G70-76/G72-78)
TO 19 DESIGNATE
FAULTS IN FINISHED SHAPE PROGRAM SPECIFIED BY P, Q IN G71, G72 G29 COMMANDED IN FINISHING SHAPE PROGRAM SPECIFIED BY P ANDQ IN G70, G71, G72, AND G73. 096 PROG ERROR (G70-761G72-78)
084
WEAR
INPUTS
WOM,
WOP
D (CUTTING FREQUENCY I SPECIFIED BY G73ZER0 OR 1280R MORE, 1, K I ROUGH CUT TIN GjSPECl FIED BY G73 BOTH ZFRO D, K OF G76 EXCEEDING PROGRAMMABLE RANGE.
Causes (G70-761G72-78)
FOUR OR MORE PROCESSING INTERRUPTIONS BY FINISHED SHAPE PROGRAM IN STOCK REMOVAL CYCLE BY G71 RI, OR G72 RI.
098
PROG
ERROR
(G70-76/G72-78) Q NONREGISTERED
r
110
MACRO
ERROR
( [
1 5 LIMIT)
BY G70P, MEMORY.
099
PROG
ERROR
111
MACRO
ERROR
(MOVE
G66-M99) COMMAND OF
UNUSABLE ADDRESSES SPECIFIED IN G70T0 BLOCKS. ADDRESS REQUIRED IN THE BLOCK SPECIFIED.
100
CAL
ERROR
(FIXED
112
MACRO
101
CA LERROR
113
EXPONENT EXCEEDING
OF FLOATING ALLOWABLE
102
CAL
ERROR
114 DO
MACRO
ERROR
(DO-FORMAT) TO EN D.
~;~~{LATION
DIVISOR
NOT CORRESPONDING
103
CAL
ERROR
(SQUARE
ROOT) .-
115
MACRO FORMAT
ERROR IN
( [
UN MATCH)
ROOT VALUE
IS A NEGATIVE
ERROR
<EQUATION>
104
PROG
ERROR
(DOUBLE
ADR) INA
116
MACRO
ERROR
(DO END
NO. )
ml ND OmOUTOFRANGEl~m<3
105
MACRO
ERROR
117
CONSTANT
EXCEEDING
106
MACRO
118
MACRO
ERROR
(GO TO N)
TOO MANY
CODES
In GO
TO
nO<
n9999
APPROPRIATE
SEQUENCE
107
MACRO
ERROR
(FORMAT)
119
AS AFTER
READ
ERROR
IN
THE
FORMAT
EXCEPT
FOR
EQUATION.
108
MACRO UNDEFINED
ERROR VARIABLE
(U ND EFIN
#NO.)
120
PRTN
ERROR
(NOT
NO. DESIGNATED.
SEQUENCE PROGRAM.
NO. SEARCHED
(Centd)
Causes
G31 COMMANDED
122
134
(EXTI BY
123
135
EXT
124
PRTN
ERROR
136
125
137
126
138
127
139
128
140
PROG
ERROR
(Gill/Gll2)
ERROR BLOCK.
IN
ADDRESS
WORD
COMMANDING
OF
Gill
129
141
PROG
ERROR
(Gill/Gl12) A, B BY Gll
130 DATA
EXT
142
PROG
ERROR
(G1111G112)
ERROR
lST BEVELING PORTION OUTSIDE RECTANGLE CO MPOSEDBY START AND END POINTS OR BETWEEN 45 STRAIGHT LINES OF START TO END POINTS AND END TO START POINTS. 243 ERROR FROG ERROR IN Gill :G1ll; G112) BLOCK
131
COMMAND
132
1u
PROG M, ST
ERROR
COMMAND
A-40
Causes (Gill/Gl12)
Causes (G122/Gl23)
WORD
FOR
THE
TOOL
EXCHANGE
REQUEST
OUTPUT
IS ON.
158
PROG
ERROR
(G122/G123)
PROGRAMMED
SHAPE
THERE ARE TOOL NOS. THAT ARE MORE THAN 31 WITH REGISTERED TOO LS. WJ,THIN TOOL GROUP NOS. INSTRUCTED BY . . . ..OF WORK PIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING (G 50 T:::::; 90). 159 PROG ERROR (G1221G123;
MORE THAN 6 TYPES OF COMPENSATION MEMORY NOS. ARE REGISTERED WITH 148 170 MEM ERROR (OFS)
ONE TOOL.
COMPENSATION
TOTAL
CHECK
ERROR
150
PROG ERROR (G122/Gl23) G 122 AND G 123 CO MM AN D BLOCKS ARE NOT INDEPENDENT COMMANDS. THE SAME TOOL IS REGISTERED WITH MORE THAN TWO GROLJPS. THE SAME OFFSET MEMORY NO. IS USED WITH MORE THAN TWO TOOLS. ADDRESSES OTHER P, AND TARE lNSTRUCTE DTOTHErOLL INFORMATION REGISTRATION PROGRAM.
172
MEM
ERROR
(SET)
SETTING
L
AR EA TOTAL
CHECK
ERROR,
151
PROG ERROR (G122/G123) NO DESIGNATION OF GROUP NO. P IS GIVE N,OR VALUE OTHER THAN 1 ~PS191SGl VEN. NO DESIGNATION OF LAS THE LIFE PER TOOL IS GIVE N,OR A VALUE OTHER THAN 1SLS99991S GIVEN.
173 A
MEM
ERROR
(PRM)
PARAMETER
AREA
TOTAL
CHECK
ERROR.
152
PROG ERROR [G122/G123) A VALUE OTHER THAN l< TOOL NO. S501S INSTRUCTED AS THE TOOL NO. A VALUE OTHER THAN 1 S COMPENSATION MEMORY NO. <501S IN ST RUCTED AS THE COMPENSATION MEMORY NO. VALUES OTHER OOR MORE THAN 20 ARE INSTRUCTED AS:::; (GROUP NO. ) COMMANDS OF T L;[u90T0T[:cj95 AND T[I[:99 COMMANDS.
174
ME ME RR OR (KEEP)
KEEP
ME MO RY TOTAL
CHECK
ERROR.
153
PROG
ERROR
MACRO
TOTAL
CHECK
ERROR
154
PROG
ERROR
(G122/G123)
176
MORE THAN 16 TYPES OF TOOL NO. + COMPENSATION MEMORY NO. ARE ATTEMPTED TO BE REGISTERED WI TH ONE GROUP NO.
155 PROG ERROR (G122/G123) TOOLS OF THE DESIGNATED GROUP NO. ARE NOT REGISTERED, T:::::: 92, T:::::: 93, T[::[::94 AND T;::[::95 ARE INSTRUCTED, BUT THE CORRESPONDING COMPENSATION MEMORY NOS. ARE NOT REGISTERED. 156 PROG ERROR fG122/G123) THE CO MMAND FOR TOO L- LIFE MANAGEMENT IS ISSUSED WITH EQUIPMENT THAT DID NOT HAVE THE ADDED FUNCTIONS OF T4DIGIT DESIGNATION AND OFFSET MEMORY ADDITION,
177
178
TOOL
TOOL NO. INPUT SIGNALS #1317 (D4T0 (D4TOD6) ARE MORE THAN 51.
D7) #1342
A41
(Centd)
Causes
HDLCSOFT
CO MM AND
ERROR
INSIDE
180
SEQ ERROR
192
HDLC8530 SEND
ERROR HARDWARE
SEQUENCE 181
ERROR(1)
TRANSMISSION ERROR.
NC SEND-SIDE
193
HDLC8530
TRANSMISSION ERROR,
182
HDLC
NAK
ERROR
110 TIMES)
183
195
HDLC
CMOS
FILE
.
184 196 HDLC 1/0 DATA ERROR READING FROM ACGCTO NC
.
185 197 HDLCNC REQUEST ERROR
COMMAND
FROM
ACGCTO
186
198
OPERATION
ERROR
187
199
AM GCCOMMUN
ICATION
SYSTEM
ERROR
COMMUNICATION .,,IU L
ERROR
BETWEEN
AM GC AND
188
200
ACGC2
COMMUNICATION ERROR
SYSTEM
ERROR
BETWEEN
AC GC120
I 89
201
OT (x)
OVER TRAVEL
X.
190
HDLC
SYSTEM
SO=T
ERROR ERROR
202
OT (Z)
TRANSMISSION
SYS7EM
SO FTWARE
OVER TRAVEL
Z.
Code 203
Causes
I Code 215
Causes
204
216
205
217
206
218
207
I
I
219
208
220
S-0T2
221
I
210
STROKE INHIBIT)
LIMIT X.
SECOND
AREA
I
S-OT1 (X) STORE DSTROKE LIMIT FIR ST AR EAX.
222
S-0 T2(Z) STORED (OUTSIDE STROKE INHIBIT) (INSIDE) LIMIT THIRD AREA LIMIT Z. SECOND AREA
211
I
LIMIT FIR ST AREAZ
223
212
224
S-0T3
LIMIT X.
THIRD
AREA
213
225
S-0T3
1.IMIT Z.
THIRD
AREA
(Confd)
Causes
-.
228 240
229
2LI
ZR ERR OR-POS
:X;
POINT
RETURN
POSITION
ERROR
X.
ZR ERR OR-POS
!2)
REFERENCE
POINT
RETURN
POSITION
ERROR
231
243
232
244
233
245
.
234 246
235
247
236
248
-
231 249
238
270
Causes
Code -. 283
Causes
272 P-SET
P-SET ERROR
ERROR Z
(Z) I
284
273 T
285
274
286
275 287
276
288
277 289
279
311
280 MATCH
MACH RDY
UNREADY OFF.
312
281
313
282
314
(C@d)
Causes
UN FIN IS HE DPROGGEN MEMORY PROGRAM ERASED. GENERATION SPECIFIED IS NOT PERFORMED BY 0,,9,9,9,9 MUST
BE
316
328
UNSUITABLE
MM21
MEMORY BOARD WHEN PROGRAM AREA GENERATION IS MADE DOES NOT MATCH CUR RENT MEMORY BOARD. 317
THE
329
PC CPU
ERROR
318
330
STOP
319
331 FUSE
FUSE BLOWN
(X) X.
320
332
FUSE
FUSE(Z) BLOWN Z
321 333
322
CMOS VACANT AREA ERROR DA TA OTHER THAN O ARE WRITTEN IN THE C-MOSMEMOR YAREAOTHER THAN THE PARAMETER, OFFSET, KEEP MEMORY, COMMON VA RI ABLE, OR PROGRAM. AC GC2 SYNC ERROR
334
323
335
324
AM GC SYNC
ERROR
336
NC
325
337
(SET
326
AC GC120/AMGC
SERVO
OFF
REQ
338
RVO-OFF AIMGC.
REQUEST
FROM
Code
Causes
Causes
339
340
352
OL (Z) OVERLOAD.
341 SERVO
SERVO ERROR
ERROR X.
(X)
353
342 SERVO
SERVO ERROR
ERROR Z
(Z)
354
343
355
344
356
345
35?
346
358
347
359
348
360
349
361
PG ERROR PG ERROR X.
(X)
350
362
PG ERROR PGERRORZ.
(Z)
A47
(Centd)
Causes
.
364 376
365
377
366
PG ERROR PG ERRORS,
(S)
378
367
379
368
380
369
381 AXIS
370
382 AXIS
AXIS ERROR
ERROR (2)
(2J
371
FG ERROR(l) FGERROR1.
383
AXIS
AXIS ERROR
ERROR (3).
(3)
372
FG UNREADY FG UNREADY.
384
373
385
374
386
Code 387
Causes
Code 399
Causes
I I
388 400 SEQ ERROR SEQUENCE ERROR (2)
389
401
390 SERVO
SERVO PACK
PACK
ALARM
(S)
ALARMS.
I
I
402
391 SERVO
SERVO PACK
PACK
ALARM
(X)
403
AL ARMX.
I
(Z) T Z 405
392 SERVO
SERVO PACK
PACK ALARM
ALARM
393
394
395
407
396
408
397
409
398
810
(Centd)
Causes
823
.
812 824
813
825
814
826
815
827
816
828
817 829
.818
-
830 CPU CPU ERROR ERROR (1). - 831
819
832
.
822 834
.-
A50
Code
Causes
Code 847
Causes
835
836
848
837
849
838
910
TAPE-MEM
ERROR ERROR
ME MO RY VERIFYING
(OFF-LINE).
839
920
TAPE
TAPE
READING-IN
840
ALARM
841
X-coordinates diffemt between ting start point and last block program. Z-coordinates different cutting start point and shape program. Z-coordinate for cutting
842
start
point
by
G71
com-
843
mand different from Z-coordinate for block of the finished shape program. G71 . . . R1 is excepted. ) X-coordinate for cutting start point by
G7Z
com-
844
mand different from Xcoordinate for block of the finished shape program. ) G72 . . . R1 is excepted. X-coordinate G71 . . . R1. point. for
845
846
A51
(Centd)
values for addresses B , X(U) , Z(W) second straight line are determined and programmed shape cannot be
Command value for B 360.OCO, 0, 180.000, 270.000, 90.000, 180.CX)O 360.000 .*... 90.000
Address X (U) commanded fying second straight line. . -__ I Address Z (W) commanded fYln9 second straight line. for _
sp+w-
___
for speci-
270.000
Command values for addresses C and D for beveling too large for the programmed shape. Opera tion cannot be made according to the command .
END aoINT
-.
ALA:RM
140
\
1 L ::;; one or no specifying address second of addresses straight line. B, w Command values for address P and Q specifying radius for rounding too large for the program med shape. Operation cannot be made according to the command.
. Commanding two addresses of addresses B, X(U) , Z (W) specifying second straight line. In addition to this, one or no address commanded among addresses A, 1, K , specifying first straight line. Address C specifying first beveling and address P specifying first rounding commanded.
---1/ > /
-1 ! &START
POINT
second beveling and adsecond rounding commanded. X and Z specifying Q and D specifying secsecond No intersecting second straight
. Commanding addresses ond straight line and beveling and rounding. ALARM 143
point line.
for
first
straighi
line
and
Command values for addresses A, 1, K specifying first straight line are determined as follows, and programmed shape cannot be formed. First straight the same line. line and
?-ART T \
second
straight line on
Command Value for A --380.000, C, 180.000, --270.003, 90.000, 180.000, 360.000 90.COO,
Address I commanded ifying first straight line. Address K commanded for spec~--ifying first straight line. for spec-
270.CKJO
A.-52
point
between
circular
arc
and
both
commanded.
. I and K not commanded. Ito!l commanded for I and . P and Q and C both D both commanded. commanded.
K.
m
K R .----
I START POINT
point
between
circular
arc
and
ALARM Beveling
Beveling
for
command
D cannot
be
made.
&&
sTART
A53
APPENDIX
Table 6.1
Address
6 LIST OF DATA
Address Characters
B: O: Basic Optional
Meaning
Angle designation
Specifications
Specifications
Preparatcny function
(G-function)
X-component
of arc center,
B, O
Z-component
of arc center,
B, O
Incremental
Miscellaneous
function
(M-function)
Sequence
number
Program number
Dwell,
number
Spindle function
(S-function),
tool coordinate
memory number
X-axis
incremental
command value,
dwell,
Z-axis
incremental
command value,
X-axis coordinate
value
Z-axis
coordinate
value
A54
Table 6.2
Function Characters
EIA Code
ISO Code
Function
Remarks
Blank
NuL
Error in significant
in ISO
BS
BS
Disregarded
Tab - CR -~
TH
Disregarded .
LFINL
CR =+ E
Disregarded
~ Disregarded,
=5r*-~
atoz -L=P=characters
o
I
-------=
-:*;::nt--
DEL Disregarded (Including All Mark) Decimal point # * Sharp (Variable designation) ~ Asterisk (Multiplication operatcx)
Del
I
Parameter starting *
I ~
vA~..
1 T J-J
---
-1
-(.
L. --?
L-
l sermacrOop:=-[<,
User macro operator J User macro operator
I -i
I
?
Notes : 1. Characters
other than the above cause error in significant data area. Control Out and Control In is ignored as insignificant recognized. data
2. Information between
A55
APPENDIX
Table 6.3 Tape Code
Notes : 1. For the hole pettern of EIA code of the characters with an asterisk, the pattern How-
* * *
d can be desig-
* * * *
A!j6
Table
6.4
Tape
Format
Inch Output
_~ ~
B: 0:
Basic Option
Input
Inch Input
Program No.
04
04 ,-
Sequence
No.
N4
N4
G-Function
G3
G3
Coordinate a:
X, Z, 1, K, U, W, R
a+53
a+34
B . .. . . .
Feed/rein
F 50
F 32
F 50
F 42
F 24
F 42
F 24 . . E 26
E 26
E 44
S2
7
S2 -~I
B o
S-Function
S4
T(2 8 +1)
S4 ---~ T(2+I)
B +2)
M-Function
M3
M3
10
Dwell
u (P) 53
u (P)
P4
53
11
P4
12
Sequence
No.
Designation
(P) 4
Q (P) 4
B, O
13
No. of Repetitions Angle Designation Line Angle Designation Thread for Straight for Multiple
L8
L8
14
A (B) 33
A (B) 33
0
o
?5
B3
B3
Notes : I Inch/Metric output is set by setting parameter S6007 Da, input is set by setting (F6001 Do). or feed/rev can be switched by G 98, G 99
2 Inch/Metric
APPENDIX
Table 6.5
Address
Metric Input
Program No. O
Metric Input
1-9999
Inch Input
Sequence
No.
1-9999
19999
G function
0-199
0-199
.
Coordinate X, Z, 1, K, Addresst U, W, R .
+ 99999.999
mm.
? 3937.0078in.
-99999
.999 mm.
9999.9999
in
Feedlmin
t 24000
mmlmln
0.01 944.88in.lmin ,
160960
mm/min
0.01 2400
OOin./min
0.01 500.00
mmlrev
0.0001 19.6850
inhev
0.0001
50.000C
In./rev
o.ooom419.685030 in.lrev
S2 S-function S4
o-99
o-99
0-9999
0-9999
T3 T-function T4
0-999
0 999
0-9999
0-9999
M-function
Dwell U, P
1-9999
1- 999!3
Sequence
No. Designation
1-9999 .L
1-9999
No
1-99999999
1-99999999
Angle Designation
O-? 360.COO0
O- i360.COO
Angle Designation
0-360
0360
.28.26.2
Automatic
Threading
Cycle
(G 76).
Table
I
6.6
Metric output (screw) Metric input Inch irmut ~ 0.0001 or 0,001 in.
Item
Least input increment Tool offset __i. Tcol radius Minimum stepfhandle feed Program designation Parameter & settina
I ~..
~0-*i30,2601in. ---
. in.
0.001
mm
:.
0.001 mm ---+.
0.001 mm
point coordinate
O ~99999.999 O255
mm
compensation
value
pulses (Note 1)
k-I
G9999.9999
in.
O255pulses
Notes:
1. l-pulse 2. X-axis
= least input increment designated with diameter (except for pulse display)
APPENDIX
Table Special GC odeI Special GCodeIl
G Code
Function
Section B B, O B, o
f
G02 G03 G04 GCEl G 10 . ..1..:. Gll G 12 G 20 G21 G 22 --. --,~G 23 G 27 G 28 --G1---f-FB-I I ~ ; ~
_
G 02 + G 03 G04 G06~GW5 GtO Gil G 12 G 20 G21 G 22 G 23 G27 G28 Gw .-.-.. . ~ ~ --+ +.:% G 10 Gll G12 G 70 I G 02 G03 G@l
Linear interpolation,
-~
~
~
ERROR DETECT Tool offset value setup ~ Beveling
OFF positioning
B, O B B
o 0 0
0 0
G71 G 22 01 G 23 G 27 G 28 * .
0 0 B
Radius programming for circular interpolation CCW Reference point return check
t
Automatic return to reference point i----~ Return from refefence point ~ Retunrn to 2nd reference point B ---B o 0 continuous threadcuting, multi-start threadcutitng B, O 0
~ G30 G31
-+------G31
G31
; t
::
Variable
lead threadcutting
* :: ~ 07
==
0 0 0 0 0 0
L
G 37 - G% 08 G 39
Stofed stioke limit 2nd area OFF -- Stored stroke limit 3rd area ON ~ Stored stroke limit 3rd aea OFF cancel No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
t
Tool radius compensation
!
G41 G 42
G41 1 G42 I
0 0
-:;
[::-
Tool radius compensation No. 4
4 5.
0 0
Notes : 1. G codes in groups from 01 through 11 are modal. When the control
the G codes is energized marked with with
G codes m section B are bas(c Standard G codes can be converted to special G codes I by parameters. (basic feature)
be the be selected standard as optional G codes and funcspecial
are
the
power
switch
or reset, selected.
automatically
6.
Special
tion. G code
G code 11can
selected, [1 cannot
When
used.
7.
The initial states of G codes of 05, 07, 08 group when the control is powered correspond to their respective setting data.
3.
The block.
modal
B:
Table 6.7 List of G Codes (Centd) O:
Basic Optional
G Code
I
I
Special I
Special GCcde II
GCcde
Group
Function
Section
G 50
G 92
G 92
* +i
system setup
G65
G65
* G65
09
~ User macro simple call User macro modal call ~User macro modal call cancel }---~ Mirror image by programming ON Mirror image by programming OFF -Finishing cycle Stock removal in turning Stock removal in facing I
*-G 70 G71 G72 G 73 G74 G 75 G76 G90 G92 G-b I I ~ I I -L~ ~ ~ ~ -E79 G 70 G71 G 72 G 73 G 74 -G 75 G76 G 77 G 78
r:-:
G 72 G 73 G 74 G 75 G 76 G 77 G 78 G 20 G21 G24 ~ ---
10
-+k..
L 1
Automabc o~---
threadcuttlng
cycle
+--B B B ~ o
Turning cycle A 01 I Threading cycle ~ Facing cycle B [ Constant surface speed control 02 ~ Constant surface speed control cancel ~ had 04 Feed per revolution (mmlrev) Absolute command 03 par minute (mmlmin) ~
B B B o o
~
G122 G123 G ~ ~ G122 G123 G i ~ G122
Incremental
command
11
G123 G 111
Tool life control l~JregisatiOn nd Taper multiple bevelinglrounding f Arc multiple bevelinglrounding
111 ~
111
o o 10 0
a=il~
%+%Notes :
13
Cancel
groove
width compensation
.roovewdthcompensa~on
1. G
codes in groups from 01 through 11 are modal. When with the power switch or reset, r are automatically selected.
4. 5.
G codes in section B are basic. Standard G codes can be converted to special G codes I by parameters. (basic feature) as optional func-
6.
Special G code II can be selected tion. When selected, G code u cannot be used.
The initial states of G codes of 05, 07, 08 group when the control is powered correspond to their respective setting data.
3.
A61
YASNAC LX3
CNC SYSTEM FOR TURNING APPLICATIONS
TOKYO OFFICE Ohtemachl Bldg. 1-6-1 Ohternachl Ch!yoda-ku Tokvo, 100 Japan Phone (03) 3284-9111, -9145 Telex YASKAWA J33530 Fax (03) 3284-9034 SEOUL OFFICE Seoul Center Bldg, 91-1 So Kong-Dong, Chung-ku, Seoul, Korea
Phone (02) 776-7844 Fax (02) 753-2639 TAIPEI OFFICE Union Commercial Bldg. 14F 137, Nanklng East Road, Sec 2, Ta!pel Phone (02) 507-7065, -7732 Fax (02) 506-3837 YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC. : SUBSIDIARY Chicago-Technical Center 3160 MacArthur Blvd Northbrook, Ill[nols 60062-1917 U SA Phone (708) 291-0411 Fax (708) 291-1028 Los Angeles Off]ce 7341 Lincoln Way, Garden Grove, California 92641 U S A Phone (714) 894-5911 Telex (230) 678396 YASKAWAUS TSTN Fax (714) 894-3258 New Je~sey Office 30 Two B~ldg& Road Falrfleld New Jersey 07006 u S A Phone (201) 575-5940 Fax (201) 575-5947 YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH : SUBSIDIARY Monscnauerstrasse 1 W 4000 Dusseldorf 11, Germany Phone (0211) 950030 Telex (41) 8588673 YASD D Fax [0211) 507737 YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD. Taiwan
...
CPF Bldg 79 Robinson Road No i3-05 Singapore 0106 phone 2217530 Telex 187) 24890 YASKAWA RS Fax (65) 224-5854
Y
YASUAWA
YASKAWA
ELECTRIC
CORPORATION
TOE-C843-9.20D @
Printed in Japan January 199386.5 586-176
lTA @